0
.Gr
A SYSTEM
LATIN PROSODY AND METRE,
HE— BE-ST Tnrr H OTITT I E 8,
ANCIENT AND MODERN.
CHARLES ANTHON, LL.D.,
»
PKOFCS8OK OP THE GREEK AND LATIX LANGUAGES IN COLUMBIA COi.I.EOl KXW-YORK, AND RECTOR OF THE GRAMMAR-SCHOOL.
NEW YORK:
HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, 329 k 331 PEARL STREET,
FBANKLIN SQUARE.)
1856.
Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year i841, by
CHARLES ANTHON, in the Clerk's Office of the Southern District of New- York
TO THE
REV. MATTHEW SIMPSON, D. D.,
President or the Asbnry University in the Stale of Indiana, THIS WORK
IS RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED,
AS A
TRIBUTE OF ESTEEM FOR PROFESSIONAL TALENT, AND FOR THB
DEEP INTEREST WHICH HE HAS EVER EVINCED IN
THE CAUSE OF TRUE LEARNING.
PREFACE.
THE author of the present work prepared several years ago a Treatise on Latin Prosody and Metre, which met with no unfavourable reception, and proved, as he has reason to believe, a somewhat useful guide to the young prosodian. This volume having been for some time completely out of print, the author has been induced to write a new work on the subject : one that may not only be more worthy of his increased experience as an instructer, but may furnish also more detailed information on various points that were neces- sarily omitted in the previous treatise. In collecting ma- terials for this purpose, the author has derived important aid from the Latin Prosodies of Dr. Carey and Professor Ram- say, especially the latter, and he has introduced into the pres- ent work whatever appeared of value in these and other publications of a similar nature. He does not entertain a doubt, therefore, but that the young scholar will find in the present volume everything that may be needed by him, not only at the commencement, but also throughout the several stages, of his academic career.
Very few rules are given, it will be perceived, for the struc- ture of Latin verse. This forms a distinct department of study, for which, at some future day, a separate work will be prepared ; and this intended work will also contain the Essay 0:1 Leonine and Macaronic Versification, which was to have ft rmed part, of the present volume, but which has been omit- ted through fear of making the work too large a one.
The Latin metrical rules of Alvarez were given in the pre- vious work, but are omitted in this. The practice of giving Latin rules in matters of prosody is fast going out of use, and deservedly so ; and, besides this, the rules of Alvarez are in numerous instances decidedly erroneous.
Columbia College, Aug. 2, 1841.
PROSODY.
SECTION I.
I. PROSODY treats of the Quantity of Syllables, and of the different Species of Verse.1
II. A Syllable is composed of one or more Letters ; as, /, in, in-tus.
III. Letters are divided into Vowels and Consonants.
IV. Vowels, or open, free-coming sounds, are six in number : A, E, I, O, U, Y.
V. From the vowels are formed eight Diphthongs : JE, AI, AU, El, EU, (E, OI, UI.
VI. Consonants, or sounds produced by the compression of the organs of speech, are divided into Mutes and Semi- vowels.
VII. The Mutes are eight : B, C, D, G, K, P, Q, T.
VIII. The Semivowels, which have a sound more open than that of the mutes, are likewise eight : F, L, M, N, R, S, X, Z.
IX. Of the semivowels four are Liquids, L, M, N, R, and they are so called because ihey flow, as it were, from the lips with less exertion than is required in articulating the other consonants.
X. Two other of the semivowels are Double Letters, X and Z ; the letter X being equivalent to CS, GS, or KS ; and the letter Z to DS or SD.
1. The Doctrine of Accent will be found under a separate head, im- mediately after that part of the present work which treats of Versifica- tion.
B
11 QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES.
XI. The letter H is to be regarded, not as a true conso I ant, but as a mere breathing.
XII. The letter J was altogether unknown to the an- cients. It appears that, among the Romans, the letter I exercised a double function, being sometimes purely a vowel and sometimes a consonant, answering very nearly to our y. The character j was introduced, in later times, into those words where i had the power of a consonant, and therefore of itself, when not followed by another conso- nant, could not have lengthened a short vowel. The letter J, accordingly, is not, as some maintain, a double consonant.1
XIII. The letter V, in like manner, represented among the Romans, on some occasio'ns, a consonant, on others a vowel sound. And the character U, to indicate it when a vowel, is, like the letter J, a modern invention.
XIV. The letter Q was precisely equivalent in sound to C or K, all three being pronounced hard:
SECTION II.
QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES.
I. By the Quantity of a syllable is meant the duration or continuance of the voice in pronouncing it.
II. A syllable is either Short, Long, or Common.
III. A short syllable is sounded rapidly, and consists of what is technically termed one time, like the a in the Eng- lish word orator, or the e in the Latin word legere ; and is thus marked, legere.
IV. A long syllable is slowly pronounced, and occupies twice the time employed in sounding a short one ; as in the a of the English word mediator, or of the Latin word sedare ; and is thus marked, sedare.
V. A common or doubtful syllable may be made long or
1. Consult remarks on page 27, with regard to such forms as ejtu, cujrj, fee
ORIGIN OF PROSODTAL RULES. 15
short, at the option of the poet ; as, papyrus or papyrus ; fuerimus or fuerimus.1
VI. The quantity of .a syllable is either natural, that is, dependant on the intrinsic nature of the vowel itself, as the re of rcsisto, in which the e is short by nature ; or accident- al, as the re in restiti, which becomes long because it hap- pens to be followed by two consonants.
VII. The quantity of syllables is determined by certain established rules, or, when these fail, by the authority of the poets.
VIII. In polysyllables, or long words, the last syllable except one is called the penultima, or, more briefly, the penult ; and the last syllable except two, the antepenultima, or antepenult.
SECTION III. OF THE ORIGIN OF PROSODIAL RULES.
I. Rules in Prosody originate from a careful examination of the works of the best Latin poets.2
II. In making such examination, we perceive that, with a very few exceptions, the quantity of the same syllable in the same words is always the same ; and, by classifying those which are analogous, we arrive by induction at cer- tain fixed principles, which are imbodied in rules.
III. In a great many other cases, however, we are una- ble to detect any fixed principle, and must rest satisfied with saying that we have the authority of the poets for making such syllables long or short.3
1. Consult remarks on page 29, Observation 1, with regard to a short vowel before a mute followed by a liquid.
2. For some remarks on the relative value of the Latin poets as met- rical authorities, consult Appendix.
3. All prosodial rules, in fact, are based upon the authority of the po- ets ; but, according to the usage of prosodians, those syllables only are said to be long or short by authority which cannot be reduced to rules.
hi VOWEL BKFOttfc. ANOTHER VOWEL.
SECTION IV.
RULES. 1. A VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER VOWEL.
/ I. A vowel before another vowel, or a diphthong, is short ; a.s,fuit, deus, tineas, eocinii^.
Tibull. Quisfuit, horrendos primus qui protulit enses?
Virg. Ipse ctiam exirmas laudis succensus amore.
The letter H being merely a note of aspiration or breath- ing, is not regarded in such cases as the present ; and there- fore, when h stands between two vowels, the preceding vowel is short ; as, riihil, niihi.
Pers. De nihilo nihil, in nihilum nil posse reverti.
Virg. Musa, mihi causas memora ; quo numine lasso
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. Fio has the i long in all its tenses, except in those where it is followed by er ; as, fio, flebam, flam, but fierem, fieri.1
1. It has been conjectured that the old form of Jio was/eio, and that the first syllable was long in all the tenses without distinction. Some of the parts, however, of these tenses in which er occurs, could not have been used at all in Dactylic verse, if the first syllable had been always long : thus, fleres, fierent, cannot stand in any place of a Dactylic verse, and not even fierem, fieri, without an elision. Hence, when the e of the diphthong was dropped, the writers of heroic verse intro- duced this change into the quantity of those tenses where it was most necessary, preserving the proper and original quantity in the rest. This opinion receives much support from the fact, that the Comic writers, who lived before the prosody of the language was very accurately defined, and whose verse required no such modification of these words, constantly used fieret, &c., with the first syllable long ; as, " Injurium 'st nam si esset unde id fieret." (Tercnt., Ad., 1, 2, 20.) On the other hand, in the works of the Christian poets, such as Prudentius, Arator, Tertul- lian, &c., not only the first syllable in fierem, &c., but \nfio, &c., also, is made short. Thus, we have the following Archilochian heptameter in Prudentius : " lamque tuus fieri man das, fio Cyprianus alter." (Perist., 13. f>9.) A less accurate mode of explanation is given by Vossius (Aristarck., 2, 13), founded upon a passage in Priscian. (Hamsay's Latin Prosody, p. 23.)— Of the use of ei in earlier Latinity, where, at a later day, the long i was employed, we have numerous ex- amples. Thus, on the Duilian column we find castreis, socieif, classeis,
VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER VOWEL. 17
Ovid. Omnia jam f lent, fieri qua posse negabam, Virg. Anchiscs, fleret vento mora ne quaferenti.
Exc. 2. The genitives and datives singular of the fifth de- clension make e long before i ; as, diei, speciei. But it is found short in spei, and common in fidei or jidei, and in rei or rei.1
Virg. Nunc adeo, melior qucfiiiam pars acta diei.
Senec. Credi periisse. — Vix spei quidquam est super (Iamb, trim.)
Lucret. Nee jacere indu manus via qua munitajidei.
Statius. Quis morum fideique ? modus nunquamne mrili.
Lucret. Praterea rei qua corpora mittere possit.
Horat. Curia?- nescio quid semper abest rei. (Choriamb.)
naveis, numei ; and in the S. C. de Bacch. we have quei, virei, sibci, eeis, vobcis, &c. Consult also Orell., Inscript. Lat. Select., n. 626, 3308, 3673, 4848, &c.
1. According to some, the old nominative form of th^ fifth declension was diets, specieis, Jideis, making in the genitive din-is, speciei-is, Jidn-is, which case afterward dropped the *, and became dieii, specieii, fideil, and eventually diei, speciei, fidei, the i of the diphthong being dropped. (Ramsay's Latin Prosody, p. 22.) The explanation given by Bopp, however, is in every way preferable. This eminent philologist makes the original form of the nominative to have been die-is, specie-is, fole-is, and the genitive to have dropped its characteristic ending s, and to have terminated like the old locative in i; thus making die-i, specie-i, &c. If we write die-is in Greek characters, 6iri-i<;, and call to mind, at the same time, the close relation that subsists between the Ionic 77 and the Doric a, we will perceive at once a remarkable analogy between the first and fifth declensions in Latin, and why so many words are found belonging, as it were, to each ; as, planitia and planilie-s, canilia and camtie-s, &c. In this way, too, we can explain the old form of the genitive singular in the first declension, by supposing the nominative to have been, for example terra-is, musa-is, whence came the genitive terrd-i, musd-i, by dropping the * and retaining the locative ending, while the Doric a in the nominative terra was displaced by the yEolic a. (Bopp, Ve.rgleiche.nie Grammatik, p. 141, seqq. — Id ib., p. 217, seqq.) — It remains now to account for such forms as Jidei, rei, &c. In all prob- ability we have here merely an attempt to reduce the old forms with the long penult to the operation of the general rule. It is worthy of re- mark, too. that the examples of fidei all occur in writers of the lower age, with whom it is very common. The subject of the identity of all the Latin declensions, which has been merely glanced at in this note, may be seen more fully discussed in Bopp's work just referred to, and in Slruve's treatise, "Ueber die Lateinische Declination," &c., p. 3S, seqq. B2
18 VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER VOWEL.
Exc. 3. Genitives in ius have the i long in prose, but common in poetry. Alterius, however, has the » al- ways short, all us always long.1
Virg. Posthabita coluisse Samo ; hie illius arma.
Id. Tu faciem illius noctem non amplius imam.
Id. Ipsius Anchisae long&vi hoc munus habebis.
Id. Nunc ultro ad cineres ipsius et ossa parentis
Horat. Nullius addictus'jurare in verba magistri.
Virg. Non te nullius exercent numinis ira.
Id. Unius ob noxam et furias Ajacis O'ilei.
Id. Navibus infandum amissis unius ob iram.
Exc. 4. Such proper names as Ca'ius, Pompe'ius, Vul- te'ius, as also Veius, and the like, have the a or e long before i.2
1. The authority for the remark that genitives in ius have the penult long in prose, is furnished by Quintilian : " Prctlerea qua fiunt spalio,
tive cum syllaba longa. corripitur, vt unius ob noxam et
furias; extra carmen non dcprehendas." (Inst. Or., 1, 5, 18.) — Bopp considers the Latin genitive-ending ius analogous to the Sanscrit termi- nation sya, the a being changed to M before the final s by a very usual process in early Latin. (Compare the Sanscrit vrka-s with the Latin lupu-s, and yung'mas with jungimus.) In accordance with this view of the subject, the old genitive forms of illius, ipsius, nullius, &c., will have been illi-ius, ipsi-ius, nulli-ius, &c., which, when changed to illius, &c., preserved their proper quantity in prose, although the poets took advantage of the circumstance of the i being followed by a vowel, to bring them, when it suited their purpose, under the general rule. (Bopp, Vergleich. Gramm., p. 220.) — With regard to alterius, it may be remarked, that although no instance can be found in any poet of its occurring with the long penult, yet there can be no doubt of its having been once employed. Indeed, Terentianus Maurus, the grammarian, actually uses alterius on one occasion ; in the following Trochaic tetrameter catalectic (cap. 3, de Fed., v. 1352):
" Sescuplo vel una vincct altering sinpuhim."
Priscian ascribes the short penult in alterius to the circumstance of the genitive's exceeding the nominative by two syllables : " quod dual/us tyllahis vincit genitivus nominativum" (lib. 6, c. 7, p. 695. ed. Putsch.). A most singular explanation, certainly, and yet advocated by Vossius (de Art. Gram., 2, 13, p. 150, ed. Focrtsch.). — The reason assigned by Scaliger for the long penult of genitives in ius, namely, that they were originally written cms, is adopted by Ramsay, but is far inferior to Bopp's explanation given above. (Scat., de Caus L. L., c. 43.)
2. According to Priscian (7, 5, p. 739). such words as Caius, Pom-
VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER VOWEL. 19
CatulL Cinna est Caius, is sibi paravit. (Phalaecian.) Mart. Quod peto da, Cai, non peto consilium. (Pentam.) Ovid. Accipe, Pompei, deductum carmen ab illo. Propert. Forte super portas dux Veins adstitit arcem.
" Exc. 5. The a is long in the penult of the old genitive and dative of the first declension ; as, aulai, terrdi, &c.' Virg. Aulai in media libabant pocula Bacchi. Lucret. Terraique solum subigentes, cimus ad ortus.
Exc. 6. The verb aio is, in some of its parts,JprVnounced with the first syllable forming a diphthong, and, conse- quently, long ; while in other parts the a and t form two short syllables. Thus, we have aio, uiunt, aiebam, aiebas, aiebat, &c. ; and, on the other hand, Sis, ait, &c.2
Horat. Servus ; habes pretittm, loris non ureris, aio.
Id. Plebs eris ; at pueri ludentes, Rex eris, aiunt.
Id. Felicem ! aiebam tacitus. Quum quidlibet ille.
Id. Non sum moechus Sis. Neque ego, hercule, fur, ubi vasa.
Id. Nil Sit esse prius, melius nil caelibe vita.
Exc. 7. In ohe3 and Diana* the first syllable is common ;
perns, Vulte'ius, &c., were originally written Caiius, Pompeiius, Vul- leiius. On this supposition we may easily account for the long quantity of the first syllable; and hence the vocatives Cai, Pompei, &c., are in reality Cal-i, Pompel-i, which last undergoes another contraction, in Horace, into Pompei. (Horat., Od., 2, 7, 5.) In like manner, Vullet-i becomes, in the same poet, Vidta. (Epist., 1, 7, 91.)
1. The principle on which this exception is based has already been stated, in note 1, page 17.
2. The verb aio was originally written aiio, and in all probability pro- nounced al-yo. One of the i's being dropped, the a and remaining t sometimes formed a diphthong, as in the original form, and sometimes two short syllables. (Ramsay's Latin Prosody, p. 24.) Quintilian informs us that Cicero actually wrote aiio. (Inst. Or., 1, 4, 11. — Consult Spalding, ad Inc.)
3. Ohe, the interjection, follows its primitive O, which, since it can- not be elided, because words of this nature require a strong emphasis, is made either long or short when it falls before a vowel. (Ramsay's Lot. Pros., p. 25.)
4. Diana was originally Deiva lana, the lunar goddess, contracted
20
VOWEL BEFORE ANO1HER VOWEL.
in eheu1 and Io2 (the daughter of Inachus) it is long The interjection io follows the general rule.
Mart. Ohejam satis est, ohe, libelle. (Phalaecian.)
Virg. Exercet Diana chores ; quam mille sccutee.
Id. Constiterunt , sylva alia Jovis lucusve Diana.
Tibull. Ferreus est, eheu, quisquis in urbe manet. (Pentam.J
Virg. Ad levem clypeum sublatis cornibus Io.
Ovid. Ante oculos Io, quamvis aversus, habebat.
Virg. Clamat io matres, audite, ubi quteque Latinos.
c. S.li
Exc. 8. In many words of Greek origin a vowel is long, though immediately followed by another ; as, Her, Achelous, Enyo, Troas, Troius, &c., the Latin quan tity being controlled by that of the Greek words whence they are derived. Others, however, would appear to differ in quantity from their archetypes ; thus, in Latin we have chorea and chorea, while in Greek we
subsequently into Deiana, and at last becoming Diana. The « of the diphthong being dropped, gave rise to the double quantity of Diana, since it could be brought under the general principle of one vowel be- fore another (Voss ., de Art. Gram., 2. 13. — Varro, R. R, I, 37, 3. — Grcn., Thts., vol. 8, p. 31 1 — Nigid. ap. Macrob., Sat., 1, 9. — Creuzer, Symbolik, par Guigniaut, vol. 2, pt. 1, p. 433.)
1. The interjection eheu is generally thought to have been abbreviated by the transcribers from heu heu. (Heyne, ad Virg., Eclog., 2, 58.— Wagner, ad eund.)
2. As regards Io the proper name, and io the interjection, a differ- ence of opinion exists. The ordinary doctrine is, that the first syllable of both is doubtful, and so the rule is given in most works on Latin prosody. A more correct view of the subject, however, teaches us that the first syllable is always short in the interjection, and always long in the proper name. In Silius Italicus (14, 517), the old reading was " Qua,jue fertbatur ductor Sidonius, io," where the interjection occurs with a long penult ; but the true lection is now given as " Quaque re- hebatur Crantor Sidonius, Jo," where Io is the name of a ship. — With regard to Io, the daughter of Inachus, two lines are found which give the word a short penult (Ovid, Her., 14, 103.— Id., Ibis, 624). But in the first of these the MSS. vary, and some commentators even regard the term as an interjection ; while the other is drawn from a poem of doubtful authenticiiv. and the text of which is notoriously corrupt. In- deed, in this latter line, most editors now adopt the emendation of Hein- sius, and read Ion for Io. In Greek, also, this word is always Iw.
Lot. Pros., p. 26.)
VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER VOWEL. 21
find %opeia alone ; and so also platea, which is no- thing more than the feminine adjective TrAarem.1
Virg. Consurgunt vend, atque in nubem cogitur der.
Ovid. Opperiuntur aqua vultus Acheloiis agrestes.
Claud. Erubuit Mavors, aversaque risit Enyo.
Virg. Desidias cordi,juvat indulgere choreis.
Id. Pars pedibus plaudunt choreas et carmina dicunt.
Horat. Purae sunt platea, nihil ut meditantibus obstet.
Catull. Istos qui in platea modo hue tnodo illuc. (Phalse- cian.)
Exc. 9. Those words which are written in Greek with the diphthong ei (et), and in Latin with a single e or i, have that e or t long ; as, jfcneas, Alexandria, Anti- ockia, Caesaria, &c.2
Virg. At pius jEneas, per noctem plurima volvens.
Propert. Noxia Alexandria, dolts aptissima tellus.
Exc. 10. On the same principle as stated in the prece- ding exception, most adjectives in eus, formed from 4 Greek proper names, have the e long ; and it continues long when resolved into e'i ; as, Cythereus and Cythe- reius ; Pagaseus and Pagaseius ; Pelopeus and Pclo- peius?
Virg. Parce metu Cytherea ; manent immota tuorum.
Ovid. Invocat Hippomenes, Cythf.reia, comprecor ausis.
Lucan. Eumenidum vidit vultus Pelopeus Orestes.
Ovid. Quid quod avus nobis idem Pelopeius Atreus /
1. Ramsay endeavours to explain these anomalies by supposing that the Romans were in possession of authorities unknown to us. (Lai. Pros., p. 27.) Prudentius uniformly makes it platea, but his authority is of no value.
2. Many words of this class such as names of towns, temples, or .monuments, are in reality only adjectives, with a noun understood; as,
'A2,e£av(5p£ta (TroXtf), " Alexandria,'1'' or the city of Alexander; ov (iepov), " Museum," or temple of the Muses ; Mavcufalov ov), " Mausoleum," or sepulchre of Mausolus, &c.
3. Consult rerr.ar'^ on " Dizrcsis," p. 121.
22 VOWEL DEFORP ANOTHER VOWEL.
. Exc. 11. Greek genitives in eos, and accusatives in ea, from nominatives in tus, have the penult short accord- ing to the common dialect, but long according to the Ionic ; asr Orpheos, Orphea ; Antheos, Anlhea (in Greek, 'Op^eof, 'Op^ea ; 'Av6eo$ , 'Av0ea, by the com- mon dialect) ; but Idomeneos, Idomenea; Ilioneos, II- ionea (in Greek 'Idoj^vf/oc, 'Ido/zev^a ; 'I/UovTJoc, 'IA- lovffa, by the Ionic).1
Ovid. At non Chionides Eumolpus in Orphea talis.
Virg. Prospectum late pelago petit, Anthea si quern.
Id. Idomenea ducem, desertaque litora Creta.
Id. Ilionea petit dextra laevaque Serestum.
Exc. 12. Academia ought to be regarded as having a long penult.2 In the proper name Orion the second sylla-
1. We frequently find the quantity vary in words taken from the Greek, because they appear in the original language under a double form, which often depends on the dialect used by the poet. Thus, we have Conopium and Conopeum, because we find in Greek KUVUTTIOV and Kw- vcjTTttov. So also ~Eous and ~Eous, in Greek ^of and twof ; Malea and Malca, from MaAeta and MaAen ; Nereides and Nereides, from NJ?- pritdeg and N^peWef ; Rhea and Rhea, from 'Peia and 'Per/ ; Dadaleus, Dctdaleus, Dadalns, from the triple Aatrfa/Utof, Aaiid/leof, Aai'(5a/^f, &c. (Ramsay's Latin Prosody, p. 27.)
2. It is always long in the Greek authors, as the following examples will prove.
'AA3.' elf 'A-Kadfylav tcariuv irro rcuf fiopiaic aKoOpst-ei. (Ana- past. Tclram. Cat. — Aristoph., Nub., 1001.)
. 'Avf '\Kodijfuaf Bopdopov EV irpoxoalf. (Pentam. — Theocr., Ch. ap. Brunch, Anal., vol. 1, p. 184.)
'Ajiadrifuaf ijicovaa, %6-/ov. (Anapaest. Dim. — Epicrat. ap. Athen., 2, p. 59, D.)
AVKEIOV 'A.Kadrj/jlav Qldeiov -irvfaf. (Iamb. Trim. — Alex. ap. Athen., 8, p. 336, E.)
The two Latin lines quoted in the text give the received quantity of Academia in Cicero's time, the first being taken from the treatise " De Divinatione" (1, 13), and the second from Laurea Tullius, one of Cice- ro's freedmen, in an epigram preserved by Pliny (31, 2). This decides the question as far as the practice of the golden age of Roman literature is concerned. In opposition to all this array of authorities in Greek and Latin writers, we have merely one from Claudian, and another from a still later poet, Sidonius, who both use Academia with a short penult. (Claud., de Coiu. M., \, 94 — Sidort, Ap., 15, 120.^ Hermann thinks that the penult of 'Axodj^'a was shart by nature, but lengthened by the
CONTRACTION. 23
ble is always long in every good Latin writer, although it is common in Greek. On the other hand, the first syllable is common in Latin, but always long in Greek ; and the third syllable in the oblique case? is also com- mon in Latin and long in Greek.1
Cic. Inque Academla umbrifera nitidoque Lyceeo.
Laur. Tull. Atque Academias celebratam nomine villam.
SECTION V. CONTRACTION.
RULE. Every syllable formed by contraction is long ; as, cogo, contracted for coago or conago ; tibtcen, contracted for tibidcen or tibncen, &c.
Virg. Bis gravidos cogunt fatus, duo tempora messis. Ovid. Cur vagus incedit tola tibtcen in urbe.
BS. 1. Among the contractions of most frequent occur- rence, the following may be here enumerated : 1. Two vowels uniting into one. ambages, contracted for ambeages,2 ** indago, " " induago,3
allus, " " atiius,
dls, " " diis,
audis, " " audlis*
fiR, " " flie,
force of the accent, as the term was one in frequent and common use. (Hcrm. ad Aristoph., Nub., 1001. — Id. de Metris, c. 23. — Class. Journ., vol. 6, p. 123.)
1. It is erroneous to say, as some do, that Orion has the second syl- lable common. The true rule is given in the text. In Greek, however, the t in 'Opiuv, gen. JOpid>vof, is of variable measure in Homer and the epic poets, but short in the tragedians. (Spitzner's Gr. Pros., p. 112.)
2. Ambe was an old form of amb or am. Compare the Greek a^tyi. (Varro, L. L., 7, 3.)
3. Indu or endo was an early form for in. Compare the Greek ivdol.
4. The third conjugation is regarded now as the oldest, and the 1st, 2d, and 4ih as merely contracti-d conjugations derived from it. (Con- sult Slmve, " Ueber die Lateinische Declination u.nd Conjugation," Konigtberg, 1823.)
CONTRACTION.
proles, contracted for profiles, cdpia, " " coopia,
fructus, " fructuls,
anus, " anuis,
luxu, (dat.) " " luxui, chely, " " chelye.
/' f. ' 2. The letter h dropped between two vowels. ml, contracted for mlhi, nil, " " nl/nl,
vemens, " " vehemens,
nemo, " nehdmo.
3. The letter v dropped between two vowels. bubus, from boibus, and that from bovtbus. " botcula, "
bucula, '
junior, '
jutum, '
jumentum, '
mobilis, '
momentum, '
malo, *
norms, ML '
oift;
prudens, '
4. Other letters similarly dropped. denus, ' deenus, decenus, from decem. blgae, biigas, biivga.
quadriga, quadrnga, quadrnugae.
|
juenior, " |
juvenior, |
from juvenu. |
|
juatum, " |
juvalum, |
" juvo. |
|
juamentum, " |
juvamentum, |
" juvo. |
|
molbilis, " |
mombilis, |
" moteo. |
|
moimcntum, " |
movlmenium, |
" mot co. |
|
maolo, |
mavolo, |
u magis-wlo. |
|
nocnus, |
novenus, |
" novcm. |
|
oJmt, |
obivit. |
|
|
proidens, " |
prdvidens. |
OBS. 2. It sometimes happens, however, that when two vowels meet in a compound word, one of them is elided or struck out altogether, in which case the quantity of the re- maining one suffers no change ; thus, in magnopere, com- pounded of magnd opere, the o of magno is struck out alto- gether, and the o in opere retains its natural quantity. So in semdnimis, gravolens, suavolens, &c.
OBS. 3. In a few words, the ancients seem cither to have blended the two vowels into one, or to have struck out one
DIPHTHONGS. 25
of them at pleasure, and hence the quantity of such syllables is variable. Thus the participle ambitus, from ambio, has the penult long, because it is regarded as a contraction for ambeitus ; while ambitus, the substantive, has the same syl- lable short, because, in this case, the e was supposed to be elided before the i.
SECTION VI.
DIPHTHONGS.
RULE. A diphthong is long, whether in a Greek or Latin word ; but pr& preceding a vowel in a compound term is usually short.1
Virg. Ultima Cumai venit jam carminis (etas. Ovid. Exit et in Maias sacrum Florale Calendas. Virg. Fertur equis duriga neque audit currus habenas. Id. Caucasiasque refert volucres,furtumque Promethei.
Ovid. Quas ubi viderunt pr&acuta cuspidis hastas. Virg. Nee tola tamen ille prior pr&eunte carina, Id. Stipitibus duris agitur, sudibusve pr&ustisJP
1. The syllable pro, being originally prat or prae, the latter of the two vowels is tacitly elided. Thus preeustus, pr&acutus, prazeo, be- come pra'ustus, pra'acutus, praCeo, and the a. is necessarily short by its position before the succeeding vowel. There is one example, however, in Statius, where prae is lengthened in prairet, namely, " Pratmia, cum vacuus domino prairet Arion" (Theb., 6, 519) ; but, besides this, other instances of such lengthening are found only in the latest poets, as, for example, prtzesse in Sidonius Apollinaris (Carm., 23), and praoplare in Martianus Capella (lib. 1, pag. 9, ed. Grot.) ; but such instances are of no value. (Consult Schneider, L. G., vol. 1, p. 103.) — In some of the cases where pro. occurs short in composition, we may obviate this by having recourse to synaeresis ; this, however, will not answer on all occa- sions. (Compare Max. Viet., p. 1965, ed. Putsch, and, on the other side, Vossius, de Art. Gram., 2, 15, p. 161, ed. Foertsch.) — Ovid, on one occasion, shortens the diphthong in M&otis (Trist., 3, 12, 2), in which he is imitated by Seneca (Oed., 474), but it is made long by him elsewhere, as well as by other poets. The same poet has also Aeeta (Heroid., 6, 103). In this and in Mceotis he appears to have followed the Greek license. (Consult Buttmann, Ausf. Gr. Gr., § 7, anm. 25.) — The old reading Dionaus in Catullus (29, 7) has long since been changed. (Docring^ ad CatuU., 1. c. — Vossius, de Art. Gram., 2, 33, utr.)
C
26 DIPHTHONGS.
OBS. 1. Greek proper names in eus (genitive eos) always have the eu a diphthong, in both Greek and Latin ; as, Orpheus, gen. Orpheos, Pantheus, gen. Pantheos, &c.
OBS. 2. Frequently, however, a proper name in eus is declined according to the forms of the second declension in Latin, and then the diphthong disappears ; as, Orpheus, gen. Orphei ; dat. Orpheo, <fcc.
OBS. 3. The combination yi also forms a diphthong in some Greek words, since it answers to vi ; as, Orithyia ('OpEiOvia) ; Harpyta ("ApTTVia) ; Agyleus ('Aywevf ), &c. Ovid. Orithyian amans fulvis complectitur a/if. Virg. Et patrio insontes Harpytas pellere regiio. Horat. Levis Agyiev. (Dactylic dimeter.)
OBS. 4. It is, strictly speaking, erroneous to rank such combinations as we, ue, ui, uo, uu, among diphthongs ; on the contrary, the letter « seems to have been pronounced in such cases like our to ,• as, lingua (equivalent to ling-wa), sanguis (sang-uns), equus (ek-tcus) ; and so also in mono- syllableS^ as, quis (equivalent to kwis), quod (ktcod), que (kwe), «fec.'
OBS. 5. In some cases, it is true, such combinations are long : this, however, is not because they then form a diph- thong, but because the vowel with which u happens to be united is in itself long ; as, suadet (swadet), svetus (swetus), &c. So also in the monosyllables : qui (km), huic (hwick), quo (kwo), &c.
OBS. 6. In several words, again, u and the vowel by which it is followed always form distinct syllables ; as, sua, sues, suis, suos, suus, &c.
1. The whole question is ably discussed by Schneider, L. G., »ol. 1, p. 324, scqq.
,
POSITION. 27
f
SECTION VII.
POSITION.
RtiLE A vowel before two consonants either in the same word, or in different words, or before a double conso- nant, is long by position ; as, terra, respexit, gazd, &C.1
Virg. Terra tremit : fugere ferae, ct mortalia corda. Id. Libertas qua sera tanien respexit inermem.
OBS. 1. The letter h is not regarded in prost>dy,as a consonant, but a mere breathing ; hence, in such words as dbhinc, adhuc, &c., the first syllable is short. So also if a word end in a consonant, and the succeeding word begin with the letter h, there is no length by position.2
Virg. Oro, siquis adhuc precibus locus, exue mentem.
Id. Tempora quaz messor, qua curvus orator haberet.
OBS. 2. A vowel is often found long before the consonant j. This, however, is not because _;' is a double consonant ; but the truth is, that the words in question were originally all written with a double t ; as, for example, cuiius, huiius, eiius, peiius, maiius, &c., and would seem to have been
1. The time occupied in pronouncing the two consonants, or the double one, produces the length by position. A vowel thus situated is in fact shorter than one which is long by nature ; but still in verse they are regarded as both of equal length. (Kriigcr, Grundriss der Metrik, P- 18.)
2. That the h never produces length by position when joined with a consonant either preceding or following it, is expressly asserted by Terentianus Maurus, v. 789, seqq.
" Sola nee vocalis usum, nee tuetur consona,
Tempus aut ministral ullum brevibus usquam syllabis." To the same effect are the remarks of Vossius (de Art. Gram., 2, 15, extr.). The opposite doctrine is incorrectly maintained by Velius Longus (p. 2217, ed. Putsch), and also by some modern scholars ; as, for example, by Earth (Advers., 21, 17). Some of the lines adduced in support of this latter opinion have the syllable lengthened by the arsis ; in others the reading is erroneous. Equally unfounded is the remark, that the h is sometimes employed to prevent the hiatus in a line. (Schneider, L. G., vol. 1, p. 180, not.)
OF THE INITIAL X AND Z.
prontmnced cui-yus, hui-yus, ei-yus, pci-yus, mai-yus, &c. , so that the first syllable was long in each, a quantity that was retained after one of the two i's was dropped.1
Of the initial SC, SM, SP, SQ, ST, $c. RULE. A short vowel at the end of a word, when followed by a word beginning with sc, sm, sp, sg, st, &c., is rarely, if ever, allowed to remain short, in serious compositions, by the poets who flourished after the time of Lucretius ; but they generally avoid with care such a collocation.2
Of the initial X and Z.
RULE. A short vowel at the end of a word, before a word beginning with x or z, remains short. At least, there is no evidence at all that it was ever lengthened.3
Ennius. Pontibus instratis conjunxit litora Xerxes.
Virg. Jam medio apparet fluctu nemorosa Zacynthus.
1. Consult note 1, page 18.
2. The whole question is discussed with great ability by Schneider (L. G., vol. 2, p. 694) and Ramsay (La/. Pros., p. 260, seqq.). The canon of Dawes on the subject is particularly examined by the latter. — Proper names, in the use of which the poets have always very natu- rally allowed themselves considerable license, and the names of stones, trees, &c., when such cannot be used in the metre without transgressing the rule in the text, are exceptions, of course. This applies to such words as Smaragdus, Scamander, neither of which could be employed in hexameter verse %at all without a license of this kind. And it is worthy of notice, that these words are frequently found in good MSS., both Latin and Greek, without the S at all: as, Mdpaydof, Maragdus; ILafiavdpof, Kamander (Dawes, Misc. Crit., p. 6-148, ed. Kidd.) ; which would seem to indicate that it was, in certain cases, softened down in pronouncing them. (Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 261, not. — Compare Knight, Proleg. in Horn., 79. — Spitzner, Gr. Pros., t) 7, 6. — Tkiersch, Gr. Gr., $ 146, 8.)
3. The line from Ennius is merely conjectured by Columna to have been written by that poet ; a conjecture, however, without any founda- tion. (Ennii Fragm.,ed. Column., p. 129.) Terentianus Maurus (v. 1160) quotes it without naming the author, and subjoins another imme- diately after as follows : " Sanguine turbalus miscebat litora Xerxes." It is more than probable that both lines are his own composition. An- other instance is sometimes cited from Lucan (2, G72) : " Talis fama canit tumidum super acquora Xerxen ;" but the text is now altered so
as to read " super aquora Perscn." (Consult Cort., ad
loc.) The Greek poets do not appear to have ever indulged in this h-
MUTE AND LIQUID. 29
•
SECTION VIII. MUTE AND LIQUID. RULE. A short vowel before a mute followed by a liquid, both of which are in the following syllable, is common in poetry, but always short in prose ; as, volucris and volucris ; pdtrem and pdtrem ; pharetra and pharetra ; cochleare and cochleare ; Cyclops and Cyclops ; cycnus and cycnus, &C.1 Ovid. Et primo similis volucri, mox vera volucris. Virg. Natum ante ora pdtris, pdtrem qui obtruncat ad aras Id. Virginibus Tyriis mos est gesture pharetram. Id. Succinctam pharetra et maculosas tegmine lyncis. Horat. Multa Dirc&um levat aura cycnum. (Sapphic.) Id. Donatura cycni si libeat sonum. (Choriambic.)
OBS. 1 . This rule depends on three conditions, viz. : *
1. The liquid must follow the mute. If it stand before the mute, the preceding vowel, though naturally short, becomes always long ; as, fert , ferlis.
2. The mute and liquid must belong to the same syllable. If they belong to different syllables, the preceding short vowel becomes long ; as, db-luo, dd-nitor, quam- ob-rem.
cense. — With regard to z, numerous examples are found of a vowel re- maining short before it. (Ovid, Her., 1, 87.—SU. Ital, 1, 275.— Id., 2, 603.— Martial, 2, 58, 1.— Auson., Prof., 22, II.— Id. ib., 13, 3.— Senec., Here. Fur., 916. — Id., Agam., 433, &c.) In many of these instances, however, the words commencing with z could not otherwise appear in the verse, unless a short vowel were allowed to precede. This same principle regulates the admissibility of such words into Greek verse. (Horn., I1.., 2, 634.— Id., Odyss., 1, 246.— Id. ib., 9, 24.— Tfieocrit., 4, 32. — Oppian, Hal., 1, 367, dec.) The dramatic poets, however, never allowed themselves this license.
1. This rule applies more frequently to the liquids I and r than to m and n. The latter are found for the most part in words derived from the Greek. — The position which a mute and liquid make is termed by grammarians " debilis positio," or weak position. The license in po- etry, therefore, consists, not in having the vowel short, but in making it long. The natural quantity, on the other hand, prevails in prose (Vossius, de Art. Gram., 2, 16. — Schneider, Jj. G., vol. 2, p. 676,
C 2
30 MTJTE AND LIQUID.
3. The vowel must be short by nature. A vowel naturally long is never rendered short by a mute and liquid following ; as, matris, salubris, atri.1
OBS. 2. The lengthening of a vowel before a mute and liquid takes place most frequently in the arsis of a foot. Examples of a similar lengthening in the thesis are com- paratively rare.2
OBS. 3. Even in the arsis, however, the poets do not seem to have lengthened at pleasure any syllable that was followed by a mute and liquid. A particular usage appears to have prevailed on this head, which forbade them, for ex- ample, to lengthen the vowel in arbitror, genctrix, locuples, &c., while in other words, containing, in like manner, a vowel before a mute and liquid, the long quantity was more customary than the short.3
OBS. 4. The mute and liquid are sometimes found in the beginning of the next word ; as,
Virg. Excursusque breves tentant, et s&pe lapillos. Auson. Jane nove, primo qui das tua nomina mensi.
1. To determine whether a vowel which we find long before two con- sonants be naturally long, or only rendered so by that position, we must look to the word in a different state, where the position does not occur. In some few instances it is quite impossible to determine with any cer- tainty the natural quantity of the vowel ; as, for example, in Venafrum, hybrida, &c. (Schneider, L. G., vol. 2, p. 677, not.)
2. Schneider, L. G., vol. 2, p. 676.
3. Thus we find colubris only in Valerius Flaccus (6, 175), but fre- quently colubras and colubris. So in Lucretius (4, 406) we have rubntm, but everywhere else rubri, rubro, &c. Again, we have Kbri, libra, &c., in only a very few places ; as, for example, Moral., Serm.t 1, 1Q, 63. — Id., Epist., 2, 1, 217.— Auson., Idyll., 11, 77.— Id., Epist., 4, 98 ; but very frequently libri, &c. In like manner, we find the oblique cases of niger, with the short i, in Catullus (43, 2), Horace (Od., 1, 32, 11 ; 3, 6, 4 ; 4, 12, 11), Virgil (J5n., 8, 353), <kc., while those with the long i occur far more frequently. — With regard to migro, it is to be observed, that it is found, together with its compounds, having the short penult in many passages of Plautus, and once also in Terence, Lucretius, and Manilius (Housing., Obs. Antibarb., p. 375); but Virgil, Horace, Mar- tial, Juvenal, and other poets uniformly have migro. Hence it has been supposed that migro at first bad the short i, and retained this down to the time of Catullus, ^>ut afterward changed it to the long quantity ; while, on the other hand, latro (another word which has given hw
REDUPLICATING PRETERITES. 31
SECTION IX. REDUPLICATING PRETERITES.
RULE. Reduplicating preterites, or such as double the first syllable, have both the first and second syllables short ; as, cecidi (from cado), ceclni, didici, tetigi, <fcc.' Virg. Inter cunctantes cecid.it moribunda ministros. Id. Tityre, te patulas cecini sub tegmine fagi. Ovid. Max didici curvo nulla subesse iholo. (Pentameter.) Virg. Nee victoris heri tetigit captiva cubile.
EXCEPTIONS.
But cecidi, from cado, and pepedi, from pedo, have the second syllable long.
Juv. Ebrius ac petitions, qui nullum forte cetidit. Horat. Nam, displosa sonat quantum vesica, pepedi.
OBS. The rule does not, of course, apply to the second syllable when it is long by position ; as in momordi, cucurri, peperci, and the like ; still, however, the first or prefixed syllable is short.
Mart. Docti lima momorderit Secundi. (Phalaecian.) Propert. Cum vicina novis turba cucurrit agris. (Pentam.)
to remark) substituted, in process of time, the long a for the short. (Schneider, L. G., vol. 2, p. 679, scq.)
1. The first syllable is short as a matter of course, since it consists of a short prefix. The second syllable follows the quantity of the ver- bal root. Hence arise the two exceptions mentioned immediately after, namely, cado and pedo, where the first syllable of the verbal root is long ; and so also the forms momordi, cucurri, &c. The early form of the perfect of cado must have been cecadi. (Consult Priscum, 10, 4, p. 489, ed. Putsch. — Pott, Etymol. Forsch., vol. 1, p. 19, seqq. — Kuhner, Gr. Gr., ol. 1, p. 84, seqq. — Bopp, Vergleich. Gramm., p. 697,
32 PRETERITES OF TWO SYLLABLES.
SECTION X.
PRETERITES 9F TWO SYLLABLES. RULE. Preterites of two syllables, their compounds, and the tenses formed from them, have the first syllable long ; as, vidi, veni, Jovi, fugi ; while, in the present tense, video, venio,foveo,fugio, have the first short.1 Virg. Ut vtdi, tct peril, ut me mains abstulit error. Id. Respexit tamen, et longo pajf tempore venit. Id. Fdvit humum ; cape saxa manu, cape robora pastor Id. Vipera delituit, calumqrue exterrita fugit.
EXCEPTION.
Seven dissyllabic preterites, however, have the first syl- lable short, namely, bibi, dedi,ftdi (from fmdo), scidi (from scindo), steti, stiti, and tuli?
1. According to the theory of Grimm (Deutsche Grammatik, vol. 1, p. 1056), those verbs which change a short vowel in the root, or present tense, into a long c in the perfect, had originally a reduplication. Pango, or, rather, pago, makes peptgi, but compingo makes compegi. This proves the analogy of the two forms ; and on the model of pago, peplgi, contracted pcgi, we have
|
vemo, video, fovco, fugio, &c., |
vevem, vividi, fovovi, fufugi, &c., |
veent, vndi, foovi, fuugi, &.C., |
vem, vidi, foci, &c.' |
It is observed, in confirmation of this remark, that such verbs have in many instances a reduplication, or, what is allied to it, an internal in- flection, in the cognate languages ; thus fugi resembles irfyvya ; and venio, veni, the Maeso- Gothic verb, which is analogous to " come" and "came," &.c. (Pritchard, Origin of the Celtic Nations, p. 151.) It must be borne in mind, however, that the remarks here made about the mode of forming rem, vidi, &c., do not apply to such preterites as lust, rlsi, misi, &c., from ludo, rideo, mitto, &.C., the preterite in these verbs having been formed by the insertion of *; as, lud*i, ridsi, mittsi, and the consonant or consonants before the « having been subsequently dropped for the sake of euphony. (Pritchard, 1. e. — Ramsay, Lat. Pros., p. 100. — Struve, Ueber die Lateinische Declination vnd Conju- gation, p. 155.)
2. These seven are in reality no exceptions at all, but belong to the preceding rule, since they are all reduplicating preterites, some of which have dropped the first syllable, instead of contracting the first two into one. Thus tuli and scidi were anciently tetuli and sciscidi. The form
SUPINES OF TWO SYLLABLES. 33
Horat. Lusisti satis, edisti satis, atque bibisti.
Virg. Hie mild responsum primus dcdit tile petenti.
Horat. Demersa exitio ; diffidit urbium. (Choriambic.)
Statius. Gaudia, florentesque manu scidit Atropos annos.
Virg. Explicuit legio, et campo stetit agmen aperto.
[d. Constitit atque oculis Phrygia agmina circumspe.xit.
Td. Cui mater media sese tulit obvia sylva.
OBS. Abscldi, from caedo, has the middle syllable long ; but abscidi, from scindo, has it short.
Lucan. Abscidit nostrte multum sors invida nostrae. Id. Abscidit impulsu ventorum adjula vetustas.
SECTION XL
SUPINES OF TWO SYLLABLES.
RULE. Supines of two syllables, and the parts of the verb supposed to be derived from them, hav? the first syl- lable long ; as, visum, lusum, motuip. ; visus, visurus, &c '
Virg. Terribiles visu forma ; Letumque Labor que
Id Lenaeos, ea visa salus morientibus una.
Id. Nascitur et casus abies vlsura marines.
Horat. Lusum it Maecenas, dormitum ego Virgiliusque.
Vhg. Quos ego — sed motos prasstat componere jluctus.
tetuli occurs in Plautus (Amphitr., 2, 2, 84, 168. — Mentzchm., 4, 2, 25, 66. — Panul., 3, 1, 58. — Rud. prol., 68); in Accius and Caecilius (ap. Non, «, 839); in Catullus (Carm., 63, 47, 52; 66, 35); in Terence (Antr., 4, 5, 13 ; 5, 1, 13); and in the grammarians Diomedes (lib. 2, p. 435) and Priscian (10, 6, p. 497, seq.). — Of the form sciscidi Priscian gives Oiamples from Afranius, Attius, Naevius, and Ennius (lib. 10, p. 890.— Oompare Aul. Gell., 7, 9). On the same principle, fidi would be originally fiftdi, from fido. The form libi is an actual reduplication from bio, the same as the Greek mu. Bibo in the present arose from the digarmnatized form IIIFQ. As for steti and sfili, they are merely different forms of the reduplication of sto, just as dedi and didi from do. (Ramsay's Lot. Pros., p. 100. — Struve, Ueber die Lat. Decl., &c., p. 160. — Pot', Etymol. Forschungen, vol. 1, p. 188.)
1. The Sanscrit infinitive is preserved in the Latin first supine ; as, paRtum, alitum ; samtum, cinctum. (Kennedy, Researches, p. 256.— Wilkins's Sanscrit Grammar, p. 123.) — The old form of visum ap- pears to have been vidsum ; of lusum, ludsum ; of motum, movitum (moilum) ; of fletum, flemtum ( fleitum) ; of minutum, minuitum ; of
34 SUPINES OF TWO SYLLABLES.
EXCEPTIONS.
In the following dissyllabic supines the first syllable is
short ; namely, dtum, from cieo ; datum, from do ;
itum, from eo ; titum, from lino ; guitum, from queo ;
ratum, from reor ; rutum, from ruo ; satum, from sero ;
situm, from sino ; and futum, from fuo, whence fu-
turns.
Horat. Puppes sinistrorsum cites. (Iambic.) Virg. Intraro, gentique mea data mania cernam. Lucret. Nee repentis itum quojus vis cumque animantis. Ovid. In te fingebam violentos Troas ituros. Virg. Ardentes auro ct paribus Kta corpora guttis. Id. Nos abiisse rati, et vento petiisse Mycenas.
Virg. Impulerat torrens, arbustaque diruta ripis. Id. Deinde satis fluvium inducit rivosque sequentes.
Horat. Aurum irrepertum et sic melius situm. (Alcaic.) Id. Quid sitfuturum eras fuge qu&rere. (Alcaic.)
OBS. 1. There is some doubt with regard to the quantity of statum. In Lucan, Martial, Statius, and Claudian, we find stdtura, constdtura, obstdtura, pr<Bstatura, with the a long; while 'the derivatives, stdtim, status both substan- tive and adjective, stdtio, stdtor, are used by Catullus, Ovid, and others, with the first short. It seems best, how- ever, to follow the authority of Priscian, and make the first syllable of the supine long.1
OBS. 2. Citum, from cieo of the second conjugation, has the first syllable short; whence citus, "quick;" concitus and excitus, " aroused ;" but citum, from do of the fourth
acHtum, acmtum, <fec. Contraction rendered the syllable long. But futum, rutum, &c., are formed by syncope, and therefore continue short.
1. " Steti vero statum supinum penultima producta debet facere." (Priscian, 9, p. 863, ed. Putsch.) — The variation in quantity, noticed in the text, seems to have arisen from the prosodial difference in statum and slitum, as we see exemplified in prastitum and prastatuin, which are both attached to prasto as its supines. (Ramsay's Latin Pros., p. >93.— Vossius, de Art. Gramm., 2, 22.)
POLYSYLLABIC SUPINES. 35
conjugation, has the first syllable long ; whence dtus " excited ;" accitus, concltus, excitus, and indtus.1
Virg. Altior insurgens et cursu concitus keros.
Ovid. Necfruitur somno vigilantibus exctta cuns.
Lucan. Unde ruunt toto condta pericula mundo.
Id. Rupta quies populis, stratisque exdta juventus.
OBS. 3. Ruo has ruitum and rutum in the supine. Its compounds form the supine in utum having the penult short, whence dirutus, erutus, obrutus.2
Ovid. Diruta sunt aliis, uni mihi Pergama restant.
Virg. Nee mihi cum Teucris ullum post eruta bellum.
OBS. 4. It must be borne in mind, as regards the deriva- tives of itum, that the participle is ambitus, but that the substantive is ambitus.
Ovid. Jussit et ambita circumdare littora terras.
Horat. Et proper antis aquae per amoenos ambitus agros.
SECTION XII.
POLYSYLLABIC SUPINES.
RULE 1. Supines in utum, of more than two syllables, and the parts of the verb formed from them, have the pe- nult long; as, solutum, volutum, minutum, argutum?
1. But scltum is always long, whether it comes from scio or scisco. Stilus, from scio, signifies " skilful," " graceful," &c. ; but scltus, from scisco, "ordained," "decreed;" whence we have plebis-scitum, " a decree of the commons."
2. It has been supposed, and with great appearance of probability, that tn, in the supine of ruo, was pronounced as one short syllable, runtum ; whence diruntum, enritum, &c., which afterward became dirutum, erutum, on the dropping of the i. (Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 103.)
3. Solutum and volutum do not come from solvo and volvo, where v is a consonant, but from the earlier forms soluo and voluo. The supines in question will, according to this view, have been originally solmtum, voluitum, changed afterward by contraction to solutum, volutum. The same principle of contraction operates, as already remarked, in the case of other supines in utum. Thus minutum is contracted from minuitum , urgutum from arguitum ; tributum from tribuilum, &c.
35 POLYSYLLAUIC SUPINES.
Virg. Lumina rara micant, somno vinoque soluti. Id. Ecce autem flammis inter tabulata volutus.
Lucret. Conveniebat enimfruges quoque seepe minutas.
RULE 2. Supines in itum, from preterites in twt, and the parts of the verb formed from them, likewise have the penul long ; as, cupivi, cupitum ; petivi, petitum ; condivi, conditum, <fec.'
Ovid. Mens videt hoc, visumque cupit, potiturque cupito.
Virg. Telaque trunca viri et bis sex thoraca petitum.
Horat. Ne male conditum jus apponatur ; ut omnes.
RULE 3. But supines in itum, from preterites not in ivi, have the » short ; as, monui, monltum ; tacui, taciturn, &c.2 Virg. Discite justitiam moniti, et non temnere divos. Id. Quis te, magne Cato, taciturn, out te, Cosse, relinquat Id. Conditus in nubem, medioque refugerit orbe.
OBS. The rule last given, however, does not extend to polysyllabic compounds from supines of two syllables.
1. Here also, as in the previous rule, contraction operates to lengthen the penult. Thus we have, oldest form petnitum (pethtntum), by throw- ing out the v (or rather w>), pelntum, and, by still farther contraction, pi Alum. So, also, cupimtum (cupiicttum), cupntum, cupilum; condirn- lum (condlwHum), condntum, conditum, &c.
2. In the case of supines in utiim and Itum, the contraction is effect- ed by a blending of the two vowels into one long ; but in supines in ilum, a syncope operates, or, in other words, one of the vowels is drop- ped, and the remaining one is left with its short quantity. Thus, monuitum, monltum ; lacuitum,- taciturn, &c. — Recensitum is often adduced as an exception to the rule given in the text. It is only, how- ever, a deviation in appearance, being formed, not from reccnsui, but from the old perfect recensivi. The simple verb censeo made censui and ccnslvi in the perfect, censum and censitum in the supine. Hence we find, in an old inscription, censita sunt for censa sunt ; and, in some of '.be writers on the civil law, censiti for censi ; so, also, the noun censor is a contraction from ctnsitor. and occurs in this latter form in other inscriptions which have come down to us, as well as in the wri- tings of the ancient lawyers. (Ulpian, Dig., lib. 50, tit. 15, leg. 4. — Inscript. ap. Grut., p. 417, n. 5. — Ib., p. 439, n. 5. — Orell., Inscript. Lat., n. 208, 3044, 3652.) Analogous to this is the verb pono, which made in the perfect posim as well as posui. Plautus uses posirimus (Vidul. ap. Prise., 10, 7, p. 499, ed. Putsch); Apuleius apposivcrunt (ap. eutid.); Lucilius opposivit (Fragm., p. 211, ed. Bip.) ; Catullus defoxiril (34, 8), &c. (Compare Burmann, ad Anihol. Lot., 2, 130, 16.)
DERIVATIVES. 37
These follow the quantity of the simple supines from which they are formed; as, itum, obitum; datum, abdttum; condttum, reddltum ; satum, insifum, &c., except cogmtum and agnitum, from notum.1
SECTION XIII.
DERIVATIVES.2
RULE. Derivatives follow the quantity of the words from which they are formed.
OBS. 1. This rule applies strictly to the modifications which words undergo in declension, comparison, and con- jugation, in so far as those syllables are concerned which are not affected by the inflections.
Thus, since the first syllable in arils is short in the nomi- native, it remains short in arietis, arieti, &c., since its form does not change with the inflections ; but the same cannot be said of the last syllable, which is long in the nominative, although in the oblique cases the corresponding syllable is •short: arietis, arieti, &c. So also from mitis comes mitia; diirus, durior, durissimus, &c.
In like manner, the first syllable in lego being short, it remains short in all the tenses which are formed from the present ; as, legebam, legam, legerem, &c. ; and, on the other hand, the first syllable ' in the preterite legi being long, it will be long in legeram, legerim, legissem, &c., and all other parts of the verb formed from the preterite.
OBS. 2. The rule applies to all words which are clearly and distinctly formed from other words, by the addition of certain terminations or suffixes, according to well-estab- lished analogy.*
1. Many of the Latin supines are simple contractions, made long by the rule of position ; thus, legitum, leg'lum, lectum ; rumpilum, rump1' turn, ruptum ; nubitum, nub'tum, nuptum ; scribilum, scriVtum, scrip- turn ; docitum (dokitum), doc'tum, doctum, &c.
3. Ramsay's Latin Prosody, p. 9, seqq.
3. Still, however, there are some exceptions to this. Thus, from
D
DERIVATIVES.
Thus, from animus w* have animosus,
ndtura
rosa
viola
sanguinis
pulveris
labor
" naturalis,
" rosetum,
" vwlarium,
" sanguineus,
" pulverulentus,
" laboriosus.
OBS. 3. But when two words are merely connected to- gether by derivation from a common root, we cannot, even when they resemble each other in structure, with any cer- tainty infer that the quantity of the corresponding syllables will be the same ; for, although this happens much oftener than otherwise, yet the exceptions are too numerous to ad- mit of the principle being broadly stated.
OBS. 4. Among the exceptions alluded to in the prece- ding remarks, the following are most deserving of attention.
1. Several kindred verbs which have two forms, one active and the other neuter, or which differ otherwise in meaning, differ also in quantity.1 Thus,
placare,
sedare,
legare,
dtcare,
labare,
placere,
sedere,
legere,
dtcere,
labi.
sidere, sedes,
2. Words which differ in meaning, but which are spelt in the same way, often differ in quantity. This arose, probably, from the pronunciation being purposely va- ried, to prevent confusion. Thus,
moles we have molestus ; from rego, regula ; from luceo, lucerna, &c. With regard to these and others of the kind, we may use the language of Varro : " Cum in vestitu, adificiis, sic in supellectile, cibo, ctuereis omnibus, quiz us** td vitam sunt adsumpta, dominetur incufualitas ; in sermone quoque, qui est usiis causa constitutus, ca non repudianda."
1. Exceptions, however, to this remark not unfrequently occur. Thus, we have da.ra.re and cldrere ; rigare and rigere ; fugire and fugere ; jarf-e and jaeere, &c.
COMPOUND WORDS. 39
|
duds, |
from |
duco, |
but |
duds, |
from dux. |
|
regis, |
M |
rex, |
" |
regis, |
" rego. |
|
legis, |
u |
lex, |
" |
legis, |
" lego. |
|
voces, |
Cf |
vox, |
u |
voces, |
" voco. |
OBS. 5. The entire class of verbs in tm'o, called desid- eratives, have the u short, though derived from the future participle in urus, of which the penult is invariably long ; as, parturit, esurit, cwnaturit, nupturit, &c.
OBS. 6. The following deviations in quantity, on the part of other derivatives, are also worthy of notice.
homo, but humanus.
humus, humilis, humare, but humor, humidus, humeus, &c.
persono, but persona.
tego, but tegula.
macer, mdceo, modes, but macero.
lateo, but laterna.
sopor, soporus, soporifer, soporo, but sopio, sopitus.
quater, but qualuor.
dlcere, but dtcax.
vado, but vddum.
SECTION XIV. COMPOUND WORDS.
RULE. Compound words retain, in general, the quantity of the simple words from which they are formed.
Thus, in perlego, relego, the middle syllable is short, be- cause it is short in the simple lego. But in the perfects perlegi, relegi, it is long, because lengthened in the simple legi.
Again, attigi, concidi, diffidi, ebibi, rescidi, have the pe- nult short, because the corresponding vowel is short in their primitives, tefigi, cecidi,ftdi, libi, and scidi.
Obtttum, from obUno, has the short penult, because the vowel is short in the simple litum. But ollitus is from Mini t cor.
40 • PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION.
OBS. The quantity of the simple words is preserved in the compounds though the vowel be changed. Thus, concido, e.xcido, incido, occido, recido, from cado, shorten the penult ; and, in like manner, eRgo, seligo, &c., from lego. On the other hand, concido, excido, incido, recido, occido, from cado, have the penult long. So also allido, from leedo ; exquiro and requiro, from qu&ro, &c.
EXCEPTIONS.
The following shorten the penult, though the corre- sponding vowels in the simple words are long ; as,
dejero, pejero, from juro,
pronuba, innuba, " nubo,
maledlcus, causidicus, &c., " dico,
semisopitus, " sopio,
cognitum and agriitum, " notum.
OBS. 1. The participle ambitus, as has already been re marked, has the penult long ; but the noun ambitus has it short.1
OBS. 2. The second syllable in connubium is naturally short, but it is occasionally lengthened by the poets in the arsis of the foot.
Virg. Connubio jungam stabili, propriamque dicabo.
Id Hectoris Andromache, Pyrrhin' connubia servos ?
SECTION XV.
PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. RULE 1. The prepositions a, e, de, di, and se, in compo- sition are long, except di in dtrimo and disertus.s
1. Besides ambio, ambitum, a simple derivative from ambe, there' probably was also amb-eo, amb-itum, a compound from eo.
2. The old form of dirimo was disimo, and hence the inseparable preposition in dirimo and discrtus is in fact dts, not di. In disertvt the original form appears to have been dissertus (the participle of dissero), and one of the two *'s was subsequently dropped.
PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 41
Virg. Amissos longo socios scrmone requirunt. Prop. Conjugis Evadne miseros elata per ignes. Virg. Deducunt socii naves, et littora complent. Id. Tergora diripiunt costis et viscera nudant.
Lucret. Dissidio potis est sejungi seque gregari.
Virg. Cede deo dixitque et proelia voce diremit. Mart. Causas inquit agam Cicerone disertius ipso.
HRuLE 2. Re is short ; as, relinquo, refer o ; but the im- personal verb refert ("it concerns," &c.), from the noun res, has the first syllable long.1
Ovid. Propellit Boreas, astus et unda refert. (Pentam.) Virg. Pr&terea nee jam mutari pabula refert.
\L
RULE 3. The prepositions ab, ad, in, ob, per, and sub, are short in composition before vowels, since they are short in their simple state ; as, abeo, ddoro, ineo, obeo, perambulo, subigo.
1. The impersonal refert is only mentioned here in order to guard against the possibility of a mistake in pronunciation, since it is not a compound of the inseparable preposition re, but comes, according to some, from rci, the dative, according to others from re, the ablative, ol the noun res, and the verb/ero. Verrius Flaccus, the ancient gramma rian, as cited by Festus, was in favour of the dative : " Refert cum dicimus, errare nos ait Verrius, esse enim rectum rei fert, dativo scilicet, non ablativo casu ; sed esse jam usu posseesum." (Festus, p. ccvii., ed. Seal.) Reisig, on the contrary, maintains that refert comes from the ablative re and the verb/ert, and makes refert mea, for example, equiv- alent to re fert mcd, " it brings something to bear in my case." In the same way some modern scholars imagine that interest mea is to be explained, and they advance the opinion that inter and •prater in early Latin governed the ablative. Hence they account for the quantity of the final syllable in intered, prcetered. (Reisig, Vorlesungen, p. 640, ed. Haase. — Benary, Romische Laictlehre, vol. 1, p. 37. — Hartung, iiber die Casus, p. 84. — Bopp, Vergleich. Gramm., p. 215. — Schmid, df Pronom., p. 79.) An opposite doctrine, however, with regard to the etymology of refert, is maintained by Perizonius (ad Sanct. Min., 3, 5. — vol. 1, p. 581, ed. Bauer), and after him by Scheller (Lot. Dcutsch. Worterb., vol. 4, col. 9188, seqq.). both of whom deduce it from refero, and regard the change of quantity merely as an expedient for distinguishing between refert and refert, with their different signifi- cations.
D 2
42 PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION.
Virg. Tityrus hinc dbcrat ; ips& te Tityrc pinus.
Id. Bella gero : ct quisquam numen Junonis adoret f
Id. Et lituo pugnas insignis obibat et hasta.
Id. Prima levcs ineunt si quando proelia Parthi.
Horat Recte necne crocum floresque perambulet Atta.
Virg. Arvina pingui, subiguntque in cote secures.
_
OBS. 1. Ob in composition sometimes drops the b before a consonant, in which case the o remains short ; as, omitto.
Horat. Pleraque differat, et pr&sens in tempus omit tat.
OBS. 2. Trans frequently drops the last two letters in composition, but preserves its proper quantity ; as, trano (from transno) ; traduco (from transduce) ; trado (from transdo).
Virg. Illafretus agit ventos, et turbida tranat.
Id. Atque satas alio vidi traducere messes.
Id. Tradit equum comiti, paribusque resistit in -armis.
RULE 4. Pro is short in Greek words ; as, Propontis, Prometheus ; but in Latin words it is usually long ; as, prodo, procudo, prdcurvus, &c.'
Ovid. Fas quoque ab ore freti longteque Propontidos undis. Virg. Caucasiasque refert volucres, furtumque Promethei. Id. Proderc voce sua quemquam out opponere morti. Id. Maturare datur ; durum procudit orator. Id. Exoritur proeurva ingens per littora fletus.
OBS. 1. There are, however, some Latin words in which
1. " It is impossible," observes Ramsay, " to agree with Dr. Carey in supposing that pro was in reality always doubtful, and lengthened or shortened as might suit the convenience of the poets. Since we find BO many words in which it is uniformly long, a few in which it is always short, and not above two or three at most in which it is doubtful, 'such an hypothesis must be pronounced extravagant." (Ramsay's Latin Prosody, p. 89.)
a, e, t, w, AND y, IN COMPOSITION. 43
pro is uniformly short, viz., the compounds of cello, fanum, fari, fateri, festus, fugio, fundo, fundus, nepos, neptis torvus ; as, procello, procella, profari, profano, prof anus, profiteri, profestus, profugio, profugus, profundo, profundus, pronepos, proneptis, protervus, protervitas, to which add proficiscor, profectus, profeclo.1
y» OBS. 2. The following have the pro doubtful, namely, propago (both noun and verb) and propino. To which some, without sufficient grounds, add procumbo, procuro, prdpello, which have the first syllable always long in the best writers ; and profari, profundo, in which it is always short.2 Virg. Sylvarumque alias presses propaginis arcus. Id. Sed truncis oleae melius, propagine vites.
Id. Sit Romano potens Itala virtute propago.
Lucret. Propagare genus possit vitamque tueri. Id. Ecficis ut cupide generatim saecla propagent. Mart. Crystallinisque murrhinisque propinat. (Scazon.) Id. PraBstare jussi, nutibus propinamus. (Scazon.)
SECTION XVI.
^ A, E, I, U, AND Y, IN COMPOSITION.
/ RULE 1. If the first part of a Latin compound end in o, r that vowel is long ; as, trdno, trdduco, trddo ;3 but if it end in e, the e is in general short ; as, trecenti, nefas.*
Virg. Expertes belli juvenes ; ast Ilva trecentos.
Juv. Credebant hoc grande nefas et morte piandum.
1. Ramsay's Latin Prosody, p. 84.
2. In the two lines from Virgil, quoted immediately after, in which propago is used in its primitive sense, of the sucker or layer of a tree or shrub, the pro is long ; in all other places it is employed in the figu- rative sense of progeny, race, stock, and has the first syllable uniformly short. (Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 88.)
3. These, as has already been remarked, were originally written transno, transduco, transdo ; and hence the quantity of the a in the initial syllables.
4. The quantity of the a in Greek compounds is to be learned from the rules of Greek prosody. Thus a is sometimes shor ; as, adipsos, sometimes long ; as, Nedpolis, genealogus.
44 0, P, «, U, AND y, IN COMPOSITION.
Or.s. 1. Verbs compounded of facio or Jlo have the almost uniformly short, and not common, as is generally maintained. In the following the e is always short : Cale- facio, calefio, calefacto ; labefacio, labefio, labefacto ; made' facio, madefio ; pavefacio, pavefio ; rubefacio, rubefio ; stu- pcfacio, stupefio ; tremefacio, tremefio ; tumefacio, tumefio.1
OBS. 2. The only verbs in which any doubt exists re. specting the quantity of the e, are patefacio, putrefacio, tepcfacio, and liquefacio ; and yet even in these the vowel is much more frequently short than long.2
OBS. 3. The exceptions to the rule of e short in compo- sition are, for the most part, based upon peculiarities of derivation. Thus the following have the e long, namely, nequis,3 nequa, nequod, &c., nequitia, nequam, nequaquam, nequidquam, nequando ; videlicet,4 vencfica,5 semodius,6 se- mestris,'' sedecim,s &c. Martial, however, makes the first syllable of selibra short in several instances, and never long.
RULE 2. If the first syllable of a compound terminate in
1. Ramsay'' s Latin Pros., p. 94.
2. Patefacio has the e long only in two instances, both of which oc- cur in Lucretius (4, 346, and 6, 1000) ; to which some add a line quo- ted from Ennius by Isidorus : " fade patefecil radiis rota Candida ccelum." — The verb putrefacio is found with the long vowel in one passage of Lucretius (2, 898) ; and so likewise one solitary instance of the long e is found in lepefacio. (Catullus, 64, 361.) Two instances of long e occur in liquefacio. (Catull., 90, 6. — Or., Met., 7, 161.)
3. The difference in quantity between necesse, nefas, nefandus, ne- 't fastus, nefarius, nequeo, and ncquis, nequam, nequitia, &c., is proba- bly owing to the following circumstance, that in the former class of words the ne was formed by apocope from the conjunction nee, and so retains its original quantity ; whereas in the latter it is either the adverb ne, which is always long, or else the c of nee was in these cases retain- ed in pronunciation, though omitted in writing.
4. From ridcre and licet, just as scilicet comes from scirc licet, and ilicct from Ire licet.
5. From venenum and facio.
6. By contraction from semimodius.
7. Semcstris, " half monthly," is by contraction from semis and mensis ; and semcstris, " half yearly," from sex and mentis. In either case, therefore, the e is long.
8. From tcxdtcim.
a, e, t, u, AND y, IN COMPOSITION. 45
i or «, the vowel is generally shortened ; as, omnipotens,
causidicus, biceps, ducenti, quadrupes. Virg. Turn pater ommpotens, rerum cui summa potestas'. Mart. Et te patronum causldicumque putas. (Pentam.) Virg. Tollit se arreclum quadrupes, et saucius auras.
RULE 3. When y terminates the first member of a Gretk compound, that vowel is short ; as, Thrasybulus, Euryp'j- lus, Polydamas, polypus; unless rendered common by a mute and liquid, or long by position ; as, Polycletus, which has the y common, and Polyxena, in which it is long. Auson. Anna superveheris quod, Thrasybule, tua. (Pentam.) Ovid. Vel, cum De'iphobo, Polydamanta roga. (Pentam.)
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. But in ludimagister, lucrlfacio, lucrlfio, and com- pendifacio (which are properly not compounds, but each a combination of two distinct and complete words), the i is long ; and the same may be said of agricultura, though the i is short in the compound agricola.1
Exc. 2. The masculine idem,2 as also bigce, quadriga,3 siquis, siqua, siquod,4 scilicet,5 bimus,6 trimus, quadri-
1. Tubtcen, according to the general rule, has the i short, whereas in tiblcen the middle syllable is long, because, as has already been remark- ed, it is a crasis of two short vowels into one long, from the original tiKicen or tilnacen. In liiicen (by syncope from lituicen) the penult MI short.
2. The old form for the masculine idem was isdem (is-dcm), where the i was long by position, a quantity retained after the s was dropped. The neuter, on the other hand, has the short vowel (i-dem), with which we may compare the Sanscrit i-dam. (Bopp, Vergleich. Gramm., p. 500.)
3. Bigee and quadriga: have already been explained, being mere con- tractions from bijuga, quadnjuga. (Vid. page 24.)
4. In slquis, slqua, siquod, the long i follows the. analogy of si.
5. Scilicet is from scire licet, just as llicet is from ire licet.
6. Bimus, trimus, quadrlmus, &.C., are, according to Scaliger and Vossius, contractions from biennis, triennis, quadricnnis. ( Voss., Ely- mol. lMt.t s. v.)
46
a, e, «', w, AND y, IN COMPOSITION.
, quivis, quldam, quilibet,1 tantldem,2 bidu:tm, tridu* urn,8 quotldie* and the other compounds of dies, have the i long.
Virg. Omnibus idem animus, scelerata excedere terra. Mart. Si totus tibi triduo legatur. (Phalaecian.) Phaedr. Nam vita mort i propior est quolidie. (Iambic.) Terent. Quotidianas vita consuetudinem. (Iambic.) Phaedr. Idem faclurum melius se postridie. (Iambic.) Eim. Tantldem, quasi feta canis, sine dentibu1 latrat.
Exc. 3. In ubicunque and ubivis, the t, as in the primi- tive ubi, is common ; while in ubique and ibidem the middle syllable is generally long; though, strictly speaking, it should also be regarded as common.5
1. In qulvis, qutdam, and quilibet, the i follows the quantity of the simple qul. The termination dam, in quidam, is compared by Bopp with the similar termination in the Sanscrit i-dam. (Vergleich. Gramm., p. 500.)
2. Tantidcm has the short penult in Varro (ap. Non., c. 7, n. 105).
" Hospcs quid, miras nummo curare Serapim 1
Quid ? quasi non cures tantldem Aristoteles."
Supposing the reading to be correct, we may conjecture that tantldem was formed by crasis from tan/ndcm, but tanfidem, on the other hand, by syncope. The word indidem (from indcidem) affords an argument in favour of this supposition. (Carey, Lat. Pros., § 10, p. 49.)
3. Originally, perhaps, bisdunm, trtsduum.
4. Quolidie has the t everywhere long, except in Catullus (68, 139), where we have quottdiana. This, however, is either a corrupt reading, as some maintain (Docring, ad Catull., 1. c. — var. lect.), or else, in scan- ning, we must read quotlidiana, and pronounce it quottid-ydna, making the line a Spondaic one.
5. The middle syllable in ubique should be considered common, for the reason that the corresponding syllable in ubicunque and ubivis is re- garded as such, they being all derived from ubi. The authorities, how ever, to prove that the middle syllable of ubique was short as well as long, are very rare. Wasse cites two lines from Plautus (Bacch., 5, 1, 1. — Cos., 2, 3, 38), in which he maintains that ubique is found with the short penult ; and he. then goes on to remark : " Totum discrimen in hoc rcrti ridetur, quod ubi, cum dcsinal in ancipitcm, quotiet adjicitur particula copulativa, ultimam corripiat ; quoties cxpletiva, producat : apud reccntiores quidem, discretionis causa ; non item apud vetustis- simos." The difference in quantity here alluded to. though it may not h»Te any very strong arguments in its favour, may yet be recommended "discretionis causa," and will be found not inconvenient. Foi exam- ple, in reading Sail us l, where ubique, in the sense of et ubi, frequently
0 IN COMPOSITION. 47
SECTION XVII.
0 IN COMPOSITION. RULE 1. In words of Greek origin, where the first part of the compound ends in o-micron (or short 0), that vowel is short ; as, schoendbates, bibliopola, aredpagus, Cleopatra ; unless rendered common or long by position ; as, chiro- graphus, Hippocrene, Phildxenus, Nicdstratus. Juv. Augur, schoenobates, medicus, magus, omnia novit. Mart. Non habeo, sed habet bibliopola Tryphon. (Pentam.) Lucan. Hesperios auxit tantum Cleopatra furores.
RULE 2. But if the first part of the compound word end in an o-mega (or long o), the o is long in Latin ; as, Mind- taurus, gedmetres, gedgraphus, lagdpus.
Virg. Mindtaurus inest, Veneris monumenta nefandas.
Mart. Si meus aurita gaudet lagdpode Flaccus.
OBS. In compound Latin words, the o is sometimes long , as, alidquin, quandoque, ndlo ; and sometimes short ; aa quandoquidem, hodie, duodeni.1
Horat. Mendosa est natura, alidquin recta, velut si. Id. Indignor quandoque bonus dormitat Homerus.
Propert. Hanc utinam faciem ndlit mutare scnectus. '
occurs, we may pronounce the word with the penult shortened, ubique, reserving the long penult for ubique, when it signifies "everywhere," "in every place." — With regard to ibidem, though found long in the best writers, it nevertheless occurs with the penultitna short in Juvencus and Mamercus, whose authority, though by no means equal to that of Hor- ace and Virgil, is still not to be overlooked in a case of this kind. Plau- tus also shortens the penult of the same word in several instances. (Merc., 2, 3, 99.— Most., 2, 2, 51.— Trin., 1, 2, 166.— Captiv., 4, 2, 94.— Bacch., 2, 3, 79.— Stick., 2, 3, 12.)
1. Since quando has the last syllable common, it is more than proba- ble that the o was likewise common in both quandoque and quandoqui- dem, although no instances can be adduced of a short penult in the case uf the former, or a long antepenult in that of the latter. — In like man- ner, as duo has the o common, the same vowel may have been common likewise in dvodeni.
48 INCREMENTS OF NOUNS.
Virg. Dicite, juandoquidem molli consedimus herba.
Horat. Non dices hodie, quorsum hac tarn putida tandem.
Virg. P?r duodena regit mundum sol aureus astra.
SECTION XVIII.
INCREMENTS OF NOUNS.
I. By the increments of nouns is meant the syllable or syllables by which an oblique case exceeds the nomina- tive.
II. When a word of one or more syllables increases, the penult is regarded as the increment. Thus, the re in re- gis, from rex, is the increment, the last syllable never be- ing considered such in any word.
III. When there are more increments than one, which seldom happens but in the plural, they are to be reckoned in the retrograde order, beginning with the penult.
IV. If a noun has one syllable, in an oblique case, more than in the nominative, it is said to have one increment or
increase ; as,
i rex, re-gis,
i sermo, ser-mo-nis.
V. The quantity of the increment of all the other oblique cases is regulated by that of the genitive ; as, sermoni, sermoncm, sermonibus, &c., in which the o is long, because the o of sermonis is long. There is but one exception to this remark, namely, bobus, from bos, bovis ; but this is, in reality, a contraction from bovtbus.1
VI. Nouns in general have but one increase in the sin- gular ; but iter, jecur (when its genitive isjecinoris), supel- lex, and the compounds of caput ending in ps, have two increments. Thus,
1. Bovibus is the same as bowibus, which by contraction become bowbus, or, when written with the long o, bobus.
INCREMENTS OP THE FIRST DECLENSION. 49
1 2
iter, i— ti —ne-ris.
jecur, je- ci -no-ris.
supellex, supel-lec-ti-lis. anceps, an- ci —pi-tis.
VII. The dative and ablative plural of the third declen- sion, in ibus, have generally two increments ; as,
1 2
ser— mo-ni-bus. But the words mentioned in the previous paragraph have
' three increments in these two plural cases.1 Thus,
•
1 2 3
*'— ti —ne—ri-bus.
je— ci-no—ri—bus.
supel-lf.c- ti - It-bus.
an— ci —pi— ti-bus.
SECTION XIX.
INCREMENTS OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLEN- SIONS.
FIRST DECLENSION.
RULE. The vowel a, in the old increment of the first
1. The uncommon increase of these words is owing to their having come originally from nominatives, now obsolete, which consisted of a greater number of syllables than the nominatives to which they are at pres- ent assigned. Iter has for its regular formation in the genitive ileris; and Charisius (p. 108) adduces examples of this form of the genitive from Pa- cuvius and Hyginus. Priscian (p. 695) finds this same form in Nsvius. The ablative itere occurs in Lucretius (5, 652). Be.sides iter, however, there was another form for the nominative, namely, itiner, from which comes the ordinary genitive itineris, and the other cases similar to it. (Compare Charis., p. 16, 34, 63, 109.— Priscian, p. 646, 659.) This nominative itiner is found in Lucretius (6, 338). — The remarks just made respecting iter apply equally to jecur, supellex, and anceps Thus, besides jecur, there was another form for the nominative, jecinur or jecinor, whence came jecinuris or jecinoris. (Charts., p. 34. — Priscian, p. 707.) So also supellex borrows its oblique cases from an adjective, supellectilis, supellectile (Charis., p. 34, 67. — Priseian, p. 724) ; while anceps obtains them from an old nominative ancipes, which made ancipitis in the genitive, just as miles makes militis. This nominative ancipes occurs in Plautus (Rud., 4, 4, 114). In like man- ner, proEceps borrows its genjtive pracipitis, and other oblique cases, from the old form pracipes.
E
50 INCREMENTS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION.
declension, is always long ; as, auld'i, aura'i, longai, pic- fa..1
Virg. Aulai in media libabant pocula Bacchi.
Id. jEthereum sensum, atque aurai simplicis ignem.
SECOND DECLENSION.
RULE. The increments of the second declension are short ; as, miser, miseri ; vir, viri ; satur, saturi ; put, pueri.2
Virg. Non ignara mali, miseris succurrere disco.
Id. Arma viri ! ferte arma ! vocat lux ultima victos
Tibull. Turbaque vernarum, saturi bona signa coloni.
EXCEPTION.
Iber and its compound Celliber have the penult of the
genitive long ; as, Iberi, Celtiberi? Lucan. Quiqueferos movit Sertorius exsul Iberos. Mart. Vir Celtiberis non tacende gentibus. (Iambic.)
OBS. The increment in ius has already been noticed in section IV.
SECTION XX.
INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
INCREMENT IN a.
RULE. The increment in a of nouns of the third declen-
1. The principle on which this long penult depends has already been explained. Consult page 17, note 1.
2. In strictness these are no im rements at all, since miser, rzr, satur, pucr, &.C., are merely contractions from forms in us ; as, miserus, virus, saturuf!, puerus, &c. The vocative puere in Plautus (Asin., 2, 3, 2) can only come from a nominative puerus. Other examples of puerus and pucre are given by Priscian (p. 697 and 738). So, again, the form vira, of which Festus speaks, could only come from virus. (Fest., p. 411, cd. Amstel., s. v. Querquetulanee. — Serv. ad Mn., 12, 468.)
3. These forms, again, like those mentioned in the previous note, are not actual increments ; on the contrary, the nominatives Iber and Celti' ber are merely contractions from Jbf.ni§ and Cdtiberus, in Greek
INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 51
sion is chiefly long ; as, vectig'al, vectigdlis ; pax, pads
calcar, calcdris, &c.
Horat. Jurgatur verbis, ego vectigdlia magna. Ovid. Jariefac aster nos pdcem pacisque ministros, Mart. Accipe belligerae crudum thordca Minervas.
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. Masculine proper names in al and ar (except Car and Nar) increase short ; as, Hannibal, Hanni- bdlis ; Hamilcar, Hamilcaris ;l Caesar, Casdris.
Sil. Hannibdlem Fabio ducam spectante per urbem.
Id. Cut sasvum arridens narrabis Hamilcaris umbris.
Propert. Gallum per medios ereptum Caesdris enses.
Exc. 2. The adjective par and its compounds ; the sub- stantive par ; the noun sal, whether neuter or mascu- line ; and also hepar, nectar, baccar, vas (vddis), mas, anas, lar, an&jubar, have the increase short'.
Virg. Ardentes auro et pdribus Ufa corpora guttis.
Horat. Damnati populo pdria, atque epulum arbitrio Arri et.
Virg. Vela dabant laeti, et spumas salts cere ruebant.
Mart. Ipsa merum secum portat, et ipsa salem. (Pentam.)
Horat. Quinta parte sui nectdris imbuit. (Choriambic.)
1. Ennius and other early authors wrote Hannibdlis, Hamilcaris, Hasdrubdlis, with the long penult. Aulus Gellius informs us, that the grammarian Valerius Probus followed this same pronunciation, and as- serted that Plautus, Ennius, and many other writers of that period, as we have already remarked, gave the penult long. He adds, however, that Probus cited merely one verse from the "Scipio" of Ennius, be- longing to the trochaic class : " Quique propter Hannibalis capias con- riderani." (Aul. Gell., 4, 7.) It cannot be denied that this is the more accurate pronunciation, since Ennius and the others lived nearer to the Carthaginian times ; still, however, the authority of their successors, who shortened the penult, is the rule to be followed in modem days. It may be remarked in favour of the long penult, that this harmonizes with the etymology of the names in question ; since both Hannibal and Hasdru- bal obtain the latter part of their form from the Oriental Baal, where the two vowels coalesce into one long : while Hamilcar is to be adduced in part likewise, from Milcar, where the final syllabic is also long. (Consult Gcscnius, Phasn. Man., p. 407. — Gronov. ad Gell., I c.)
52 INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
Vrirg. Errantes hederas passim cum baccdre tellus.
Ovid. Sacra Bonos, mdribus non adeunda, Dea. (Pentara.)
Avien. Latipcdemque andtem cernas excedere ponto.
Tibull. Sed patrii servate Lares, aluistis et idem.
Virg. It portis, jubdre exorto, delecta juventus.
Exc. 3. Greek nouns in a and as increase short ; as
pocmu, poemdtis ; lampas, lampddis. Horat. Non quivis videt immodulata poemdta judex. Ovid. Undique collucent prascinctcB lampddes auro.
Exc. 4. Nouns ending in s, preceded by a consonant, and many nouns in ax, increase short in the genitive ; as, trabs, trdbis ; Arabs, Ardbis ; fax, facts ; arcto- phylax, arctophyldcis (and many other compounds of (frvkat;) ; climax, climdcis ; dropax, dropdcis, &C.1
Virg. Auratasque trdbes, veterum decora alia parentum.
Horat. Otia diviliis Ardbum liberrima muto.
Virg. Jamque faces et saxa volant, furor arma ministrat.
Mart. Psilothro faciem lavas, et dropdce calvam.
OBS. The proper name Syphax is commonly supposed to have in the genitive Syphdcis and Syphdcis. This, however, is incorrect, as the- short quantity turns merely on an erroneous reading in Claudian, and the true form of the genitive is consequently Syphdcis.2
INCREMENT IN 6.
RULE. The increment in e, of the third declension, is
1. These nouns in x are in fact nothing more than nouns ending in a preceded by a consonant, the letter x being equivalent to cs, gs, or ks.
2. The line of Claudian occurs in the poem " De Bella Gildonico" (v. 91), and is as follows : " Compidimus dirum Syphacem, fractumqut Metello." The passage, however, of which this line forms part, in- volves a palpable historical error, if the reading Syphacem be retained; and Hannibalem has therefore been substituted by Barth ; an emenda- tion approved of by Broukhusius (ad Propcrt., 3, 9, 61) and other schol- ars, although the common reading is retained by Artaud in Lemaire'i Collection.
'
INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 53
mostly short ; as, grex, gregis ; pes, pedis ; teres, teretis ;
mulier, mulieris.
Ovid. Nobiliumque greges custos servabat equarum.
Fur. Pressatur pede pes, mucro mucrone, viro vir.
Virg. Incumbens tereti Damon sic c&pit olivae,
Afran. Hcec sunt venena formosarum mulierum, (Iambic.)
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. Iber, Iberis, and genitives in enis, have the pe- nult long ; as, ren, rents ; Siren, Sirenis ; except that of hymen, which increases short.
Prise. Quern juxt a, terras habitant Orientis Iberes.
Horat. Si latus out renes morbo tentantur acuto.
Ovid. Monstra maris Sirenes erant, qua voce canora.
Exc. 2. Ver, mansues, locuples, h&res, merces, quies, lex, rex, plels, vervex, seps, and halec, increase long ; as, verts, mansuetis, locupletis, haredis, mercedis, quietis, legis, regis, plebis, vervecis, septs, halecis.
Virg. Vere novo gelidus canis cum montibus humo*
Horat. Tu me fecisti locupletem, Vescere, sodes.
Mart. Edcnt haredes, inquis, mea carmina quando.
Id. Turba gravis pad, placid&que inimica quieti.
Propert. Illorum antiquis onerentur legibus aures.
Horat. Forlunam et mores antique plebis et idem.
Mart. Capparin, et putri cepas halece natantes.
Exc. 3. Hebrew and other foreign names in el increase
long ; as, Daniel, Danielis ; Michael, Michaehs.1 Alcim. Magnum ilium Dominum atque deum Danielis ado-
" Exc. 4. Greek nouns in es and er increase long ; as,
1 . Hebrew names in el follow the analogy q£ the long vowel in that language.
E 2
54 INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
tapes, tapetis ; trapes, trapetis; lebcs, lebetis ; soter, soteris ; crater, crateris ; except aether and aer, which increase short.1
Sid. Ap. Jpse per attonitos bacca pendente trapetas.
Ovid. Viginti fulvos operoso ex are lebetas.
Virg. Crateras magnos statuunt, et vina coronartt.
Id. Quacumque ilia levem fugiens secat osthera pennis.
Id. Si nigrum obscuro comprenderit aera cornu.
INCREMENT IN t AND y.
RULE. The increment in t or y, of the third declension, is for the most part short ; as, stips, sfipis ; nemo, neminis ; pollex, polUcis ; chlamys, chlamydis ; chalybs, chalybis. Ovid. Die, inquam, parva. cur stipe qu&rat opes. (Pentam.) Virg. Qualem virgineo demessum poltice florem. Ovid. Anchisae sceptrum, chlamydem pharetramque nepoti. Virg. Insula inexhaustis chaly'bum generosa metallis.
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. Genitives in inis or ynis, from nouns of Greek origin, have the penult long ; as, delphin, delphinis ; Ph'orcyn, Phorcynis ; Salatnis, Salammis.
Virg. Orpheus in silvis, inter delphmas Arion.
Id. Laomedontiaden Priamum Salarmna petentem.
F^xc. 2. The following also have the long penult in the genitive: Dis, Dltis ; glis, gliris ; vibex, vibicis ; gryps, gryphis ; Samnis, Samriitis ; Quiris, Quintis ; Nesis, Nesidis.
Virg. Nodes atque dies patet atri janua Ditis.
Mart. Somniculosos ille porrigit glires. (Scazon.)
Pers. Si puteal multa cautus vibice jlagellas.
Virg. Huic horret thorax Samriitis pellibus ursaR.
• 1. Greek nouns in es and cr which increase long in the genitive, have T] in the penult ofi^hat case in Greek. On the contrary, aether and air have e in the genitive ; as, aiOepof, uepof.
INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 55
Luc. Tradite nostra viris, ignavi, signa, Quirites. Stat. Silvaque qua fixam pelago Nesida coronat.
INCREMENT FROM IX AND yx.
RULE. Nouns in ix or yx have, for the most part, the pe- nult of the genitive long ; as, bombyx, bombycis ; perdix, perdicis ; pernix, pernlcis ; coturnix, coturnlcis ; lodix, lo- dicis.
Propert. Nee si qua Ardbico lucet bombyce puella.
Seren. Seu f el perdicis parili cum pondere mellis.
Virg. Progenuit pedibus celerem et pernicibus alis,
Ovid. Ecce coturntces inter sua pr&lia vivunt.
Mart. Lodices mittet docti tibi terra Catulli.
EXCEPTIONS.
Nix, Cilix, strix, fornix, histrix, choenix, varix, salix, Jilix, larix, coxendix, pix, calix, calyx, Eryx, Styx, lapyx, Phryx, onyx, and some others, have their in- crease short, as have likewise some proper and gen- tile names ; such as Ambiorix, Vercingetorix ; Bitu- rix, Caturix,
Virg. Perque nives alium perque korrida castra secuta est.
Luc. Armenios CiUcesque feros, Taurosque subegi.
Propert. Et stngis inventce per busta jacentia pluma.
Calph. Venit ; et hirsuta spinosior histnce barba.
Seren. Saepius occultus victa coxendice morbus.
OBS. 1 . Mastix, mastichis, " a gum," increases short ; but mastix, mastigis, " a whip," or " scourge," has the in- crement 1 ong.
Seren. Pulegium, abrotonum, nitida cum mastiche coctum. Horn. A£2f apa (JHAvrfaag ifiaaev fidarlyt (jxzeivy. Prudent. Nunc mastlgophoris, oleoque et gymnadis arte.
OBS. 2. Appendix is generally considered as increasing
56 INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
short in the genitive ;' and perpendiculum, a noun of kin- dred origin, has the penult short in Ausonius (Parental., 5,8).
OBS. 3. Bebryx and sandix have the increment common.
Val. Flacc. Bebrycis et Scythici procul inclementia sacrL Sil. Ital. Possessus Baccho sava Bebrycis in aula. Propert. Illaque plebeio, vel sit sandicis amictu. Gratius. Interdum Libyco fucantur sandice pinna.
INCREMENT IN O.
RULE. O, in the increment of the third declension, in words of Latin origin, is for the most part long ; as, sol, solis ; vox, vocis ; victor, victoris ; and all other verbal nouns in or ; ros, roris ; dos, ddtis ; statio, statidnis ; and all other feminine verbals in io ; Cato, Catonis, and other Latin proper names in-o.
Ovid. • Regia solis erat sublimibus alta columnis.
Tibull. Ille liquor docuit voces inflectere cantu.
Virg. Nee victoris heri tetigit captiva cubile.
Lucan. Ire vetat, cursusque vagos statibne moratur.
Id. Et mala vel duri lacrymas motura Catonis. •
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. Nouns in o or on, taken from the Greek o>v, preserve in Latin the same quantity of the increment which they have in the Greek. If that increment be an omicron, it is short ; if an omega, it is long. Thus, sindon, aedon, Agamemnon, Jason, Philemon, &c., increase short; whereas Laco, Plato, Solon, Sicyon, &c., increase long.
Mart. Cultus sindone non quotidiana. (Phalaecian.)
Paulin. Si confers fulicas cycnis, et aedona parra.
Horat. Pythagoran, Anytique reum, doctumque Platona.
Mart. Et gratum nautis sidus fulgere Laconum.
1. It is so given, for instance, by Scheller (Lai. Dcutsch. WiJrferi.,* e.) and Freund ( Worterb. der Lot. Sprache, s. «.*
INCREMENT'S OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 57
OBS. Sidon, Orion, JEgoson, have the increment common, and so likewise has Britto, " a native of Britain." Saxo, Seno, and some other gentile nouns, increase short. Sil. Ital. Stat,fucare colos nee Sidone vilior, Ancon. Virg. Atque equidem Teucrum memini Sidona venire. Ovid. Quorum si mediis Bceoton Oriona quceras. Lucan. Ensiferi nimium fulget latus Orionis. Claud. Htec centumgemini strictos JEg&onis enses. Ovid. JEg&ona suis immunia terga lacertis. Juv. Qua nee tcrribiles Cimbri, nee Brittones unquam.
Mart. Quam veteres braccce Brittonis pauperis, et quam.
F fc. 2. Genitives in oris, from Latin nouns of the neu- er gender, have the penult short ; as, marmor, mar- moris ; corpus, corporis ; ebur, eboris. Ador, however, which is of the masculine gender, makes adoris and adoris ; it being found short in Ausonius, and both long and short in Gannius, ao old poet quoted by Priscian.1
Auson. Max ador, atque adoris de polline pultificum far. Gann. Illam sponte satos adoris stravisse maniplos. Id. Emicat in nubes nidoribus ador adoris.
Exc. 3. Greek proper names in or, and appellatives, a»
rhetor, increase short.
Val. Flac. Ingemit et dulcifrater cum Castore Pollux. Ovid. Et multos illic Hectoras esse puta. (Pentam.)
1. Hence we have adoreus in Virgil, and adorea in Horace and Clau- dian. — It is possible that the variation of quantity in adoris and adorit may be connected with a difference of gender. Priscian considers advt an irregular noun, which, though ending in or, still shortens the penulf of the genitive, and which terminates in or, though of the neuter gender. For this he is censured by Scaliger, who maintains that ador properly makes only adoris in the genitive, and that adoris comes from the obso- lete nominative adus, of the neuter gender. (Seal, ad Fest., vi. — Pm- cian, 6, 9, 49 — vol. 1, p. 251, td. Krehl.) Scaliger, however, is himself in error when he derives ador from the Greek udvp. It is to be traced to the Sanscrit ad, " to eat." (Lindemann ad Fest., p. 302.)
58 INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
Mart. Peleos et Priami transit vel Nestoris &tas.
Id. Dum modo causidicum, dum te modo rhetor a jingis
Exc. 4. Os, oris ; and adjectives of the comparative de- gree, have their increment long ;• as, majoris, pejoris, melioris.
Virg. Componens manibusque manus, atque oribus ora.
Id. Nate dea, nam te majoribus ire per altum.
Horat. Mutius, indignum quod sit pejoribus ortus.
Exc. 5. The compounds of TTOV$, as, tripus, polypus, CEdipus ; and also memor, arbor, lepus, bos, compos, and impos, increase short.
Juv. Stantibus oznophorum, tripodas, armaria, cistas. Mart. Phineas invites, Afer, et GEdipodas. (Pentam.) Virg. Strata jacent passim sua quaque sub arbore poma. Mart. Mavis, Rufe, coquum scindere quam leporem. (Pen- tam.)
Exc. 6. Cappadox, Allobrox, pracox, and other nouns which have a consonant immediately before s in the nominative ; as, scobs, scrobs, ops, inops, ^Ethiops, Ce- crops, Dolops, increase short ; except Cyclops, Cercops, and hydrops.
Horat. Mancipiis locuples, eget (Kris Cappadocum rex.
Senec. Materna, letum pracocis mali tulit. (Iambic.)
Juv. A scrobe vel sulco redeuntibus altera ccena.
Virg. Non hcec humanis opibus, non arte magistra.
Ovid. Virginibusque tribus gemino de Cecrope natis.
Manil. Et portentosos Cercopum ludit in ortus.
Ovid. Tela reponuntur manibus fabricata Cyclopum.
INCREMENT IN U.
RULE. The increment in u of the third declension is for the most part short ; as, murmur, murmuris ; furfur, fur- furis ; dux, duds ; praesul, praesulis ; turtur, turturis.
PLURAL INCREMENT OF NOUNS. 59
Virg. Aspice, ventosi ceciderunt murmuris aurae. Seren. Furfuribusque novis durum miscebis acetum. Pedo. Consule nos, duce nos, duce jam victore caremus.
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. Genitives in udis, uris, and utis, from nomina- tives in us, have the penult long ; as, palus, paludis-; incus, incudis ; tellus, telluris ; virtus, virtutis.
Virg. Quum primum sulcos (Equant sata ? quique paludis.
Mart. Turn grave percussis incudibus osra resultant.
Virg. Vix e conspectu Siculcs telluris in altum.
Id. Mittatur Pallas, quern non virtutis egentem.
Exc. 2. The following also increase long : fur, furis ; lux, lucis ; Pollux, Pollucis ; and frugis, from the old nominative frux. But intercus, pecus, and Ligus, in- crease short.
Virg. Quid domini faciant, audent cum taliafures?
Tibull. Luce sacra requiescit humus, requiescit orator.
Ovid. Pollucem pugiles, Castora placet eques. (Pentam.)
SECTION XXI.
PLURAL INCREMENT OF NOUNS. The penult of the genitive or dative plural is called the plural increment of a noun when either of these cases con- tains more syllables than the nominative plural ; as, muses, musarum ; ambo, amborum, ambbbus ; res, rerum, rebus ; in the first of which the syllable sa, in the second bo, in the third re, are the respective plural increments.1 So also bi in nubium, nubibus ; quo in quorum ; qui in quibus.
PLURAL INCREMENTS IN O, 6, 0, i, U.
RULE. In the increase of the plural, a, e, and o are long, t and u short ; as, quorum, hdrum, Musarum ; rerum, rebus ; horum, quorum ; quibus, trii vs, montibus, lacubus.
60 INCREMENT OF VERBS.
Virg. Quorum qua: forma pulcherrima, De'inpeam. Ovid. Cum tamen a turba rerum requieverit harum. Virg. Jupiter, et rebus nox abstulit atra colorem. Id. At Capys, et quorum melior sentenlia menti. Id. Montibus in nostris solus tibi certet Amyntas. Ovid. Pr&mia de lacubus proximo musta tuis. (Pentam.)
OBS. Bubus has already been explained under section V
SECTION XXII. INCREMENT OF VERBS.
I. The second person singular of the present tense, in- dicative active, is the measure by which to estimate the in- crement of verbs. If any tense or person of a verb do not contain a greater number of syllables than the above stand- ard, the verb is said, in that tense or person, to have no in- crement. Thus, in amat, amant, ama, amem, amans, the verb amo has no increment, because they all contain only two syllables, like amas.
II. If, however, a tense or person exceed the given standard, then, if that excess be by one syllable, the verb is said to have in that part a single increment ; if by two syllables, a double ; if by three, a triple ; if by four, a four- fold increment. Thus, in aMAmus there is a single incre- ment, which is the penult, for the final syllable is never called an increment ; in aMABAmws there is a double in- crement ; in aMAVERIwiu* a triple increment ; and in au- DIEBAMIni a fourfold increment.
III. In determining the increments of deponent verbs, we may imagine an active voice,1 and obtain from this the requisite standard for the regulation of the increments ; or we may be guided by analogy, and estimate them by means
1. Most deponent verbs had, in fact, in earlier Latin, an active voice, which was dropped during the more cultivated period of the language. Consult Struve, iiber die Lot. Decl. und Conj., p. 80. — Reisig, Vorle- sunken, p. 243, $ 150.
INCREMENT OF VERBS. 61
of other verbs of the same conjugation which have an activo voice. Thus, for the verb largior, we may either form an imaginary active, largio, largis, of the fourth conjugation, or be guided by the tenses of audior, which has a real ac- tive.
IV. The final syllable, as has just been observed, is never regarded as an increment. The first syllable, how- ever, becomes one when the standard tense is a monosyl- lable. Thus, in the case of do and^Zeo, the tenses by which we are to estimate their respective increments are das and fles, and consequently in damns, dabam, dare ; flemus, fle- bam, fare, the initial syllables are the increments of the verbs.
VERBAL INCREMENT IN a.
RULE. The vowel a is long in the increments of verbs of every conjugation ; as, stdbam, stares, properamus, doce- bdmus, audiebdmini, &c.
Virg. Trojaque. nunc stares, Priamique arx alta maneres.
Ovid. Serins ant citius sedem properamus ad unam.
Horat. Pugndbant armis, qu<R post fabricdverat usus.
Mart. Festinavit Arabs, festindvere Sabcei.
Ovid. Ipse guberndbit residens in puppe Cupido.
Id. Clam tamen intrdto, ne te mea carmina lasdant.
Virg. Et cantdre pares, et respondere pardti.
Mart. Esse videbdris,fateor, Lucretia nobis.
EXCEPTION.
The first increase of the verb do is short ; as, damns, da- bunt, dare ; and hence the pronunciation of circumda- mus, circumddbunt, circttmddre ; vennmddbo, venumddre, &c., with the penult short.1
1. This violation of analogy on the part of do, to which Priscian al- ludes (9, 6 — vol. 1, p. 453, ed. Krehl.}, may be accounted for by suppo- sing that the verb was originally conjugated, do, dere, didi, dltum, as we have it in the compound dcdo (de-do). It would thus have belonged at
F
62 INCREMENT OF VERBS.
Virg. His lacrymis vitam damns, et miserescimus ultra. Mart. Mille ddbam numos ; noluit accipere. (Pentam.) Tibull. Quamvis magna ddret, quamvis majora ddturus. Virg. Taurino quantum pos sent circumddre tergo. Ovid. Multa rogant utenda ddri, data redder e nolunt.
OBS. The second increase of do, not being excepted, fol- lows the general rule, and is long ; as, ddbdmus, ddbdtis, ddbdmur, ddbdtur, ddbdmini. Virg. Nam quod consilium, out qu<B jam for tuna ddbdtur.
VERBAL INCREMENT IN €.
RULE. The vowel e is long in the increase of verbs ; as, flebam, rebar, lacereris, docerem, legerunt.
Ovid. Flebat Aristaus, quod apes cum stirpe necatas. Virg. Sic equidem ducebam animo, rebarque futurum. Mart. D&dale Lucano cum sic lacereris ab urso.
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. But e before r in the^ir^ increase of every pres- ent and imperfect of the third conjugation, and also in the terminations beris and bere, is short ; as, cognos- cere, legere, legerem, legeremus, legeris, celebraberis, celebrabere.
Virg. Jam legere, et qua sit poteris cognoscere virtus.
Id. Semper honore meo, semper celebrabere donis.
OBS. 1. But in the second increment, where the word terminates in reris or rere, the e is long ; as, diripereris, loquereris, loquerere, proscquerere. Ovid. Cum consternatis diripereris equis. (Pentam.) Mart. Hoc tibi Roma caput, cum loquereris, erat. (Pentam.) Claud. Jungebam Phrygios, cum tu raperere leones.
^
first to the third conjugation, and afterward have been transferred to the first, with a change of e to a. Such forms, therefore, as circumddre^ renumdare, &c., were originally circumdere, venumdere.
INCREMENT OF VERBS 63
OBS. 2. The forms velim, velis, velit, &c., have the e short.
Horat. Musa, velim memores : et quo patre natus uterque. Mart. Esse velis, oro, serus conviva Tonantis.
Exc. 2. The vowel e before ram, rim, ro, of every con- jugation, is short ; as, amaveram, amaverim, amavero ; feceram, fecerim, fecero ; and the quantity remains the same in the other persons ; as, amaveris, amaverit, amaverimus, amaveritis ; fecerimus, feceritis.
Ovid. Fecerat exiguasjam sol altissimus umbras.
Catull. Dein cum millia multa fecerimus. (Phalaecian.)
OBS. This rule does not apply to those syncopated tenses which have lost the syllable ve ; as, Jleram, fierim> Jlero ; the e in these contracted forms retaining the same quantity which it possessed previously to the syncope ; viz., j?<?(ve)- ram, Jle(ve}rim, fie(ve)ro.
Virg. Implerunt monies, flerunt Rfipdopeia arces.
Ovid. Nerunt fatales fortia fila de&. (Pentam.)
Exc. 3. The poets sometimes shorten e before runt, in the third person plural of the perfect indicative active.1 Virg. Obstupui, steteruntque comes, et vox faucibus hoBsit. Id. Matri longa decem tulerunt fastidia menses. florat. Di tibi divitias dedcrunt artemque fruendi. Tibull. Nee cithara, intonsas profueruntve comas. (Pentam.) Mart. Nee lua defuerunt verba Thalasse mihi. (Pentam.) Sil. It. Terruerunt pavidos accensa Ceraunia nautas.
VERBAL INCREMENT IN t.
RULE. The vowel * in any of the increments of verbs is short, whether such increment be the first, second, third, or fourth ; as, linquimus, amabtmus, docebimmi, audiebammi,
J. Consult remarks under the article Systole, page 127.
64 INCREMENT OF VERBS.*
&c., and venlmus, comperimus, reperlmus, &c., of the per feet tense.
Virg. Linquimus Ortygiae portus, pelagoque volamus.
Horat. Infra se positas ; extinctus amabitur idem.
Manil. Victuros agimus semper, nee vivimus unquam.
Claud. Vicimus, exputimus ; facilis jam copia regni.
Plaut. Quapropter id vosfactum suspicamim ',? (Iamb.)
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. But the i is long in nollto, noUte, nolimus, notitis , oeUmus, velltis ; malimus, malltis ; simus, sitis ; and their compounds, posslmus, adslmus, proslmus, &c. Mart. Nolito fronti credere, nupsit heri. (Pentam.) Calp. Credere, pastores, levibus nolile puellis. Mart. Ne nimittm simus, stultorum more, molesti. Calp. Possitis, ter quisque manus jactate micantes.
Exc. 2. The penult of the preterite in ivi, of any conju- gation, is long-; as, petlvi, audlvi. Virg. Cessi, et sublato montem genitore petivi. Id. Adventumque pedum, flatusque audlvit equorum.
Exc. 3. In the first increase of the fourth conjugation whenever a consonant immediately follows, the i v long ; as, audimus, auditis, audite, audlrem, audire, au dimur, audltur, audlrer, auditor, audiri ; to which add the contracted form of the imperfect, audlbam, and the old form of the future, audibo, which we uniformly find in Ibam and ibo, from eo, as well as in quibam and quibo, from queo.
Senec. Audlmur, en, en, sonitus Herculei gradus. (Iamb.)
Virg. Montibus audiri fragor, et resonantia longe.
Horat. Alterius sermone meros audiret honores.
Virg Ferre rotam, et stabulo frenos audite sonant cs.
Id. Tu ne cede malis sed contra audentior ito. _
INCREMENT OF VERBS. 65
/irg. Jungimus hospitio dextras, et tecta subimus. id. Nutrlbat, teneris immulgens ubera labris.
PropjTt. Lenlbunt tacito vulneru nostra sinu. (Pentam.)
OBS. 1. Venimus, comperlmus, reperimus, &c., of the pres- ent tense, fall under the previous exception, and are long ; whereas venlmus, comperlmus, reperimus, &c., of the perfect tense, have the penult short, as has been mentioned, ac- cording to the general rule.
OBS. 2. When a vowel, and not a consonant, immediately follows the i in the first increase of the fourth conjugation, the i becomes necessarily short by position ; as, audiuntt audiebam, audiam, audlar, audiens, &c.
OBS. 3. The i in the penult of the first and second per sons plural of the indicative future perfect, or second future, and the perfect of the subjunctive is doubtful.1 Lucret. Quas ob res ubi viderimus nil posse creari. Catull. Dein cum millia multa feccrimus . (Phalsecian.) Ovid. Videritis Stellas illic ubi circulus axem. Id. HCBC ubi dixeritis, servet sua dona, rugate.
Id. Accepisse simul vitam dederitis in unda.
Id. Et maris lonii transieritis aquas. (Pentam.)
Id. Consulis ut limen contigeritis, erit. (Pentam.)
Virg. Egerimus, nosti ; et nimium meminisse necesse est.
1. We have given the rule as equally applicable to both the indica- tive future perfect and the perfect subjunctive. It holds good, however, more certainly of the former than the latter tense. With regard to the perfect subjunctive, it is frequently impossible to distinguish it from the future perfect, since in very many cases where the. one is employed, a very slight modification of the sense would render the use of the other equally appropriate. The only example discovered by prosodians where this tense undoubtedly occurs in such a position as to determine its quantity, is in the line from Virgil cited above, and which is found in JEn., 6, 514. — The old grammarians are at variance on this subject. Dioine- des (p. 331) and Agroetius (p. 2267) assert that the penult of rimus and ritis in the future perfect is long, and in the perfect subjunctive is short. Probus, on the other 'hand (p. 1412 — p. 1434), affirms that the syllable is long in both tenses ; and both Probus and Servius (ad Virg., I. c.) expressly declare, that the penult of egerimus, in the passage quoted, was shortened by Virgil " metri necessitate.'-' (Voss., de Art. Gram,, 2,31.)
F 2
66 FINAL SYLLABLES.
VERBAL INCREMENT IN 0 AND U.
RULE. In the increase of verbs o is always long, but u is generally short ; as, facitote, habctote ; sumus, possumus, mlumus.
Ovid. Cumque loqui poterit, matrem facitbte salutet.
Id. Hinc quoque presidium laesae petitote figura.
Horat. Nos numerus sumus, etfruges consumere nati.
Virg. Dicite, Pierides : non omnia possumus omnes.
Horat. Si patriae volumus, si nobis, vivere cari.
EXCEPTION.
But u in the penult of the future participle in rus is al- ways long; as, periturus,facturus, amaturus. Virg. Si periturus abis, et nos rape in omnia tecum. Id. Tarda venit, seris factura nepotibus umbram.
SECTION XXIII. FINAL SYLLABLES.
The quantity of final syllables is ascertained, in some cases, by position ; as, prudens, pracox ; in others by their containing a diphthongal sound ; as, musas, penntB ; but in most by special rules, which follow.
FINAL a.
RULE 1. A in the end of words not declined by cases is long ; as, circa, citrd, contra, extra, frustrd, intrd, &c. ; to which add the imperative of the first conjugation ; as, mem- ore, amd.1
1. In imperatives of the first conjugation the final a is long, because formed by contraction from ae. Thus, memorae, memord ; amae, amd, &c. (Struve, uber die Lot. Declin. und Conj., p. 135.) — With regard to circa, citra, contra, <fec., various opinions exist. Scheller views them as old ablatives singular feminine of the first declension, with an ellipsis of parte, or opera, or some other equivalent term. (Scheller, Lat.- Deutsch. Worterb., s. T>.) Ramsay, on the other hand, regards most of them as old imperatives of verbs of the first conjugation, of which frustro, intro, supero (or supro), are still in use ; while, as respects such forms as an ed, posted, intered, pratered, &c., he agrees with the author
FINAL SYLLABLES. 67
Horat. Circa mite solum Tiburis et mania Catili. (Chori-
ambic.)
Ovid. Dextera diriguit, ncc citrd mota, nee ultra.
Virg. Contra non ulla est oleis cultura, neque ilia.
Horat. Laudet ametque domi, premat extra limen iniquus.
Id. Frustra, nam scopulis surdior Icari. (Choriambic.)
Virg. Musa, mihi causas memora ; quo numine lasso.
Plaut. Si auct oritat em postea defugeris. (Iambic.)1
EXCEPTIONS.
But eia, ita, puta2 (the adverb), and quia,3 have the final vowel short ; and also the names of letters ; as, alpha, beta, &c., which latter follow the quantity of the Greek.
Val. Flac. Ferret ad aurigeras caput arboris : Eia per ipsum.
Virg. Incolimus ; sed vos, sifert ita corde vohintas.
of a paper in the "Journal of Education" (vol. 1, p. 106), who supposes them to be formed from ante earn, post earn, &c., the correlatives ante- quam, postquam, still retaining the final letter. (Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 38.)
1. Posted occurs with the final vowel short in Ovid (Fast., 1, 165); but the difficulty may be obviated either by writing post ed, or by pro- Bouncing the word as a dissyllable, postyd, making it, in this latter case, have the long final vowel.
2. Puta. is short only when taken adverbially. When it stands as an imperative the a is long. Some doubt, however, has been attempted to be thrown upon the quantity of the final letter in puta when an adverb. It is found short in Persius (4, 9), and also in Martial (3, 26, 5 ; 9, 96, 5 ; 1 1, 95, 2), in accordance with the exception in the text, and it has been allowed to stand by several editors, where others have given puto. Ca- saubon and Konig, for example, retain puta in the text of Persius, and Priscian, the ancient grammarian, as cited by the former, observes, " Ita solum a correptum habet, quamvis quidam puta adverbium esse accipiunt, » ideoque Persium id corripuisse, ut, hoc, puta, non justum," etc. (Prise., lib. 15 — vol. 1, p. 617, ed. Krehl.) Servius likewise, in his commentary on Virgil (JEn., 2, 651 — vol. 1, p. 167, ed. Lion), after observing that adverbs in a are long, expressly excepts puta and ita. Still, in all the instances cited above, many MSS. give puto, which leaves the matter involved in some degree of uncertainty. „ .
3. Dr. Carey, on the authority of a single line in Phaedrus, pronounces the final vowel in quia doubtful. The line is as follows : " Ego primam tollo nominor quid ho." (Phadr., 1, 7.) But almost all editors agree in considering the line corrupt, and most of them read " Ego primam tollo quoniam nomine* leo."
68 FINAL SYLLABLES.
Virg. Sed quid non aliter vires dabit omnibus aquas.
Juv. Hoc discunt omnes ante Alpha et Beta puella.
RULE 2. A in the end of words declined by cases is short, except the ablative singular of the first declension, and Greek vocatives from nominatives in as ; as, ancho~a de prord, jEnea, Palld.1
Virg. Anchord de prora jacitur ; slant littore puppes. Id. Quid miserum, jEned, laceras ? jam parce sepulto.
OBS. 1. Greek names in es and e are frequently changed by the Latins into a ; as, Atrida for Atrides ; Oresla for Orestes ; Circa for Circe. In nouns of this class, the final a in the vocative is short.2
OBS. 2. Some prosodians make the final a in numerals either long or short. The true quantity, however, is the long one ; as, trigintd, quadragintd, sexagintd?
FINAL 6.
RULE. E final is for the most pan short; as, nate,fuge, eripe, ille, sine, pane, &c.
1. The final a in the ablative singular of the first declension is long, because contracted from at. The old dative and ablative singular of the first declension had this latter ending; as, terral for terrac. ; tcrrai for terra. (Plank ad Enn., Med., p. 80.— Grutcr, Inscr., 2, 12.— Id., 2nd., p. 84.)
2. The short a in these forms is obtained from the ^Eolic a (Com- pare the Greek forms ve<j>e^.ij'yEpf~a., iiriroTa, evpi>ona., and the Latin pocla, from iroi^rrjf.) In Virgil (JEn ., 3, 475) we have Anchisa in the vocative, which some deduce from a Doric nominative Anchisas. It 'u better, however, to ascribe the length of the final vowel, in this instance, to the force of the caesura or arsis.
, 3. To support the position that the final a in numerals is common, the following line from Manilius has been adduced : " Ter trigintd quadrum paries per sidera reddant." (Manii, 2, 322.) Bentley, however, in- sists that the reading here is erroneous, especially since triginta ociurs six lines lower down, in the same poet, with the final vowel long. In all the oldest MSS. of the classics, numbers were expressed by marks,
. not by words ; hence, when the transcriber found LXXXX in his copy, he ignorantly, according to the English critic, rendered it by tcr trigintu instead of nongentat, which latter reading Bentley of course restores. Some other examples of numerals with the short final vowel arc adduced from Martial and Ausonius, but the MSS. here give different readings. The rule, therefore, laid down above is undoubtedly the true one.
FINAL SYLLABLES. 69
Virg. Hcu fuge, note Dea, teque his ait eripe flammis.
Id. Hie miki ante olios fortunatusque laborum.
Id. Qucis sine nee potuere seri nee surgere messes.
Id. Pane simul tecum solatia rapta Menalca.
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. E final is long in all cases of the first and fifth declensions ; as, JEgle, Thisbe, Melpomene, die, Jide, fame, re ; and in adverbs derived from the latter ; as, hodie, pridie, quare, &C.1
Virg. JEgle Na'iadum pulcherrima, jamque videnti.
Ovid. Saspe ut constiterant, hinc Thisbe, Pyramus illinc.
Horat. Quern tu Melpomene semel. (Choriarabic.)
Virg. Forte die solemnem illo rex Areas honorem.
Id. Libra die somnique pares ubifecerit horas.
Horat. Effare; jussas cum fide poenas luam. (Iambic.)
Virg. Amissis, utfama, apibus mqrboque fameque.
Id. Pro re pauca loquor ; nee ego hanc abscondere furto
Horat. Muneribus servos corrumpam ; non hodie si.
Id. Quare per divos oratus uterque penates.
1. The final e is long in all cases of nouns of the first declension, be- cause answering to the Greek 77. It is long in all cases of the fifth de- clension, because it is a contracted syllable. (Schneider, L. G., vol. 3, p. 355, seqq ) — Under this same exception falls the ablative fame (Virg., JEn., 6, 421), the noun fames having been, according to Aulus Gellius (9, 14), originally of the fifth declension, fames, famei; like plebes, pie- lei. — The vocatives Ulysse and Achille have also the final e long. These are Greek forms. The yEolo-Doric tribes changed the termination evf into 7/f, and said 'Op<j>rie for 'Optyevc, 'Odvoorif for 'Odvaaeiif, 'A^t'A/l^f for 'AxM^vf, &c. (Maittaire, Gr. D., p. 183.) The Latins, in imi- tation of these, used Ulysses and Achilles, with some others, as nouns of the third declension, making in the vocative Ulysse, Achille, &c., with the final e long, because answering to the Greek 77. Another Latin form, and one of more frequent recurrence in poetry, is that in eiis, of the second declension ; as, Ulyeseiis, Achilleiis, making in the genitive Ulyssei, Achille'i, contracted into Ulyssi, Ar.hilli. The vocative of such a form will be Ulyssee, Ar.hiU.ee. We may suppose Achille, in Proper- tius (4, 11, 40), to be formed from it by apocope, if we retain the com- mon reading, " Quique tuas proavus, frcgit, Achille, domos." But Heyne has given the true lection : " Qui tumidas proavo frcgit Achille domos," which makes Achille the ablative, with the final vowel short, as a matter of course. (Heyne ad JEn., 6, 840.)
70 FINAL SYLLABLES.
Exc. 2. E final is long in the contracted nominative and accusative plural of the third declension, in words transplanted from the Greek; as, cete, mele, pelage, tempe, &c., the plural vowel in such words answering to the Greek eta, or long e.1
Sil. Ital. Dum cete ponto innabunt, dum sidera ccelo.
Lucret. At Musasa mele per chordas organici qua.
Id. At pelage multa et late substrata videmus.
Catull. Tempe qua silvas cingunt super impendentes.
Exc. 3. Verbs of the second conjugation have e final long in the second person singular of the imperative active ; as, gaude, salve, vale, &c. But cave has the last syllable either long or short.2
Propert. Gaude, quod nulla est aeque formosa, doleres.
Virg. Salve magna parens frugum, Saturnia tellus.
Id. Cat. Vale, Sabine,jam valete formosi. (Scazon.)
Horat. Cave, cave ! namque in malos asperrimus. (Iambic.) Id. Tu cave ne minuas, tu ne majus facias id.
Ovid. Neu cave defendas, quamvis mordebcre dictis.
Exc. 4. Adverbs in e, formed from adjectives in us, have the final e long; as, placide, probe, late, longe, &c., ex- cept bene, male, inferne, and superne.
1. Thus, Kfirea, contracted K^nj ; pefaa, fishf ; irf^d-yea, Ttfiwta, reftTTT], &c.
2. The second person singular of the present imperative active, in verbs of the second conjugation, is, like the corresponding tense in verbs of the first, a contracted form. Thus, gaudee, gaude ; salvee, salve ; valec, vale, &c. — The double quantity in care or cave arises from the following circumstance, that anciently two forms of the verb were in use, one belonging to the second, and the other to the third conjugation ; just as we find both ferpco and ferco ; fulgeo and fidgo ; oleo and olo, &c. (Struve, titer die Lot. Dec!., &c., p. 189. — Voss., de Art. Gramm., 2, 25.) — Besides care or cave, we find it frequently asserted that vale, vide, responds, and salpe have the last syllable common ; but it will be dis- covered, on examination, that there is little, if any, evidence to prove this. The question will be found discussed in Ramsay's Latin Prot- ody, p. 44, seqq.
FINAL SYLLABLES. 71
Mart. Excipe sollicitos placide, mea donj, libellos.
Catull. Suffenus iste, Vare, quern probe nosti. (Scazon.)
Virg. Directaqitv acies, et late fluctuat omnis.
Juv. jEquora transiliet, sed longe Calpe relicta.
Virg. Si bene quid de te merui,fuit out tibi quidquam.
Id. Insequitur, cumulosque ruit male pinguis arena.
Lucret. Ne tibi sit fraudi quod nos inferne videmus.
Id. Remorum recta est, et recta superne guberna.
But adjectives neuter of the third declension, used as ad- verbs, retain the final e short ; as, sublime, suave, dnlce, facile, &c.
Virg. Cantantes sublime ferent ad sidera cycni. Id. Ipse sed in pratis aries,jam suave rubenti.
Exc. 5. The adverbs ferme,fere, and ohe have the final vowel long. Fere, however, has the last short in the later writers.
Juv. Rarus enimferme sensus communis in ilia.
Hoiat. Vina fere dulces oluerunt mane Camcena.
Id. Importunus amat laudari donee ohe jam.
Auson. Nam tecumfere totus ero quocumque recedam.
Exc. 6. Monosyllables in e are also long ; as, de, me, te, se, and ne (lest or not) ; except the enclitics que, ve, ne, and the syllabic additions pte, ce, te, de ; as, in su- apte, nostrapte, hosce, tute, quamde.1
Virg. De cado tactas memini pradicere quercus.
Id. Me me, adsum quifeci; in me convertite ferrum.
1. The lengthening of monosyllables which consist of, or terminate in e vowel, depends upon an established principle of metrical harmony, since they would be nearly lost in the reading if the voice did not dwell upon them, and make them necessarily long. In the case of enclitics and syl- labic additions, however, the principle does not apply. These are con- nected so closely with the preceding word, that they form but one word with it in the rapidity of pronunciation, and are no longer considered as separate monosyKables.
72 FINAL SYLLABLES.
Virg. Te vcniente die, te decedente canebat.
Id. Ne pueri, ne tanta anitnis adsuescite bella.
Id. Arma virumque cano, Troja qui primus ab oris.
Id. Si quis in adversum rapiat, casusve Deusve.
Id. Tantane vos generis tenuit Jiducia vestri ?
Enn. O Tite tute Tati tibi tanta tyranne tulisti.
FINAL t and y.
nnal ig f°r tne most part long ; as, frumet. fi, scribendl, nulli, partiri, fieri, &c.
Virg. Paullatim et sulcis frumenti quareret herbam. Horat. Garrulus, atque piger scribendi fcrre laborem. Proper^. Nulli curafuit externos quasrere divos. Virg. Ne signare quidem out partiri limite campum. Id. Pastorcs, mandatjieri sibi talia Daphnis.
EXCEPTIONS.
"
Exc. 1. I final is short in nisi and quasi.1
Virg. Nee veni, nisi fata locum sedemque dedissent. Ovid. Quid quasi natali cum poscit munera libo.
Exc. 2. The final t and y are short in Greek neuters ; as, gummt, sinapi, moly ; in the dative singular of Greek nouns ; as, Palladi, Thetidi, Phyllidi ; in Greek voca- tives ; as, Adorn, Aleon, Tiphy, Tethy, chely (but no^ in Tethy, the contracted dative for Tethyi) ; and in datives and ablatives plural in si ; as, heroisi, Dryc Troasi.*
1. Quasi occurs with the i long in Lucretius (2, 291, and 5, 728), and in Avienus (Phacn., 554, 1465, 1567, 1654); but the final vowel in all these instances may be considered as made long by the arsis, es- pecially since we find quasi twice in Lucretius (4, 1011, and 6, 972). — Nisi also has the final vowel long in the following Phalaecian line from Statius (Syfo., 4, 3, 59) : " His parvus, Lcchia nisi vetarent ;" but the MSS. here are hopelessly corrupt, and scarcely two editors read the pas- sage in the same way. The Bipont edition has " His parrus, Lecheo nihU vetante," which is retained in that of Lemaire.
2. It often happens that in such Greek datives as The/irfi, Panda, Tynddndi, &.C., the final vowel is lengthened by the arsis, since other-
FINAL SYLLABLES. 73
Ovid. Moly vacant superi ; nigra radice tenetur.
Stat. Palladi litoreae celcbrabat Scyros honwem.
Ovid. Semper Adorn, met, repetitaque mortis imago.
Id. Quid tibi cum patria, navita Tiphy, mea. (Pentam.)
Id. Troasin invideo, qua si lacrymosa suorum.1
Exc. 3. In mihi, tibi, sibi, ibi, and ubi, the final i is com- mon.2
Virg. Non mihl si lingua centum sint, oraque centum.
Id. Tros Tyriusque mihl nullo discrimine agetur.
Id. Haud obscura cadens mittet tibi signa Bootes.
Id. Cuncta tibi Cererem pubes agrestis adoret.
Id. Jam sibi turn curvis male temper at unda carinis.
Horat. Quanta quisque sibi plura negaverit. (Choriambic.)
Virg. Aut ibiflava seres mutato sidere farra.
Id. Ter conatus ibl collo dare brachia circum.
Id. Nosque ubi primus equis oriens afflavit anhelis.
Horat. Instar veris enim vultus ubi tuus. (Choriambic.)
OBS. 1. The quantity of the final vowel in uti is involved in some uncertainty. Most prosodians make it long, a quantity which it is always found to possess ; and so, too, it is always long in veluti. If, however, any stress is to be
wise forms like these could not find a place (on account of their containing three short syllables in succession) in dactylic verse. Instances of such lengthening occur in Catullus (64, 21), Propertius (3, 8, 29, seq.), Va- lerius Flaccus (1, 190), Ovid (Heroid., 20, 60), Id. (R. A., 711), &c.
1. In this example, the n added to Troasi is placed there merely to prevent the hiatus at the meeting of the two vowels, and makes no dif- ference whatever in the quantity. It is like the v E^E^KVOTLKOV of the Greeks.
2. These words originally ended in the diphthong ei, as mihei, libei, sibei. ibei, ubei, and under this shape they are frequently found in inscrip- tions (compare note 1, page 16) and MSS., especially those of Lucre- tius. One of the vowels of the diphthong being subsequently dropped, they would sometimes appear as mike, tibe, sibe, &c., and sometimes as mihi, tibi, sibi, &c. In the former case, the final e being short in Latin words, except under particular circumstances, the last syllable would be made short by the poets ; in the latter case, the final i being long in Latin words, the syllable would retain its original quantity, as it probably always did in prose. (Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 60.)
6
74 FINAL STLLABLES.
laid upon the fact that the i is always short in sicufi, «#• nam, and utique, the final vowel in uti ought rather to be regarded as common.
OBS. 2. In neculi, sicubi, ubinam, and ubivis, the i of ubi is always short ; but if we are to be guided by the quantity of the final letter of ubi out of composition, as also by the circumstance of the i being long in ublque (" everywhere"),1 but common in ubicunque, we shall, in all probability, be more correct in making the i of ubi common also in the compounds first mentioned.
, Exc. 4. Cui, when a dissyllable, generally has the i 1 (Ji short.
Sen. Mittat et donet cuicumque terras. (Sapphic.) Mart. Sed norunt cui serviunt leones. (Phalaecian.) Id. Drusorum cut contigere barboe. (Ditto.) Id. Et credit cui Postumilla dives. (Ditto.)
•-7 / OBS. Cui is commonly considered as forming a mono- / syllable in poetry. Instances, however, occur, in which
it may be regarded as a dissyllable, even in hexameter
verse, without any injury to the metre, but with advantage,
rather, to the smoothness and harmony of the line ; a? in
the following, among others :
Juv. Cantabat patriis in montibus : et cui non tune.
Virg. At puer Ascanius cui nunc cognomen lulo.
Id. Munera vestra cano. Tuque O cui prima ferentem .
Id. Incipe parve puer : cui non risere parentes.
FINAL o.
RULE. O final is common, though more generally long than short.
Horat. Quando pauperiem, missis ambagibus, horres. Mart. Quando moree dulces, longusqut a Casare pulvis. Virg. PraRterea duo nee tuta mihi valle reperti.
1. Consult note 5, page 46.
/
FINAL SYLLABLES. 75
Auson. Europam Asiamque duo vel maxima terras.
Mart. Capto tuam, pudet lieu I sed capto Pontice c&nam.
Gall. Obruta virgo jacct : servat quoque nomina turns.
Ovid. Victa jacet pietas ; et virgo cade madentes.
Mart. Miscuit, Elysium possidet ambo nemus. (Pentam.)
Virg. Ambo florentes aetatibus, Arcades ambo.
OBS. 1. O final in nominatives of the third declension is, with very few exceptions, long in the writers of the Augus- tan age and their predecessors. In proper names, how- ever, o final is common even in the best writers ; as, Car- thago, Pollio, Scipio, Curio, Vinio.1
OBS. 2. O final in verbs is very rarely shortened by wri- ters of the Augustan age and their predecessors, except in seio, nescio, puto, volo, which are for the most part used parenthetically.2
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. All cases in o of Greek nouns, written in the original with an o-mega, or long o, have the final vow- el long; as, nominative, Id, Ino, Clio; genitive, An droged ; accusative, Atho, Clotho, &c.
Propert. Id versa caput primos mugiverat annos.
Auson. Clio gesta canens transactis tempora reddit.
Virg. Inforibus letum Androged : turn pendere pcenas
Pedo. Quondam ego tentavi Clothoque duasque sorores.
1. It was not until the age of Lucan that the practice of shortening o final in nouns of the third declension became general. In the writings of this poet we find cardo, pulmo, tiro, turbo, &c. ; and in Martial and his contemporaries it is perhaps oftener short than long. (Ramsay's Lot. Pros., p. 55.)
2. No example occurs in Lucretius, Virgil, or in the Odes of Horace, of the final o in a verb being left short, except in scio and nescio, which, as well as puto, volo, rogo, credo, do not form real exceptions, for these words were either used parenthetically, or in colloquial formula enun- ciated rapidly. — The shortening of the final o in verbs is very rare in Catullus, in Tibullus, in Propertius, and in Ovid ; it gradually becomes more common in the writers who follow them, and when we come down to the age of Statius and Martial it is to be found on every page, (flam- •ay's Lot. Pros., p. 56. — Lennep ad Ov., Ep., 15, 32.)
76 FINAL SYLLABLES.
Exc. 2. Monosyllables in o are long ; as, O, do, sto,pro,
&C.1
Virg. 0 decus, o fama merito pars maxima nostra. Id. Do quod vis ; et me victusque volensque remitto. Id. Pro molli viola, pro purpureo narcisso.
Exc. 3. O final is long in the dative and ablative singu- lar of the second declension ; as, viro, vento, auro, sic- co, <fcc.2
Virg. Cui se pulchra viro dignetur jungere Dido.
Ovid. Nutritur vento, vento restinguitur ignis.
Propert. Auro pulsa Jides, auro venalia jura.
Virg. In sicco ludunt fulicae ; not asque paludes.
^*
Exc. 4. O final in the gerund is perhaps never found short, except in writers subsequent to the Augustan age.3
Virg. Frigidus in pratis cantandb rumpitur anguis.
Ovid. Et voluisse mori, et moricndo ponere sensus.
Juv. Plurimus hie <eger moritur vigilando, sed ilium.
Auson. Qua nosti meditando velis inolescere menti.
Exc. 5. Adverbs formed from adjectives have the final o for the most part long ; as, multd, raro, crebro, consul- to, &c.4
1. Compare note 1, page 71.
2. The final vowel in the dative and ablative singular of the second declension is the result of contraction, and therefore long. The primi- tive termination was oi. (Struve, uber Declin., &c., p. 14.)
3. Two passages oppose this doctrine, which, however, is generally recognised by scholars. One is from Tibullus (3, 6, 3) : " Aufer et ipse meum pariter medicando dolorcm," where Heyne reads medicande, from Broukhusius. Disscn also gives this same lection. On the whole question respecting the shortening of the final syllable in gerunds, consult Heyne ad Tibull., I. c. — BroukUus. ad Tibull., 1. c. — Hcins.ad Ot> , Ep., 9, 125. — Burmann ad Anthol. Lot., vol. 1, p 298 — Perizon. ad Sanr.t. Min., vol. I, p. 148, ed. Bauer. — Ramsay's Lot. Pros., p. 57.
4. These, in fact, retain the quantity of the dative singular, from which they are formed.
FINAL SYLLABLES. 77
Juv. Pcena autem vehemens, et multi savior Hits. Ovid. Adde quod iste tuus, tarn raro prcelia passus. Horat. Est mihi purgatam crebro qui personet aurem. Id. Extenuantis eas consulto ; ridiculum acri.
*
Exc. 6. O final is never, perhaps, found short in ergo,
ideo, immo, porro, postremo, sero, vero, except in writers
subsequent to the Augustan age.1
Virg. Ergo non hiemes illam, nonflabra neque imbres. Horat. Ergo Quintilium perpetuus sopor. (Choriambic.) Propert. Ergo velocem potuit domuisse puellam. Ovid. Ergo dum Stygio sub terris gurgite labor. Lucan. Ergo pari voto gessisti bella juventus. Juv. Impune ergo mihi recitaverit ille togatas. Mart. Sed tamen esse tuus dicitur, ergo potest. (Pentam.) Horat. Ac ne me foliis ideo brevioribus ornes. Mart. An ideo tantum veneras ut exires ? (Scazon.) Catull. Frustra ? immo magno cumpretio atque malo. (Pent.) Mart. Adeo bene emit ? inquis : immonon solvit. (Scazon.) Id. Vendere, nil debet, foznerat immo magis. (Pent.)
Catull. Sed dicam vobis, vos porro dicite multis.
1. Some of the ancient grammarians, and almost all the modern ones, make ergo, when it signifies " on account of" have the final syllable long, and short when it means " therefore.'" The distinction does not appear to be a correct one, for the two meanings are in fact the same, and the word in either case is merely Ipyw, the dative of Ipyov. The line quoted by Dr. Carey, from the Ciris, to prove that ergo, " therefore," occurs in good writers with the final syllable short, cannot be received as authority, since the Ciris, which few suppose to have been the work of Virgil, is notorious for its corrupt text. The line is as follows : " Ergo mctu capiti Scylla est inimica paterno" (v. 386). Barlh reads " Ergo turn capili," and Heinsius " Ergo ilerum capiti," which latter emenda- tion is adopted by Heyne. The passage sometimes cited from Proper- tius (3, 7, 1), " Ergone sollicita jtu causa, pecunia, vita es" is given in the best MSS. and editions as follows: " E:gb sollicita tu causa, pccu- nia, vita cs." One instance, however, occurs in Ovid (Her., 5, 59), where ergo has the o short, according to the received reading. It is 23 follows : " Votis ergo meis alii rediture redisti." It is v< ry probable, however, tha' some error lurks here in the text, since Ovid everywhere else makes tne final syllable of ergo long. (Hcins. ad Ov., Trist., 1, 1, 87. — Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 58.)
G2
•
78 FINAL SYLLABLES.
Juv. Multos porro vides, quos s&pe elusus, ad ipsum.
Id. Et Scauros et Fabricios postremo severos.
Till all. Heu sero revocatur amor seroque juventus.
Juv, H<BC animo ante tubas. Galeatum sero duelli.
Mart. Sero dedit pasnas. Discerpi noxia mater.
Virg. Hie vero victus genilor se tollit ad auras.
Stat. Tu potior, Thebane, queri, nos vero volentes.
> ~
Exc. 7. O final is always short in the following words
in good writers : cito, ego,1 modo the adverb, and its compounds dummodo, postmodo, quomodo, tantummodo, together with the numeral octo.
Horat. Quicquid praecipies esto brevis, ut cito dicta.
Ovid. Nee cito credideris, quantum cito credere l&dat.
Virg. S&pe ego, quumjlavis messorem induceret amis.
Lucret. Non modo non omnem possit durare per avom.
Virg. Hie inter densas corulos modo namque gemellos.
1. Ego is said to have the final o common. " The fact, however, is," observes Ramsay, " that there are many hundred instances, in writers of all ages, in which ego is found with the last short, and three or four at most, in decent metrical authorities, where it is found long ; but even here, in ev- ery case, if I mistake not, under suspicious circumstances. — It may serve to set at rest the question with regard to the final o in ego and modo (the adverb), if I state that I have marked 532 examples of ego with the o short in Ovid alone, 91 in Propertius, 90 in Horace, 64 or 65 in Virgil, 53 in Tibullus, 27 in Catullus, and five in Lucretius, in all 862 ; while in the same authors I have been unable to find more than two with the long o ; one of these (Catvll., 19, 1) is from a poem which, though often placed among the works of Catullus, is found in no MS. of that author, and is now left out by the best editors ; the other from Ovid (Her., 13, 135), in a line where the MSS. afford half a dozen different readings. I am aware that other examples are to be found in old editions, but these have all disappeared upon a careful examination of the MSS. ; as, for example, Propert., 1, 8, 31 ; 4, 2, 3, &c. Such being the evidence, I feel justified in reversing the judgment pronounced by Broukhusius (ad Properl., 1. c.), Drakenborch (ad Sil. Ilal., 17, 357), and Ruperti (ad Sil., I. c.) in favour of the o final in ego being common, and in laying down the rule as I have givn it. — With regard to modo (the adverb), I have marked 363 examples in Ovid, 48 in Propertius, 22 in Horace, 13 in Virgil, six in Catullus, two in Lucretius ; in all of these (451) the final o is short, against which there is one in Lucretius where it is length- ened by the arsis. The same holds good of its compounds, with the single exception of quom id in Catullus (10, 7)." (Ramsay's Lot. Pro*., p. 60, seq.)
FINAL SYLLABLES.
79
Horat.
Ovid.
Lucret.
Horat.
Id.
Tibull.
Horat.
Id.
Manil.
Juv.
Mart.
Herculis ritu modo dictus O plebs. (Sapphic.) Nam modo, vos animo, dukes reminiscor amid. Dummodo ne totum corrumpas luminis orbem. Fcenum habet in cornu, longe fuge ; dummodo risum. Postmodo, quod mi obsit, dare certumque locuto. Postmodo qua votis irritafacta velit. (Pentam.) Cum victors sequor. Maecenas quomodo tecum. Proximus esse. Velis tantummodo, qua tua virtus. Sed regione Nepoz vix partes odd trahentis. Sic crescit numerus, sic fiunt octo mariti. Vix octo nummis annulum unde ccenaret. (Scazon.)
X FINAL «.
RULE. U final is long ; as, cornu, metu, partu, Panthu, vitatu, diu.1
Horat. Cornu decorum, leniter atterens. (Alcaic.) Virg. Parce metu Cytherea, manent immota tuorum. Id. Eumenidesque satte ; turn partu terra nefando. Id. Quo res summa loco, Panthu, quam prendimus arcem ? Horat. Aiebat sapiens vitatu, quidque petitu. Virg. Phoe.be diu, res siqua diu mortalibus ulla est.
^ EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. Indu, the old form of in, and nenu for non, both Lucre tian words, have the u short.2
1. Final u in the dative and ablative singular of the fourth declension is the result of contraction from ui, and therefore long. (Struve, iiber Declin., &c., p. 36. — Burmann ad Propert., p. 119.) Hence metu is for metui, and partu, for partui, or, rather, partue. — Some of the old grammarians maintained that neuter nouns in u had the final vowel short in the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular, but long in the other cases. This doctrine, however, is condemned by Priscian (vol. 1, p. 351, ed. Krchl). — The u in Panthu represents the diphthong ov in the original Greek word. — Diu is an old ablative from dius, as is evident from the common phrase diu noctuque. (Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 62.)
2. Indu appears to have come from the ^Eolic tvSov for evdov. Nenu is said to have been the parent of the Latin non. According to Wake- field, the more correct orthography for indu is cndu when it stands singly, and indu when compounded. (Wakef. ad Lucret., lj 83, et 2, 1005.) His authority, however, is of no great weight, especially as the
80 FINAL SYLLABLES.
Lucret. Necjacere indu manus, via qua munita fidei. Id. Nenu queunt rapidei contra constare leones.
Exc. 2. The u continues short in those words whicn naturally end in short us, and are only deprived of the s by the more ancient mode of pronunciation, in order to preserve the syllable from becoming long by its po- sition before a consonant at the beginning of the follow- ing word ; as, plenu1 for plenus, bonu1 for bonus, &c.'
Ennius. Ille vir haud magna cum re, sed plenu1 fidei.
Id. Suavis homo,facundu\ suo contentu\ beat us.
4 FINAL y.
RULE. Y final is short ; as, moly, chely, Coty, Tiphy? Ovid. Moly vacant superi ; nigra radice tenetur. Stat. Cedamus chely, jam repone cantus. (Phalaecian.) Ovid. O Coty, progenies digna parente tuo. (Pentam.) Id. Ars tua, Tiphy,jacet si non sit in aquore fluctus.
^ FINAL I, d, t.
RULE. Final syllables ending in b or d are short, as also those ending in t pure, that is, t immediately preceded by a vowel ; as, db, ad, quid, illud, et, at, amdl. Ovid. Jpse docet quid agam. Fas est et db hoste doceri. Virg. Dixit : at illafurens, acrique incensa dolore. Tibull. Luce sacra requiescdt humus, requiescdt orator.
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. But if t be preceded by another consonant, or the t or d by a diphthong, the syllable must of course remain long ; as, dst, amdnt, out, haud.
Ovid. Ast ubi blandiliis, agitur nihil horridus ira.
^Eolic change of c into i is well known. (Maitt., Dial., p. 208, ed. Sturz.)
1. Consult remarks under "Ecthlipsis."
2 The final y answers to the short final v in Greek. This rule is in part repeated from page 72.
FINAL SYLLABLES. '81
Virg. Aut onera accipiunt venientum, ow. agminc facto. Id. Hdud obscura cadens millet libi signa Bwtcs.
Exc. 2. Those third persons singular of the perfect tense, active voice, which contract ivit or nt into it, or avit into at, have the final syllable necessarily long ; as, petit for petilt or petiint ; obit for obnl or obivit ; irritat for irritavit ; disturbat for disturbavit. Ovid. Flamma petit ahum, propior locus aera cepit. Juv. Magnus civis obit et formidatus Othoni. Lucr. Irritat animi virtulem, ecfringere ut arcta Id. Disturbat urbes, et terras motus abortus.
FINAL C.
RULE. C final has the preceding vowel long ; as, iliic,
illuc, ac, sic, hue, the adverb hie, the ablative hoc.
Virg. Illic, officiant laetis ne frugibus herbas.
Catull. lonios fluctus postquam illuc Arrius isset
Horat. Si sapiat vitet simul dc adoleverit aetas.
Virg. Sic oculos, sic illc manus, sic oraferebat.
Catull. Hue, hue adventate ; meas audite querelas.
Virg. Classibus hie locus, hie acies cerlare solebant.
Ovid. Aut hoc, out simili carmine notus eris. (Pentam.)
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. Nee, donee,1 and the imperative /ere2 are short. Ovid. Parve, nee invideo, sine me liber ibis in urbem.
1. Donee is merely an abbreviation of donicum, a word of frequent oc- currence in Plautus, and itself evidently an adjective of the neuter gen- der.
2. Vossius says that fac is always long, and cites the following lines in support of his opinion :
Has fac Armenios, hcec est Danaeia Persis. (Ov., A. A., 1, 225.) Durius incedit,fac ambulet, omne papilla. (Id., R. A., 337.)
Heinsius, however, upon unexceptionable MS. authority, restored in the first Has facito for Hos fac, and in the second fac inaitbulet for/ac am- bulet.— In almost all cases where fac is followed by a vowel, the MSS vaiy between fac and/ace. (Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 33.)
82 FINAL SYLLABLES.
Ovid. Donee eris fclix mullets numerabis amicos.
Lucret. Non possunt ; fdc enim minimis e partibus esse.
Mart. Signa rarius, out semelfac illud. (Phalaecian.)
Exc. 2. Hie the pronoun is common, but much, more frequently long than short.
Virg. Solus hlc inftexit sensus animumque labantem. Id. Hie vir hlc est, tibi quern promitti sapius audis. Id. H<BC finis Priami fatorum, hie exilus ilium. Ovid. Atque ait, Hlc, hlc est, quern ferus urit amor. (Pent.)
Exc. 3. The neuter hoc is also common, but no example can be quoted, except from the comic writers, in which it is found short.1
Ovid. Dicendum tamen est, hoc est, mihi crede, quod <egra. Id. Hoc deus et votes, hoc et mea carmina dicunt. Plaut. Heus ! ecquis hie est ? ecquis hoc aperit ostium ?
(Iambic.) Id. Quid hoc hie clamoris audio ante &des meas ? (Iambic. )
FINAL I.
RULE. L final has the preceding vowel short ; as, Han- nibal,2 semel, nihil, procul.
1. The facts respecting the usage of the poets in the case of Ate and hoc are given in the text. The opinions expressed by the old gramma-
"rians respecting the quantity of these words differ widely from each other. Velius Longus and Priscian seem to think that hie and hoc are both nat- urally short, and that in all passages where they are found long they ought to be written luce, hocc, and regarded as abbreviations of hicce, hocce. Terentianus Maurus, Marius Victorinus, Probus, Charisius, and Martianus Capella, on the other hand, assert, that in these words c has the same force in pronunciation as a double consonant ; that, conse- quently, hie and hoc ought always to be long, and that Virgil was guilty of an inaccuracy in changing the pronunciation and quantity of hie in the two passages from the JSneid cited in the text. Vossius says that hoc is short in the nominative and vocative ; but he is unable to bring any better authority than that of two anonymous poets in the collections. (Priscian, vol. 1, p. 564, cd. Krehl. — Velius Longus, p. 2219, ed. Putsch. — Marius Victorinus, p. 2471. — Probus, p. 1390. — Charts., p. 4, stq. — Terent. Maur., v. 1657. — Mart. Capell., lib. 3.— Voss., Art. Gramm., 2, 29.—ClassicalJournal, vol. 9, p. 339.— Ramsay's Lot. Pros., p. 35.)
2. Consult note 1, page 51> where it would appear probable thit the
FINAL SYLLABLES. 83
Juv. Hannibal, et slantes Collina turre mariti. Virg. Quum semel hasserunt arvis aurasque tulerunL Virg. Versando terram experti, nihil improbus anser. Id. Arboris acclinis trunco, procul area ramis.
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. Sal,1 sol,2 and nil contracted from nihil, are long. Stat. Non sal, oxyporumve, caseusve. (Phalaecian.) Auson. Sal oleum panis, mel, piper, herba, novem. (Pent.) Ovid. UUerius spatium medio sol altus habebat. Claud. Nil opis external cupiens, nil indiga laudis.
Exc. 2. Hebrew names ending in / have the final sylla- ble generally long ; as, Daniel, Raphael, Ismael? Tert. Quum magnus Daniel, qualis vir, quanta potestas ! Fortun. Qualiler out Raphael occursum impendent almae. Victor. Nee tamen Ismael, Agar de semine natus.
earlier quantity of Hannibal, and other similar Carthaginian names, was Hannibal.
1. There is great doubt whether sal ought to be regarded as an ex- ception to this rule. It appears to be nothing more than an abbreviation of the old nominative sale, still extant in a line of Ennius preserved by Aulus Gellius (2, 26) : " Cceruleum spumat sale conferta rate pulsum." Dr. Carey, therefore, thinks that it was in reality short, and that Statius and Ausonius made it long merely by poetic license. The apocope could never of itself lengthen sal from sale, since even those nouns in al, which had the a long in die before the apocope took place, thence became short ; as, cervical, tribunal, vectigal.
2. Cicero's derivation of sol from solus would supply us with a suffi- cient reason for the long o in the former, if the etymology were really worth anything. His remark is as follows : " Cum sol diclus sit, vel quia solus ex omnibus sideribus est tantus, vel quia, cum est exortus, obscuratis omnibus solus apparet" (N. D., 2, 27). So also Boethius (Cons. Phil, 5, metr. 2):
" Quern, quia rcspicit omnta solus, Verum possis dicer e solem."
The Lalin sol is rather to be traced to sauil, one of the three Gothic forms for " sun," and both sol and sauil are related to the Sanscrit st*- ria. (Grimm, Deutsch. Gramm., vol. 1, p. 611. — Pott, Etymol. Forsch., vol. 1, p. 130.)
3. The Hebrew words have in the last syllable, in the original tongue, the long vowel isert.
84
FINAL SYLLABLES.
FINAL m.
RULE. When a word ends in m, and is immediately fol- lowed by a word beginning with a vowel or h, the poets of the Augustan age and their successors generally elide the m by a figure termed ecthlipsis, and also cut off the vowel prece- ding the m by another figure termed synalcepha : as, monstr' horrend' informe for monstrum horrendum informe, &C.1 Virg. Monstrum ftorrendum informe ingens cui lumen ademp- tum.
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. The older poets, or those prior to the Augustan age, frequently preserved the final m from elision, and made the preceding vowel short. Ennius. Insignita fere turn millia militum octo. Id. Dum quidem unus homo Roma tola superescit.
Lucil. Pr<Ktext<K ac tunicas, Lydorum opu1 sordidum omne. Vomerem atque loceis avertit seminis ictum. Nam quod jluvidum est, e levibus atque rotundis. Sed dum abest quod avemus, id exsuperare videtur.
Lucret.
Id.
Id.
OBS. 1. An instance of m being retained before a vowel occurs even in Horace (Sat., 2, 2, 28) :
Quam laudas, pluma ? cocto num adest honor idem ?
1. Consult remarks on Ecthlipsis and Synalcepha, among "Figures of Prosody." — In strictness, no grammatical figure, such as ecthlipsis (lic- BTu^ig, i. e., "a dashing out"), lakes place here, but the whole is a mere matter of pronunciation. The final m was never fully sounded among the Romans, as Priscian expressly remarks : " M obscurvm in extremitatc dic- tionum sonat." Quintilian also, who in one part calls m a "quasi mu- giens littera" (12, 10, 31), observes in another passage, "M littera, quo- ties ultima est, et vocalem verbi sequenlis ila contingit ut in earn transire posxit, etiamsi scribitur tamen parum exprimitur, ut multum ille, et quan- tum erat ; adeo vt pane cujusdam nova littera sonum reddat ; neque enim eximitur sed obscuratur, et tantum aliqua inter duas vocales velut nota. est tie ipsat coeant" (9, 4, 40). It would appear, therefore, that tho Romans did not^ive to such a syllable as om or nm a full labial sound, with a close compression of the lips, but uttered the m with a slight na- sal sound, such as the French give it, for example, in the word faim, and as the Portuguese enunciate it even in Latin words. It would seem that even in Hebrew the final mem was not very clearly enunciated ; at least, sin-h is the opinion of Gesenius (Hcb-. Grtimm. Anm., $78, 2 a)-
FINAL SYLLABLES. 85
OBS. 2. But the best and purest writers seem in general to have retained this practice only in words compounded of com (or con) and of circum ; as, comes, comedo, circumago, circumeo.
Ovid. Tu tibi dux comiti ; tu comes ipsa dud. (Pentam.) Juv. Luctantur paucas, comedunt coliphia paucae. Id. Quo le circumagas ? qua prima out ultima ponas. Stat. Circumeunt hilares, et ad alta cubilia ducunt.
FINAL n.
RULE. N final has the preceding vowel for the most part long, both in Latin words and in those of Greek origin ; as, non, en, ren, splen, Siren, Hymen, Pan, Titan, quin, stn,
&C.1
Virg. De grege non ausim quicquam deponere tecum.
Id, Dixerit, Hos calamos tibi dant (en accipe) Musts.
Ser. Et trita illinitur : vel splen apponitur haedi.
Catull. Hymen, O Hymentse ! Hymen, ades, O Hymenae !
Tibull. Lacte madens illic suberat Pan ilicis umbra.
Lucret. Flammiger an Titan ut alentes hauriat undas.
Ovid. Non potuit mea mens, qiiin esset grata, teneri.
Phaedr. Quern si leges, laetabor ; stn autem minus. (Iamb.)
To these add Greek accusatives in an from nominatives in as,2 and accusatives in en from nominatives in e or es ; as also all Greek genitives plural in on; as, jEnean, Tire-
1. Rarnsay gives the rule of n final as making the previous vowel short. We have thought it more advisable, however, to retain the old form of expression. — In Greek nouns, such as Siren, Hymen, &c., there is a long vowel, in the original, in the final syllable.
2. There is some doubt with regard to the accusative in an from short a in the nominative, bince some examples occur in which it is made long. In all of these, however, the syllable is in the arsis, and we may there- foie safely pronounce it to be naturally short. Thus, we have in Ovid (Trist., 2, 395), " Qui Icgis Electran et egentem mentis Orestem ;" and again (Met., 4, 756), " Protenus Andromcdan, et tanti pramia facti." But then, on the other hand, we have Ori/hyian (00., Met., 6, 707); Ossan (Property 2, 1, 19.— OB., Fast., 1, 307) ; Iphigenian (Ov., E. P., 3, 2, 62, &c. — Ramsay's Lai. Pros., p. 67). Consult Exc. 4 undet '.his rule.
H
86 FINAL SYLLABLES.
sian, Panelopen, Anchisen, Cimmerian, Chalybon, Meter*-
orphoseon, &c.'
Virg. Et stBvum jEncan, agnovit Turnus in armis.
Id. "Occurrit ; veterem Anchisen agnoscit amicum.
Catull. Jupiter ! ut Chalybon omne genus pereat ! (Pentam.)
Tibull. Cimmerian etiam obscuras accessit ad arces.
EXCEPTIONS. Exc. 1. An, forsan, forsitan, in, tamen, viden\ satin1,2 are
short.
Horat. Quis scit an adjiciant hodiernas crastina summtK. Virg. Mittite ; forsan et hcec olim meminisse juvabit. Id. Forsitan et Priami fuerint qua fata requiras.
Ovid. Ludit in humanis divina potentia rebus. Virg. Hie tamen ille urbem Patavi sedesque locavit. Tibull. Vota cadunt : viden', ut trepidantibus advolet alis ? Terent. Satin1 id est ? Nescio, hercle : tantum jussu1 sum. (Iambic.)
Exc. 2. Nouns in en, which increase short in inis in the genitive case, have the final syllable short in the nom- inative ; as, nomen (nominis), flumen (Jluminis), legmen (tegminis), augmen (augminis).
Ovid. Nomen Arionium Siculas impleverat urbes.
Virg. Casperiamque colunt, Forulos, et jlumen Himellte.
Id. Tegmen habent capiti ; vestigia nuda sinistri.
1. As the Greek genitive plural ends in uv, the Latin on formed from this is of course long. The later Latin poets, however, make errors al- most continually in words borrowed from the Greek, which in the latter language end in uv. Thus, we have in Prudentius (Perislcph., 2, 505) the following iambic dimeter : " Dum dttmon inviclum dei," where the on in dcEinon is erroneously shortened, the Greek form being Saipuv. So, again, in the same writer (Psyehom., 857), the following hexameter oc- curs : " Hie chalcedon Tubes perfunditur ex hyacinthi," where chalcedon has the final syllable short, although the Greek form is xa/.Ktjdur.
2. Viden" is a colloquial form of vidlsne, and the change of quantity is supposed to have resulted from the former being employed as a short interrogation. So talW for satisnc is of very frequent occurrence in tho ••omir writers. (Ramsay's Lot. Pra . p. 61.)
FINAL SYLLABLES. 87
Exc. 3. The final syllable on is short in the singular cases of Greek nouns, which have those cases written in the original with an omicron or short o ,• as, nom- inative, Ilion, Erotion, Pelion ; accusative, Cerberon, Menelaon, Rhodon.
Ovid. Ilion et Tenedos, Simo'isque et Xanthus, et Ide. Mart. Pallida nee nigras horrescat Erotion umbras. Ovid. Cerberon abstraxit, rabida qui percitus ira. Id. Tu fore tarn lentum credis Menelaon in armis? Horat. Laudabunt alii claram Rhodon, out Mytilenen.
But Greek accusatives in on, of the Attic dialect, havir g an omega or long 0, in the original, are long ; as, Athon, Androgeon, Peneleon, Demoleon.
Exc. 4. Greek accusatives in an, of the feminine gender, are also short ; as, Maidn, Iphigenidn, Orithyian.1 Ovid. Maidn et Electram Taygetamque Jovi. (Pent.) Id. Nescio quam dicunt Iphigenian iter. (Ditto.) Id. Orithyian amansfulvis amplectitur alis,
Exc. 5. Greek accusatives in in and yn are likewise
short ; as, Thyrsln, Daphnin, Pann, Tketm, Ityn. Propert. Thyrsin et attritis Daphnin arundinibus. (Pentam.) Ovid. Tantaque nox animi est, Ityn hue arcessite, dixit.
FINAL r.
RULE. R final has the preceding vowel for the most part short ; as, calcdr, audiar, oleaster, iter, glorier, color, robur, caditur.
Ovid. Crescit, et immensum gloria calcdr habet. (Pentam.) Id. Trans ego tellurem, trans latas audidr undas Virg. Infelix super at foliis oleaster amaris. Id. Angustum formica terens iter, et bibit ingens. Ovid. Fratre magis, dubito, glorier, anne vtro. (Pentam.)
\. Consult note 2, page 85.
88 FINAL SYLLABLES.
Virg. Sen plures color Hie vias et caeca relaxat.
Id. Vomis et inflexi primum grave robur aratri.
Id. Casditur et tilia ante jugo levis altaque fagus.
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. Cur is long, and also Ndr,far,fur, and ver.1 Horat. Malta quidem dixi, cur excusatus abirem. Virg. Sulfurea Ndr albus aqua, fontesque Vdini. Ovid, Far erat, et puri lucida mica salis. (Pentam.j Mart. Callidus effracta numos fur auff.ret area. Ovid. Et ver auctumno, brumae miscebitur cestas.
Exc. 2. Greek nouns in er, which in the original end in TIP, and which increase in the genitive, have the final syllable of the nominative long ; as, aer (afjp, depog), (Ether (aiOrip, aWepog), crater (Kparrjp, Kparrjpog), &c. But pater and mater (narrip, rcarpog ; ^rjTrjp, jtw/rpdf) have the final syllable short.
Lucret. Inde mare, inde acr, inde (ether ignifer ipse.
Ovid. Summus inaurato crater erat asper acantho.
Virg. Est, mihi namque domi pater, est injusta noverca
Id. Non jam mater alit tellus viresque ministrat
OBS. Hector, Nestor, and Castor, however, though com- ing from "Earcop, Nearwp, and Kdffrwp, have the final syl- lable shott.
Ovid. Hector erat : turn colla jugo candentia pressos.
Id. Cum sic Nestor ait, vestro fuit unicus asvo.
Horat. Infamis Helena Castor offensus vice. (Iambic.)
Exc. 3. Iber is long, but Celtiber has the final syllable long in Catullus and short in Martial.
1. Cur is merely a contraction from quur, and consequently long. (Priscian, vol. 1, p. 45, ed. Krchl.) — Fir apparently gets its long quan- tity from the Greek (j>up. — Far, if we may judge from its genitive /arm, was originally written fdrr, being long by position. — Ver is from the Greek fjp (a contraction from lap) with the digamma prefixed.
FINAL SYLLABLES. 89
Lucan. Si tibi durus Iber, aut si tibi terga dedissct. Catull. Nunc Ccltiber es : Celtiberia in terra. (Scazon.) Mart. Ducit ad auriferas quod me Salo Celtiber oras.
OBS. 1. Par and lar are usually accounted long ; and so, indeed, they are found, the former very frequently, the lat- ter in one instance in Ovid (Fast., 5, 141) ; but it would sf em more consistent with accuracy to call them common.1
OBS. 2. The quantity of cor has also been made a matter ' of dispute. The best opinion, however, is in favour of its being accounted short.2
FINAL as.
RULE. Final as is long ; as, terras, tempestas, tractas, veniebds.3
Virg. Turbabat cceZo, nunc terras ordine longo. Id. Forte sua Libycis tempestas appulit oris. Horat. Tractas et incedis per ignes. (Iambic.) Ovid. Dure quid ad miseros veniebas exults annos.
1. The reasons that have been assigned in support of this latter opin- ion are as follows: 1. Par and lar increase short; and all other nouns in ar, which have a short increment, have the final syllable short. — 2. Even those which from are (with the a long) are reduced by apocope to ar, have the ar short ; as, calcar, pulvindr, torcular. — 3. Valerius Pro- bus says, " Nominations singularis, R litera finilns, omni genere .... brevem habet." (Putsch, Gram. Lat., col. 1393) ; and Servius (ad &n., 3, 91) remarks, " Omnia monosyllaba ad artem non pertinent." — 4. The compounds of par are found short in Prudentius (In Symm., 8, 5), Avienus (Fab., 23, 8), and Martianus Capella (6, 55), whose author- ity (though not sufficient to outweigh that of earlier writers) may be al- lowed to have some weight in a doubtful or probable case, when sup- ported by reason and analogy. (Carerfs Lat. Pros., p. 140, 3d cd.)
2. It is shortened, for example, by Cicero (Tusc. Quasi., 3, 26), by Ovid (Trisl., 5, 8.—Ep. ex Pont., 1, 3, 32.— Met., 5, 384), by Mar- tial (10, 15), and by Paulinus (tie Cels. Ob., 379). In opposition to all these authorities, the following line has been cited from Ovid (Her., 15, 79) : " Molle meum levibus cor est violabile telis." Burmann, however, conjectures, " Molle mihi levibusque cor cst violabile telis ;" and a Frank- fort MS. has " Molle meum levibus'que," &c.
3. In terras, and other accusatives plural of ttie first declension, as is long because contracted from acs. — In nominatives like tempestas, it is long because the old form was tempcstdls. — In tractas arid tie like, it is long because contracted from ais.
H 2
90 ' FINAL SYLLABLES.
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. Anas, "a duck," has the final syllable short. Petron. Et pictus anas enotata pennis. (Phalaecian.)1
Exc. 2. Final as is short in the nominative of Greek noun i which form their genitive singular in dos (or in the Latin dis) ; as, Areas, genitive Arcados or Ar cadis ; Pallas, genitive Pallados or Palladis.
Mart. Cum quibus Alcides, et pius Areas erat. (Pentam.) Ovid. Bellica Pallas adest, et protegit agide fratrem.
OBS. But Pallas,- genitive Pallantis, Calchds, genitive Calchantis, and the like, follow the general rule, and have xs long.
Virg. Tela manusque sinit : Hinc Pallas instat et urget.
Ovid. Quam postquam reddit Calchds ope tutus Achillis.
Exc. 3. Final as is also short in Greek accusatives plural of the third declension ; as, herods, lampadds, delphinds. Virg. Permistos herods, et ipse videbitur illis. Tibull. Accendit geminas lampadds acer Amor. (Pent.) Virg. Orpheus in sylvis, inter delphinds Arion.
FINAL 6S.
RULE. Final es is long ; as, spes, noctes, vides, pones* Ovid. Una tamen spes est, qua me soletur in istis.
1. This line occurs in Petronius Arbiter (c. 93, 4), but B-jrmann con- jectures avis for anas.
2. Ennius furnishes one instance of the Latin plural es being short, in the following line : " Virgin? nam sibi quisque domi Romanus habct sas" (Enn., Fragm., p. 32, ed. Column.). Cicero is said to give another in a fragment of his poetical version of Aratus (v. 472) : " Obruitur Pro- cyon ; emergunt allies vna ;" but Ernesti reads, " Obruitur Procyon ; emergunt alite lapsu," &c. The common text of Ovid (Her., 10, 86) also contains a reading which exhibits cs in the accusative plural short : " Quis scit an hccc sactas insula tigrcs habet." Burmann, however, gives the line as follows : " Quis scit, an Jute sitras tigridas insula ha- bct J"1 and observes, "Duo sunt qua- in hoc tcrsu offendu.nl. Prirno, quod Latinc haud dicitur, Quis scit an habet, sed an habeat. Dcindt quod posleriorem in tigres corripit." (Burmann ad OP., /. c.)
FINAL SYLLABLES. 91
Virg. Nodes atque dies patet atri janua Ditis.
Properl Hoc quodcunque vides, hospes, quam maxima Roma.
Horat. Pones iambis sivejlamma. (Iambic.)
EXCEPTIONS.
<2 -ij Exc. 1 . Nouns in es of the third declension, Avhich in- crease short in the genitive, have es in the nominative short ; as, hospes, caspes, ales, miles, praspes, &c. (in the genitive hospttis, c&spitis, atttis, militis,' prcepetis).
Ovid. Vivitur ex rapto : non hospes ab hospite tutus.
Rutil. Exiguus regum rectores casspes habebat.
Virg. Namque volans rubrafulvus Jovis ales in athra.
Id. Myrmidonum Dolopumve out duri miles Ulixi.
Id. Acer, anlielanti similis, quern prcepes ab Ida.
, OBS. But aries, abies, paries, and Ceres, as also pes, with
its compounds, follow the general rule.
Virg. Creditur : ipse aries etiam nunc vellera siccat.
Id. Populus influviis, abies in montibus altis.
Horat. Votiva paries indicat uvida. (Choriambic.)
Virg. Flava Ceres alto nequidquam spectat Olympo
Manil. Desuper Auriga dexter pes imminet astro.
Horat. Omnia magna loquens : modo sit mihi mensa tripes et.
Virg. Stat sonipes, acfrenaferox spumantia mandit.
Id. Tollit se arrectum quadrupes, et calcibus auras.
Exc. 2. Es, in the present tense of the verb sum, is short, together with its compounds poles, abes, ades, obes, prodes, &C.1
1. In many passages of Plautus, an enumeration of most of which may be found in \Vasse (cap. 16, p. 226, seqq.), es from sum occurs with a long quantity. These passages are too numerous to permit our supposing the syllable lengthened by a mere license, or by the force of the arsis, and it is therefore probable that, in the time of Plautus, es from sum, corresponding as it did to the Greek elf, was actually long, and was only shortened at a subsequent period. S''ch, at least, is the opinion of Schneider (Gr. Lat., vol. 2, p. 757.) — According to Vossius, es, " thou eatest," til i second person of edo, is long, being contracted,
92 FINAL SYLLABLES.
Virg. Quisquis es, amissos hinc jam obliriscere Grows
Id. TV poles unanimcs armare in prazlia fratres.
Id. Tuque ades inceptumque una decurre laborem.
Exc. 3. The preposition penes has the final syllable short. Horat. Quern penes arbitrium est, et jus, st norma loqucndi, Ovid. Me penes est unum vasti custodia mundi.
•
Exc. 4. Es is likewise short in Greek neuters ; as, ca- coethes, hippomenes, <tc. ; and in Greek nominatives and vocatives plural of the third declension, from nouns which increase in the genitive singular, but which do not form that case in cos ; as, Tritones, Arcades, Tre- es, Amazones, Troades, &C.1
Juv. Scribendi cacoethes, et <Rgro in corde senescit
Stat. Armigeri Tritones eunt, scopulosaque cete.
Virg. Ambo florentes aztatibus, Arcades ambo.
Id. Pulsant, ct pictis bellantvr Amazones armis.
OBS. 1. But nominatives and vocatives plural in es, from Greek nominatives forming the genitive singular in eos, are long ; as, h&reses, crises, phrases, metamorphoses* &c.
OBS. 2. Where the Latin es represents the Greek 770, it is of course long ; as in Alcides, Brontes, Palamedes, from
FINAL is AND yS.
RULE. Final t* and ys are short ; as, dulcis, lapis, Ks, amabis. bibis, Thetis, Tethys, Itys, Capys? Horat. Dulcis ineocpertis cultura potentis amid. Tibull. Fac lapis his scriptus stet super ossa notis. (Pent.)
probably, from cdis. (Voss., de Art. Gramm., 2, 31.) Carey opposes this, but on weak grounds.
1. Es here answers to the Greek er. and is short, as a matter of course.
2. Because cs here answers to the Greek tif.
3. Final ys corresponds to the Greek vj-, which is for the most put ebon.
FINAL SYLLABLES.
93
Lucan. Ante Ms exactum quam Cynthia conderet orbem. Mart. Et bibis immundam, cum cane,pronus aquam. (Pent.) Ovid. Tethys et extremo satpe recepta loco est. (Pentarn.) Virg. At Capys, et quorum melior sententia menti.
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. All plural cases ending in is have that syllable long ; as, Musis, terns, nobis, vobis, illls, amaris.1
Mart. Carmina quod scribis, Musis et Apolline nullo. Lucret. Secernunt, calumque a terris omne retentant.
Nobis est ratio, solis lunaque meatus.
Abstuht omne Phaon quod vobis ante placebat.
Pinguia concipiunt, sive illis omne per ignem.
Strymonieeque grues, et amaris intuba Jibris.
Exc. 2. Final is is long in the second person singular of verbs of the fourth conjugation ; as, sentis, fastidis, au- dis ; to which add /is, from^zo.2
Horat. Sentis, ac veluti stet volucris dies. (Choriambic.)
Id. Pocula, num esuriens fastidis omnia prater.
Propert. Non audis ? et verba sinis mea ludere, cum jam.
Horat. Lenior ac melior fis, accedente senecta?
Exc. 3. Glis, vis whether noun or verb ; veils and sis* with their compounds, as quamvis, notis, mails, adsis.
possis* have the final is long.
1. Plural cases in is were anciently written with the diphthong ei; as, Museis, terreis, &c.
2. The syllable is in verbs of the fourth conjugation is the result of contraction, and therefore long. Thus, we have audits, contracted au- dis ; sentiis. sentis, &c.
3. Sis is formed by contraction from ties. The old forms siem, tia, net, occur frequently in Plautus.
4. In Juvenal (5, 10) some read possis with the final syllable short. Ruperti, however, condemns this reading, and substitutes possit. So in Ovid (Her., 12, 71), nescis is said to occur with the final syllable short, but erroneously. It appears neither in the edition of Heinsius nor in that of Burmann. The latter merely mentions it in a note, as a reading which is in direct violation of the metre.
94 FINAL SYLLABLES.
Mart. HOEC tibi si vis est, si mentis tanta potestas.
Id. Bellas homo et magnus, vis idem, Cotta, vidert.
Id. Esse veils oro serus conviva Tonantis.
Horat. Cum sis, et prove scctum stomacheris ob unguerrn.
Propert. Quamvls tile sua lassus requiescat avena.
Juv. Et cut per mediam nolis occurrere noctem.
Horat. Magnas Grdcorum malts implere catervas.
Virg. Adsts, O Tegeae, favens ; oleasque Minerva.
Horat. Non possts oculis quantum contendere Lynceus.
Exc. 4. The adverbs forts, gratis, and ingrafts have the
final syllable long.1
Horat. Ne biberis diluta, forts est promus et atrum. Phaedr. Gratis anhelans, multa agenda nil agens. (Iambic.) Lucret. Effugere hand potis est, ingrafts hasret et angit.
Exc. 5. Final is is long in those nouns which form their genitive singular in entis, mis, or ttis, with the penult long ; as, Simols (gen. Simoenlis), Salamts (gen. Sal amlnis), Samnts (gen. Samnltis), Us (gen. lltis). Ovid. Hoc that Simols; h<ec est Sige'ia tellus. Lucil. Samnls in ludo ac rudibus causis satis asper
Exc. 6. The final syllable ris, in the second future of the indicative and perfect subjunctive, is common ; as, amaveris or amaverts.2
Exc. 7. Final ys is long in such contracted plurals as Erinnys for Erinnyes or Erinnyas. The following line of Seneca (CEdip., 644) shows the use of the
1. Forts is in reality the ablative of fora, " a door," the same asforis of the third declension. Gratis and ingrafts are contracted datives for gratiis and ingratiis, which are found in the open form in the comic writers.
2. Almost all the examples in which it is found long are in the arsis ; but there is at least one instance in Horace which cannot be explained upon this principle : " Si ture placans et horna" (Od., 3, 23, 3). — A numerous list of instances where ris occurs, either with the long or short quantity, may be seen in Ramsay's Lot. Pros., p. 77.
FINAL SYLLABLES. 95
word, though it cannot be made any proof of the quan- tity:
Et mecum Erinnys pronubas thalami traham.
FINAL OS.
RULE. Final os is long ; as, viros, pueros, custds, ventos, jactatos.
Virg. Inter se cofisse viros, et cernere ferro.
Propert. Differat inpueros ista tropeea suos. (Pentam.)
Horat. Gustos amatorem trecento. (Iambic.)
Virg. Ventos et varium caeli praediscere morem.
Id. His accensa super, jactatos aquore toto.
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. Final os is short in compos, impos, os (" a bone"), and its compound exos.
Ovid. Insequere, et voti postmodo compos eris. (Pent.) Lucret. Exos et exsanguis tumidos perfluctuat artus.
Exc. 2. Final os is likewise short in Greek words, writ- ten in the original with an omicron or short o ; as, Ili- os, Tyros, Samos, Chios, Rhodos, epos.1 Ovid. Turn cum tristis erat, dcfensa est Ilios armis. Lucan. Et Tyros instabilis, pretiosaque murice Sidon. Horat. Romas laudetur Samos et Chios, et Rhodos absens. Id. Facta canit, pede ter percusso, forte epos acer.
FINAL US.
RULE. Final us .s short ; as, taurus, tempus, cultus, im- probus, solibus, scindimus, intus. Virg. Taurus, et adverse cedens Canis occidit astro. Id. Tempus humo tegere, et jamdudum incumbere aratris. Id. Conveniat, quae euro bourn, qui cultus habendo. Id. Improbus, et duris urgens in rebus egestas.
\. But those words in which the Latin os represents the Greek wf re tain their original quantity ; as, herds (f/put)> Minds (M» «f), &» .
96 FINAL SYLLABLES.
Virg. Pulverulenta coquat maturis solibus astas.
Id. At prius ignotum ferro quam scindimus aquor
Id. Intus aquas dulces, vivoque sedilia saxo.
EXCEPTIONS.
Exc. 1. Monosyllables in us are long ; as, jus, plus, pus,
thus.1
Pedo. Sed rigidumjus est et inevilabile mortis. Mart. Emi hortos ; plus est : ins true tu ; minus ?st (Pent.) Horat. Proscripti Regis Rupili pus atque vencnum. Id. Angulus ille feret piper et thus ocius uva.
Exc. 2. Final us is long in nouns which increase with long « in the genitive ; as, virtus (gen. virtutis), tellus (felluris), servitus (servilutis), palus (paludis).2
Horat. Virtus indigno non committenda poetaB.
Prise. Divitias magnas hie tellus ipsa ministrat.
Phaedr. Brevi docebo. Servitus obnoxia. (Iambic.)
Virg. Cocyti, tardaque palus inamabilis undo.
Exc. 3. Final us is also long in the genitive singular, and in the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural, of the fourth declension ; as, genitive sing., manus ; nom., accus., and voc. plural, manus. But nominative and vocative singular, manus.3
Pedo. Scilicet immunis si luctus unafuisset.
Lucret. Sensus ante ipsam genitam naturam animantis.
Virg. Saltus et saturi petito longinqua Tarcnti.
Exc. 4. Final us is also long in words transplanted from
1. This exception and the one immediately following belong in strict- ness to the same head, namely, that of a long increment in the genitive.
2. Horace (Ep. ad Pis., 65) furnishes a solitary instance of pulus with the final syllable short. Bentley proposes a different reading. The line, however, is retained unaltered in the best editions. — (For some re- marks on the verse, consult Horat., cd. Anth.. p. 326, not. crit.)
3. In the genitive singular of the fourth declension the final us is 4 contraction from uis ; and in the nominative, accusative, and vocatiwe plural from ucs. Both, therefore, are long, of course.
FINAL SYLLABLE OP A VERSE. 97
the Greek, in which us represents the Greek ov$t whatever the case may be ; as, Panthus (JlavfloDc), Amathus ('Ajwaflovf), Mantus (Mavrovf), Didus (At- rfovc), &c.
Virg. Panthus, Othryades, arcis Phcebique sacerdos.
Id. Est Amathus, est celsa mihi Paphos, atque Cythera.
Id. Fatidical Mantus et Tuscifilius amnis.
Varro. Didus atque suum misceri sanguine sanguen.
OBS. 1. Polypus has the final syllable short in Horace (Epod., 12, 5), which it gets, not from the common Greek form TroAvTTOff, but from the Doric TrwAvTrof, which will account also for the lengthening of the initial syllable.1
OBS. 2. The sacred name IESUS (in Greek IHSOT2) is included in this exception, and has the final syllable long.
SECTION XXIV.
FINAL SYLLABLE OF A VERSE.
The final syllable of every verse (except the Anapaestic and Ionic a minore) may be either long or short, at the op- tion of the poet ; that is, a long syllable may be used to close a verse, though the measure require one that is short ; or a short syllable may be used, though the measure re- quire one that is long. Thus, in the first of the following lines, the long syllable r& is made to stand in place of a short ; and, in the second, the short syllable que stands in lieu of a long.
Horat. Jam satis terris nims atque dir&. (Sapphic.) Virg. Nesaee, Spioque, Thaliaque, Cymodoceque.
1. Athenaeus (7, 107) quotes the following line from Epicharmus, where the Doric form occurs : HuXvTrol re, GTjmai. TE, KOL iroravai reu- 0('r5cf ; and another from Archestratus : Hul.VTroi Iv re Quay icai Kapia elalv upiffToi. He then goes on to remark, Aupieif d' avrbv 6ia TOV u KakoiJci: TTw/lvTrov, wf 'ETTi^ap/tof KOI ^i/nuvl6r]f 6' £(j>tj' ,,TTU%,VTTOV iitfifievoc." 'Arrt/coi 6e Trohvirovv. (Athcn., 7. — -'vol. 3, p. 169, ed. Sckweigk.) So the Greeks used both Oidixove, -o<5of, and Oidiirof, -OR
I
98 THE QUANTITY OF THE PENULT OF WORDS.
OBS. 1 . The principle on which the above rule depends is not that the syllable in question undergoes, any actual change of quantity, but simply, that, by reason of its posi- tion at the end of the line, and the interruption which the metre there sustains, the same strictness is not required as in other syllables differently situated ; and hence the real quantity of the syllable becomes so comparatively unimpor- tant, that the poet has the license of which we are treating allowed him.1
OBS. 2. The exceptions in the case of jhe Anapaestic and Ionic a minore measures will be explained when we come to treat of those two kinds of verse.
SECTION XXV.
REMARKS ON THE QUANTITY OF THE PENULT OF WORDS.
I. Patronymics in ides or ades usually shorten the penult; as, Priamides, Atlantiades, &c. Unless they come from nouns in eus ; as, Pelides, Tydldes, &c.2
1. Compare the remarks of Hermann': " Quum in numeris tempora omnia certa cssc ac dejinita dcbeant, facile intelligitur, in numeris ipsis nihil tisquam posse anceps esse; itaque si qua inveniuntur ancipitet syllaba, i. e., qua breves sint quum longa esse debeant, vel longa quum dcbeant breves esse, cas, quod ad numerum attinel, pro talibus numerari, quales debeant esse, etsi non sint tales. Id auiem nemo non videt sic tanlum fieri posse, si qui sirU in numeris loci in quibus pravitas ista mensura nihil out parum offcnsionis habcat. Hujus modi loci duo sunt. Unus est in Anacrusi ex una brevi syllaba. Alter est in fine ordinis, ubi, quoniam nihil scquitur, quod tcrminum ponat ccrtum, ac potiut pausa quadam succedit, paritcr delitescit mensura pravitas. Unde vel brevis syllaba longa locum tcnerc potcst, vel longa pro brevi esse." (Herm., Elem. Doctr., 1, 9.)
2. In a paper on " Greek patronymics" (published in the European Magazine for August, 1817), Dr. Carey, in remarking on the patronym- ics 'Arpe«5»7f. Hnfaidr/c., &c., and their corresponding Latin forms (which he writes with ei instead of the long t alone, as), Atreidcs, Pe- leides, observes, " I conceive, that wherever, in Greek or Latin poetry, we find one of those patronymics in such a position as to allow the alter- native of one long syllable or two short, we are, if not bound, at least authorized, to pronounce the ei as two distinct syllables; thus producing, in each of the following instances, a dactyl instead of the spondee, which results from the ordinary mode of pronunciation ; ex. gr.,
THE QUANTITY OF THE PENULT OF WORDS. 99
II. Patronymics and similar words in ais, eis, itis, ois, otis, ine, and one, commonly lengthen the penult ; as, Achd~ is, Ptolemais, Chryseis, jEne'is, Memphitis, Latois, Icario~ tis, Nerine, Arisione. Except Thebais and Phocais ; and Nereis, which is common.
III. Adjectives in acus, icus, idus, and imus for the most part shorten the penult ; as, jfEgyptiacus, academicus, lepi- dus, legitimus ; also superlatives, as fort issimus, &c. Ex- cept opacus, amicus, apricus, pudicus, mendicus, posticus, fi- dus,infidus (bat perfidus, of per and fides, is short), bimus, quadrimus, patrlmus, matrimus, opimus ; and two superla- tives, Imus, primus. . ,
IV. Adjectives in emus have the penult long ; as, postre- mus.
V. Adjectives in alis, anus, arus, irus, ivus, orus, osus, vdus, urus, and utus, lengthen the penult ; as, dotdlis, ur- bdnus, avarus, delirus, oBstivus, decorus, formosus, percrudus, edurus, astutus. Except barbarus, opiparus.
VI. Adjectives in His, if derived from verbs, shorten the penult; as, agilis, facilis, habilis, &c. But derivatives from nouns usually lengthen it ; as, anilis, civllis, herllis, &c. To these add exilis, subtilis ; and names of months ; as, Apri- lis, Quinctllis, Sextilis : except huniilis, parilis, and also similis. But all adjectives in atilis are short ; as, versati- lis, volafilis, umbratilis, &c.
VII. Adjectives in inus, derived from inanimate things,
re, aval- avdpuv, ttal dl Atreidas, Priamumque, et s&vum ambobus Achillem.
Thus also, instead of spondaic lines in the following instances (Iliad, 2. 9, and 17. 191),
'Aya/ie/wovof 'Ar Oi Trport uffTV <j>£pov K^MTO. revx
•
we should have verses of the regular form, with the dactyl in the fifth place ; and the same remark applies to Hri?.eiuva, which often occurs in the Iliad, and to various other patronymics, which it is not here neces- sary to enumerate."
100 THE QUANTITY OF THE PENULT OF WORDS.
as plants, trees, stones, &c. ; from adverbs of time, or from substantives denoting the four seasons of the year, shorten the penult ; as, amaracinus, crocinus, hyacintKinus ; cedrinus,faginus, oleag inus ; adamanimus, crystalltnus, sma- ragdtnus ; crastlnus, diutinus, serotinus ; earinus, oponnus, chimcrinus, therinus ; also annotinus, hornotlnus. To which add bombycinus, clephantmits, which seem to refer rather to the silk and ivory than to the animals themselves.
VIII. Adjectives in inns, derived from living things, numeral distributives, proper names, and gentile nouns, lengthen the penult ; as, agninus, caninus, leporinus ; binus, trinus, quinus ; Albinus, Cralinus,jjTustinus ; Alexandrlnus, Latinus, Venusinus, &c. To which add adjectives of place ; as, coltinus, marinus, vicinus ; and those derived from nouns denoting time ; as, matutlnus, vespertinus ; to- gether with all other adjectives in inus not included in the preceding rule : as,festlnus, libcrtlnus, inopinus,peregrinus, suplnus, &c.
IX. Diminutives in olus, ola, olum, and ulus, ula, ulum, always shorten the penult; as, urceolus,filiola, mustcolum ; lectulus, ratiuncula, corculum, &c.
X. Adverbs in tim lengthen the penult ; as, oppidatim, viritim, tributim. Except affatim, perpetim, and statim.1
XI. Desideratives in urio shorten the antepenultima, which in the second or third person is the penult ; as, esu- rio, esuris, esurit. But other verbs in urio lengthen syllable ; as, ligurio, liguris ; scaturio, scaturis.
1. But statim, signifying "on Ike »pot," "steadily," "constantly," has the penult long. It occurs in Plautus (Amph., 1, 1, 84 ; Ib., 120) and in Terence (Phorm., 5, 3, 7). It is said to be derived, in common with statim, from the same verb, sto.
FIGURES OF PROSODY. f 101
SECTION XXVI.
FIGURES OF PROSODY.
I. CjESURA.1
PART I.
I. The term Caesura is used in two different senses by prosodians ; first, with reference to whole verses, and, sec- ondly, as regards single feet.
II. In the former acceptation, it means the division of a verse into two portions or members, affording a short pause or rest for the voice in some convenient part, where that pause may take place without injury to the sense or to the harmony of the line ; as,
Virg. Tanta molis erat |] Romanam condere gentem. Id. Errabant actifatis 1| maria omnia circum.
III. In this sense, however, it is usually, for distinction* sake, sty led* the Caesural Pause, and is chiefly connected with the consideration of hexameter verse. It will there- fore be treated of more at large under that head.
IV. In its application to single feet, the caesura means the division or separation which takes place in a foot, on account of the syllables which compose that foot belonging to different words ; as,
Virg. Pasto\res ovi\um tener\os de\pellere \ foetus.
In this verse the caesura, in its second acceptation, occurs three times, viz., in the second foot, between res and ovi ; in the third, between um and lener ; and in the fourth, be- tween os and de.2
V. There are three kinds of caesura in its second accep-
1. Casura, "a cutting off" '(in Greek ro/z??), from cado, "to cut."
2. Some give the name Caesura to the syllable that remains after the completion of a fool ; as, res, um, and os, in the line given in the text. The best prosodians, however, consider it more accurate to confine the term to the separation or division which takes place in a foot, and to call the residuary long syllable simply a long syllable, or a semifoot.
I 2
102 • FIGURES OF PROSODY.
tation, namely, the Syllabic, the Trochaic, and the Mono* syllabic.
VI. The Syllabic Caesura is that in which the first part of the divided foot consists of the last syllable of a word ; as,
Virg. Sylves\lrem tenu\i mus\am medi\taris av\ena. Here the syllables trem (of sylvestrem), i (of tenui), and am (of musam), are instances of this species of caesura.
The Syllabic Caesura may take place in a heroic verse at what are technically called the triemimeris, penthemime- ris, hephlhemimeris, and sometimes at the ennehemimeris.1 Thus,
3 67
Virg. Si canilmus sylvlas sylv\as sint \ console \ dignas.
36 9
Id. Ille la\tus nive\um moll\i fult\us hya\cintho. Here the caesural syllables mus (of canimus) in the first line, and tus (of latus} in the second, are in the triemime- ris, or third half-foot of the line ; the syllables « (of sylvas) and urn (of niveum) are in the penthemimeris, or fifth half- foot ; the syllables <R (of sylvas) and i (of molli) are in the hephthemimeris, or seventh half-foot ; and the syllable us (oifultus} is in the ennehemimeris, or ninth half-foot.
VII. The Trochaic Caesura is that in which the first part of the divided foot consists either of a long and short sylla. ble, or, in other words, a trochee (~ "), remaining at the end of a word, or of an entire word composed of one long and one short syllable ; as,
Virg. Fortu\natus et \ tile de\os qui \ novit a\grestes.
I. These terms owe their origin to the practice, generally adopted by the old grammarians, of measuring lines by half-feet. Thus, the tricm- imcris is that portion of a verse (counted or measured from the beginning of a line) which contains three half-parts (rpetf, "three," f/fii, "half," and f^epif, "a part"), i. e., three half- feet, or a foot and a half (two short syllables being counted as one long). Again, the penthemimeris indi- cates Jive half-parts (TTEVTE, "fine" j/fii, and //ep/f), or two feet and a half ; the hephthcmimeris, seven half-parts (lirra, " seven," jjfu, and //c- plf) ; and the ennehemimeris nine half-parts (ewea, " nine," rjfii, and
FIGURES OP PROSODY. 103
Here natus in the second foot, illc in the third, and novit in the fifth, form each a trochee, and in each of these divis- ions of the line a trochaic caesura takes place.
The Trochaic Caesura may occur in either of the first five feet of a verse ; as,
Virg. Arma pro\cul curr\usque vir\um mi\ratur in\anes.
Id. Talia \ voce re\fert, o \ terque qua\terque be\ati. Two successive trochees, however, in the second and third feet must be avoided, since they give the verse a flippant and undignified air. Thus,
Ennius. Ergo ma\gisque ma\gisque vir\i nunc \ gloria \ claret. Propert. Et gravi\ora re\pendit in\iquis \ pensa qua\sillis. In the third and fourth they are nearly as disagreeable ;' as, Ennius. Prudent\em qui \ multa lo\quive ta\cereve \ posset. But two successive trochees may agreeably occur in the first and second feet ; as,
Virg. are ci\ere vir\os Mart\emque ac\cendere \ cantu. Or in the fourth and fifth ; as, Virg. Et glau\cas sali\ces casi\dmque cro\cumque ru\bentem.
VIII. The Monosyllabic Ceesura is that in which the first syllable of the divided foot is a monosyllable ; as,
Virg. Hie vir hie | est tibi | quern prc\mitti \ saepius \ audis.
IX. Of the three kinds of caesura which have been here enumerated, the syllabic seems to have been the principal one in Latin versification ; and but few harmonious lines can be found in which it is not introduced. Next in met- rical effect is the trochaic.
1. In Homer, however, we have two remarkable instances of the use of successive trochees in producing a beautiful onomatopoeia. Thus,
.U 6' uv\dvTa, KaT\uvTd, Kdp\avTu TE, \ 66x[ua \ r\ qlidov. — (H., 23, 116.)
tra ne6\ovSe Kv7<\ivd£To \ ^.aa? av\ai6^. — (Od., 11,598.)
The following striking passage may also be cited from Virgil (j£n., 1, 85): Una Eu\rusque Not\usque rufrnt cre\berque pro\cdlis.
104 FIGDRES OF PROSODY;
X. On the caesura depend, in a very great degree, the beauty and melody of a verse. While its presence serves to give au-itnat ion to the line, and, by connecting together the different words of which it is composed, imparts to it an air of gracefulness and ease, its absence, on the other hand, is marked by a total want of poetic harmony. A line in which the caesura is either wholly omitted, or in a great degree neglected, has, in fact, little to distinguish it from common prose, and can only be admitted into Latin poetry on occasions in which harmony is purposely avoid- ed, as in many of the neglected hexameters of Horace.
XI. The following lines may serve to show the uncouth- ness and inelegance attendant upon the neglect of the cae- sura.
Ennius. Sparsis \ hastis \ late \ campus \ splendet et \ hor-
ret.
Id. Disper\ge kostes \ distrahe \ diduc \ divide \ differ.
Propert. Non me \ moribus \ ilia sed \ kerbis \ improba \ vicit.
XII. A caesura, however, is not indispensably requisite in every foot of a verse. Although the most melodious lines are certainly those in which the caesura is frequently introduced, still a long uninterrupted series of them would have any other than a pleasing effect ; and therefore it be- comes advisable occasionally to omit the caesura in one or more of the feet, and in this way to produce an agreeable variety. — The following rules have been laid down on this subject, and deserve attention.
1. In the first foot of a verse the caesura may generally be omitted ; as,
Virg. Pauperis \ et tugur\i con\gestum \ cespite \ culmen.
2. In the second foot the caesura is often omitted ; but, wlren this omission takes place, the word which be- gins the foot is generally of sufficient length to com
FIGURES OF PROSODY. 105
plete it, and leave a caesural syllable in the next foot ;l as, Virg. Squamea \ convolv\ens sub\lato \ pectore \ terga.
3. The caesura is not so frequently omitted at the pen- themimeris as it is in the other feet ; and when it is omitted in the third it always occurs in the fourth, and generally in the second foot. When this omission of the caesura at the penthemimeris takes place, the third foot generally consists of the first two or three sylla- bles of a word, which is finished in the next foot ; as,
Virg. Jussa mor\i qua [ sorti\tus non \ pertulit \ ullos.
4. In the fourth foot the caesura is not necessary, if there be one at the penthemimeris ; as,
Virg. Pinguis et \ ingra\t(Z preme\retur | caseus \ urbi.
5. The syllabic and monosyllabic caesuras are seldom introduced after the fourth foot, but the trochaic often 'occurs at the ennehemimeris, and in most instances is conducive to the harmony of the line ; as,
Virg. S&pe le\vi somn\um sua\debit in\ire su\surro.
Id. Hinc al\ta sub \ rape can\et frond\ator ad \ auras.
6. When there is but one caesura in a verse, it is gener- ally in the third foot, sometimes in the fourth, but nev- er in the second ; as,
Virg. Quern mea \ carmini\bus meru\isset \ fistula \ caprum
7. In a pentameter verse, a syllabic caesura general!)
1. The frequent recurrence of the verb nescio as a dactyl, and of the prepositions inter and intra as spondees, forming the second foot, appears at first view inconsistent with this rule ; but, in reality, it is quite in accord- ance with it. It has been clearly ascertained that the preposition and its case were frequently pronounced with one accent as one word, and there is reason to suppose that nescio was often connected in a similar manner with the word which followed it. Thus, the words inter se were pro- nounced, and consequently regarded in versification, as though they were written intersc, and nescio quis as though written nescioquis. A similar connexion is not unusual in English words ; thus, some body is pronoun- ced somebody; no body, nobody; can not, cannot. (Bradley's Lot. Pros., p. 49.;
106 FIGURES OF PROSODY.
takes place at the penthemimeris, and a trochaic in the foot preceding the final syllable in the second hem- istich or half-verse ; as,
Ovid. Nee quere\rer tard\os || ire re\licta di\es. Id. Nil mihi \ rescriblas, U attamen | ipse ve\ni.
8. There is sometimes a monosyllabic caesura at the penthemimeris of a pentameter, when the preceding word is a monosyllable ; as,
Ovid. Magna tam\en spe.s \ est || in bonit\ate de\i.
9. The trochaic caesura is sometimes neglected in the foot preceding the final syllable of a pentameter, and the verse is concluded by a word of four or more syl- lables ; as,
Ovid. Lis est \ cumform\a || magna pu\diciti\ae.
C JE s u R A.
PABT II.
f I. A syllable naturally short is occasionally lengthened
• when it is caesural.1 This, however, takes place chiefly in
hexameter verse, and more sparingly in elegiac and lyric
versification. Thus, in hexameters we have, among other
instances, the following :
Virg. Pectori\bus inhi\ans spir\antia \ consulit \ exta. Id. Emicat \ Eurya\lus et \ muncre \ victor a\mici. Horat. Cum gravi\us dors\o subi\it onus. \ Incipit \ ille.
Virg. Graius hom\o infect\os linq\uens profu\gus hymen\teos.
•
1. In ordinary language we ascribe this to the force of the casura ; but the true principle on which the rule depends is simply this ; that the pressure of the voice is exerted on the syllables in question, and produ- ces the same effect as if they were pronounced with double length. The stress of the voice in dactylic versification always falls, it must be re- membered, on the first part of the foot. This part is called the arsis (apfftf), or " elevation," the tone of the voice being here somewhat ele- vated ; while the remaining portion is termed the thesis (-diais ), or " de- pression," the voice being in this part of the foot comparatively depress- ed.— (Compare the remarks of Maltby on the JUus Mctricus, ch. 3, p. xii. — Lex. Pros.)
FIGURES OF PROSODY. 107
In the second line of the elegiac distich we have the fol- lowing :
Tibull. Quicquid ag\at sang\uis \\ est tamen \ ille tu\us. Propert. Vinceris \ out vin\cis || h&c in am\ore rot\a est. Ovid. In liquid\Km redi\lt \\ csthera | Mortis eq\uis. In lyrics the following occur :
Horat. Si nan \ peri\ret || immisera\bilis.
Id. Caeca tim\et ali\unde \ fata.
Id. Perru\pit Acheront\a Herculeus \ labor.
Id. Sifygit adamant\inos.
Id. Angu\lus ri\de( ubi \ non Hym\etto. II. Instances even occur in which, on account of the in- fluence of the caesura (to adopt the common phraseology), the final m remains unelided before a vowel in the begin- ning of the word following, and forms, with its own prece- ding vowel, a long syllable. The following are among the number :
Propert. O me \ feli\cem ! O \ nox mihi \ Candida et \ O tu. Tibull. Et tant\um vene\ratur vir\um hunc | sedula \ curet. Luc. Scit non \ esse cas\am. O \ vitas \ tuta fa\cultas. Manil. Emerit\us ccel\um et \ Claudia \ magna pro\pago.
II. ELISION.
Elision is the cutting off of the final vowel or diphthong, or of the two final letters, of a word, and is divided into Synalapha and Ecthlipsis.
SYNALCEPHA.
. I. Synaloepha is the elision of a vowel or diphthong at "I the end of a word, when the following word begins with a vowel, a diphthong, or the letter h ;l as,
1. Quintilian applies the term Synalcepha, in one place (1, 5, 18), to what is commonly called Synaresis ; as, Phatlion for Phaethon: and in another (9, 4, 36), to what is usually styled Ecthlipsis ; as, Prcesidi1 est for Presidium est. As a general definition, however, he terms owak-
108 FIGURES OF PROSODY.
Virg. Conticuere omnes, intentique ora tenebant. Id. Dardanidae e muris : spes addita suscitat iras. Id. SCBVUS ubi si£acid<K telo jacet Hector, ubi ingens. Id. Humida solstitia atque hy ernes orate Serenas. Which lines, in scanning, are read as follows :
Conticuer* omnes, intentiqu1 ora tenebant.
Dardanid" e muris : spes addita suscitat iras.
Scevus ub"1 JEacidas telo jacet Hector, ubj ingens.
Humida solstiti1 atqu1 yemes orate Serenas.
This, however, is done only in scanning, and not in wri- ting, nor in the most approved mode of pronouncing a verse. In the two latter cases, the lines are always writ- ten, and generally pronounced, without any elision.1
II. Synaloepha affects not only a single syllable, but also two syllables sounded as one by synaeresis ; as,
Virg. Stellio ; et lucifugis congesta cubilia blattis. Catull. Et earum omnia adirem furibunda latibula. Gal.
Here, in the first line, stellio et is pronounced slell yet; and, in the second, omnia adirem becomes omn yadirem.
III. In addition to the elisions already mentioned, the earlier Latin poets were in the habit of frequently eliding the letter s, in words ending in is and us, when followed by a word beginning with a consonant, and thus permitting the vowel, which would otherwise have been long by posi- tion, to remain short ;2 thus,
oi$ai " coeuntcs literal (9, 4, 36). — The word Synalcepha is from the Greek ffvval.oidij, and, according to its etymology, refers, not so much to the elision of one vowel before another, as»to the blending of two vowels or syllables into one. On this account, some have considered the term Synalcepha, as commonly used, an improper one, and recom- mend that, instead of Synalcepha. and Ecthlipsis, the general term Eli' sion be substituted.
1 . The best opinion with regard to the ancient mode of pronouncing Latin verse is this, that much of the apparent harshness of elisions was removed, by giving the elided syllable so slight and imperfect a sound that it could hardly be distinguished, and, consequently, interrupted but little the measure of the verse.
2. Ennius, Lucilius, Lucretius, and the comic writers furnish the most
!
FIGURES OF PROSODY. 109
Enn. Te nunc sancta precor Venus, et genetrix patrifs)
nostri.
Id. Versibu(s) quos olim Fauni Vatesquc canebant.
Lucret. Ut quasi transactis sape omnibu(s) rebu(s) profun-
dant. Catull. At fixus nostris tu dabt(s) supplicium. (Pentam.)
IV. We may notice here a peculiar species of elision or abbreviation not unfrequently employed in short, quick questions, by which the vowel is dropped in the interroga- tive particle ne before- a consonant ;' thus,
Catull. Ten1 provincia narrat esse bellam ? (Phalaecian.) Propert. Vidistin' toto sonitus procurrere ccelo ? Virg. Hectoris Andromache Pyrrhin' connubia scrvas ? Horat. Men' moveat cimex Pantilius ? out cruciet quod.
V. It has already been remarked, under the rules for final n, that in such forms as vidln' ut, the s is dropped before n, and the vowel shortened. Both this and the last-mentioned abbreviation are combined in viden' (for videsne) and vin' tu (for visne tu).
Catull. Nostra verba. Viden' ? faces. Horat. Tempore dicam ; hodie triccsima sabbata ; vin' tu. These expressions, as might be expected, are very com- mon in the comic writers.1
EXCEPTIONS. Exc. 1. Synaloepha never takes place in the words O,
numerous examples of this license. Some instances also occur in Cicero's translation of Aratus, though comparatively few in number. About the time, however, when Cicero wrote his Orator, the custom of dropping the s before a consonant appears to have been fast going out of use ; at least the following passage from the work just referred to is in favour of such an opinion : " Quin etiam, quod jam subrusticum •cidetur, olim au- tcm politius, eorum verborum quorum ccedem erant postremcE du<t htertz que£ sunt in optumus postremam literam detrahebant, nisi vocalis insc- qucbatur. Ita non erat offensio in versibus quam nunc fugmnt poctce noti ; ita enim loquebantur ; qui est omnibu' princeps, non omnibus princeps, et vita ilia dignu' locoque, non dignus." (Cic., Orat.> 48, § 161.— Compare QuintiL, V, 4, 38.— Mar. Viet., p. 2472.) 1. Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 114.
K
110 FIGURES OF PROSODY.
heu, ah, ai, io, proh, vae, vah, hei, and the like interjec- tions, which sustain the voice, and retard the pronun- ciation, on account of the feeling or passion which they express ; as,
Virg. O pater, \ o homin\um div\umque as\terna pot\estas.
Id. Heu ubi \ pacta fid\es ? ubi \ qua jur\are sol\ebas.
Tibull. Ah ego \ ne poss\im || tanta vid\ere mal\a. (Pent.)
Ovid. Ipsc su\os gemit\us foli\is in\scribit et \ at at.
Id. Et bis i\o Areth\usa i\o Areth\usa voc\avit.
Exc. 2. Elision is sometimes apparently neglected in the case of a long vowel or diphthong ; and this gen- erally happens when the unelided vowel or diphthong is in the caesural syllable. Hence arise the following rules :
First. When a long vowel or diphthong occurs in a caesural syllable, and the word £hat follows begins with either a vowel or diphthong, then the long vow- el or diphthong sometimes apparently remains une- lided; but, in fact, the long vowel or diphthong parts, by means of elision, with one of its two short component vowels, and the remaining short vowel, being in the caesura, is lengthened again by the stress of the voice.
Secondly. When a long vowel or diphthong occurs, not in a caesural syllable, and the word that follows be- gins with a vowel or diphthong, then the long vowel or diphthong sometimes apparently remains uneli- ded ; but, in fact, the long vowel or diphthong parts, by means of elision, with one of its two short com- ponent vowels, and the remaining short vowel, not being in the caesura, continues short.
FIGURES OF PROSODY. Ill
ILLUSTRATIONS OF EXCEPTION ffECOND.
Rule First.
Virg. Et succ\us pecor\i, et \ lac sub\ducitur \ agnis Id. Slant et \ juniper\l et \ caslanefe hirs\ut(B. Id. Ter sunt \ cona\tl im\ponere \ Pelio \ Ossam.1 Id. Amphi\on Dir\caus in j Act&\o Ara\cyntho. Ovid. Et celer \ Ismen\us cum \ Phocai\co Erym\antho.
Rule Second.
Cat\:ll. Uno in \ lectulo \ erud\itul\i ambo. (Phalaecian.) Virg. Credimus ? \ an qui am\ant ips\i sibi j somnia \ fin-
gunt ?
Id. Nomen et \ arma loc\um serv\ant te am\ice neq\uivi. Id. Et long\um form\ose val\e vale \ inquit Ilola. Id. Insulce | Ioni\o in magn\o quas \ dira Cel\ano. Id. Te Coryd\on o Al\exi trah\it sua \ quemque vol\uptas. Horat. Et Esq\uili\nv al\ites. (Iambic.)
OBS. The only exception in Virgil to the remarks con-"^ tained in the preceding paragraph, occurs in the following line :
Glauco | et Pano\peos et \ Ino\o Meli\certce. (Georg., 1,437.) Here the o in Glauco is not elided, but is allowed to remain long, though not in caesura. The line, however, in all probability, contains a false reading, and for Glauco we should substitute Glaucoque.2
*»
1. In this line, the o in Pelio furnishes an illustration of rule second.
2. Ramsay's usual accuracy deserts him, when he regards this line as transplanted without change from some one of the Greek poets, who were much less strict, in matters of this kind, than the Latins. It hap- pens, unfortunately for this remark, that the Greek, in that event, would be, ThavKu K.OL TlavoTreiri IS1 'Ivciu Me/lt/cepr?;, in which case the last syllable of T/lavKu would be long, as a matter of course, without any li- cense whatever. Aulus Gellius (13, 26) informs us that Virgil borrow- ed the line from the Greek poet Parthenius, in whom it ran as follows : TAav/cu nal Njjpfji nal 'Ivucj MeAt/ceprfl. (Compare Macrob., 5, 17. — Fulv. UTS., Virg. cum Grate. Script. O'/., p. 130.) This form of the
112 FIGURES OF PROSODY.
Exc. 3. Very rarely is a short vowel left unclided. This happens only twice in Virgil, and in both cases there is a pause after the word ending with the short A'owel, so that in repeating the line the effect would not bo disagreeable.1 Thus, Addam \ cerea \ pruna : hon\ns erit \ huic quoque \ porno.
(Ed., 2, 53.)
El ve\ra incess\u patu\it Ded. \ Ille ubi \ matrem. (jEn., 1, 405.)
OBS. For some remarks on elision at the end of a verse, when the next verse begins with a vowel or diphthong, con- sult the article Synapheia.
ECTHLIPSIS.2
I. Ectklipsis is the eliding of the consonant m at the end of a word, when the following word begins with a vowel or the letter h ; and after the m is removed by ecth lipsis, a synalcepha immediately operates, and cuts off the rowel which preceded the m. Thus,
Catull. Omnia tecum una perierynt gaudia nostra.
Id. Sternum hoc sanctos f&dus amicitia. (Pent.)
In scanning which lines we must read them as follows : Omnia tec1 una perierunt gaudia noslra. JEterrf hoc sanctas fozdus amicitia.
Greek line, however, still remains hostile to Ramsay's opinion. Wag- ner, on the other hand, maintains that the true reading in Virgil is Glau- coquc, as we have remarked in the text. His words are as follows : " Nullus dubilo, quitm nusquam longam syllabam in to posilu produxc- rit Virgilius, pessumdata etiam soni clcgantia, quin tcripscrit Glauco- que. Apparel autcm nusquam facilius excidere potuisse hanc copulam, per simplex q scilicet cxprimi solitam, quam hoc loco, praxcdcntibvs du- abus ipsi Q similibus litcris, altera quidcm simillima, C ct O. Sic in Medic. JBn., 1, 69, a m. pr. scriptum est SUBMERSASQ. DRUE pro submersasq. obrue, &c. (Wagner, Quasi. Virgil., 11,3.)
1. Riimsay''s Lai. Pros., p. 11G.
2. The subject of Ecthlipsis has been in part anticipated in the re- marks respecting m final, p. 84, seqq.
FIGURES OF PROSODY. 113
II. Ecthlipsis sometimes, by the aid of Synapheia, strikes out a syllable at the end of a line, when the next line be- gins with a vowel, and no long pause intervenes ; as, Virg. Jamque iter emensi, turres ac lecta Latino\rum Ardua cerne.bant juvencs, murosque subibant.
H re the second line, is to be read r 'Ardua cernebant, &c., the last syllable of Latinorum being cut off from the first verse and prefixed to the second.
KXCEPTIOXS.
Exc. 1. The elision of m is sometimes neglected, espe- cially by the older poets, and in this case the syllable ending in m, when not a caesural one, is short ;' as, l^ucret. Nam quod jluvidum est, e levibus atque rotundis. Id. Sed dum abest quod avemus, id exsuperare videtur.
Exc. 2. In some instances the caesura operates to pre- serve the final m unelided, in which case the syllable thus saved from efision- becomes long ; as,
Propert. O me felicem ! O nox mihi Candida ! et O tit.
Before quitting the subject of elision, it may not be amiss to add the following rules, which regulate its use.
1. A verse in which there are more than two elisions, is most commonly deficient in harmony ; as, for exam- ple, the following pentameter line : Catull. Quam modo qui me unum atque unicum amicum habuit.
2. Elisions may generally be introduced into a verse without diminishing its harmony, when the final vow- el of a word is the same as that which begins the next word, and when the elided vowel is either naturally short, or is followed by a long syllable ; as,
1. This and the succeeding exception have been partially anticipated in the remarks relative to final m.
K2
114 FIGURES OF PROSODY.
Virg. Ipse ego cana legam lenera lanugine mala. Id. Turn casia atque aliis intexens suavibus herbis.
3. An elision has seldom a good effect, either when it occurs in the first syllable of a verse, or in the end of the fifth foot of an hexameter, or immediately after the penthemimeris in a pentameter, or in a word ending with a long vowel or a diphthong before a word be- ginning with a short vowel ; as,
Horat. Nam ut ferula ccedas meritum majora subire,
Juv. Loripedem rectus derideat ^thiopem Albus.
Catull. Troja nefas ! commune sepulcrum Europae Asiaque.
Id. Me misero eripuisti omnia nostra bona. (Pentam.)
IIL SYN.ERESIS.
I. Synaeresis is the contraction of two syllables into.one, and is resorted to by the poets in order to make a word ad- missible into hexameter or other verse, which could not otherwise be introduced without some degree of inconve- nience or dissonance, or perhaps not at all.
II. Hence we have, among others, the following instan- ces of this species of poetic license.
1. CONTRACTION OF CO.
•aurea is pronounced as aura,
cered " " cera.
alvedria " " alvaria.
respondeamus " " respondyamus (4 syllables).1
anteactos " " antyactos (3 syllables).8
antedmbulo " " antyambulo (4 syllables).
antehdc " " antyac (2 syllables).
Virg. Aurea compomit sponda, mediamque locavit.
1. The y is to be pronounced here like the same letter when it stands at the beginning of an English word.
2. This word and the two that follow may otherwise be pronounced ant'actos, antyambulo, ant'ac, and the vowel c may be supposed to have been actually elided before1 we one that succeeds.
FIGURES OF PROSODY. 115
Herat. Abdiderant furtim terris, et imagine eerea. Virg. Sen lento fuerint alvearia vimine texta. Lucret. Quid respondeamus nisi justam intcndere litem. Tibull. Cum memor anteactos semper dolor admonet annos, Mart. Anteambulones et togatulos inter. (Scazon.) Horat. Antehac nefas depromere C&cubum. (Alcaic.)
2. CONTRACTION OF 61.
aeret is pronounced as #n.
|
aranei |
aram. |
|
baltei " |
" baltt. |
|
ferrei " |
u fern. |
|
aureis " |
" auris. |
|
anteirent " |
" antlrent. |
|
anteis " |
" ant is. |
|
anteit " |
" antit. |
Virg. Centum aerei claudunt vectes aternaque ferri.
Lucret. Nee nebulam noctu, neque aranei tenuiajila.
Virg. Exanimem, rapiens immania pondera baltei.
Id. Ferreijue Eumenidum thalami et Discordia demens,
1^, Atria, dependent lychni laquearibus aureis.
Id. Qui candore nives anteirent cursibus auras.
Horat. Te semper anteit saeva necessitas. (Alcaic.)
3. CONTRACTION OF 60.
alveo is pronounced as alvo.
aureo " " auro.
Typhoeo " " Typhoo.
Virg. Deturbat, laxatque foros, simul accipit alveo.
Id. Vulcanum alloquitur, thalamoque hose conjugis aureo
Id. Inarime Jovis imperils imposta Typhoeo.1
1. The nominative of this proper name is Typhoeus (three syllables), never Typhaef «.
116 FIGURES OF PROSODY.
4. CONTRACTION OF 1C.
vindetmdtor is pronounced as vindemyator (4 syllables).1 Formiano " " Formyano (3 syllables)
Horat. Vindemiator, tt invictus, cui saspe viator. Catull. Formiano saltu nonfalso Mentula dives.
5. CONTRACTION OF U.
connubTis is pronounced as connubyls (3 syllables).
dcnarns " " denar]/is (3 syllables).
Paoniis " " Paonyis (3 syllables).
Ttentis " " Tacnyls (2 syllables).
Virg. Connubiis arvisque novis operetta juventus.
Mart. Denariis tibi quinque Martialem. (Phalaecian.)
Virg. Paeoniis revocatum herbis et amore Dianas?
Id. Puniceis ibant evincti tempora taeniis.
6. CONTRACTION IN 10.
connubib is pronounced as connubyb (3 syllables). Idomenios " " Idomenybs (4 syllables).
Virg. Connubio jungam stabili propriamque dicabo. Catull. Idomeniosne petam monies ? at gurgite in alto.
7. CONTRACTION IN t«.
f -omontonum is pronounced as promontoryum (4 syllables).
Antium " " . Antyum (2 syllables).
omnium " " omnyum (2 syllables).
mensium " " mensyum (2 syllables).
lacrymantium " " lacrymantyum* (4 syllables).
1. The y, as has already been remarked, is to be here pronounced like the same letter at the beginning of an English word.
2. In scanning this line some erroneously make Pctoni a dactyl. The second syllable, on the contrary, is lon£, the corresponding Greek form being Tlaiuviof. Such a form as P&onits could only refer to the Pae- onians (Tlaiovaf) of Thrace. (Consult Heyne ad Virg., ^En., 7, 779, not. crit.)
3. Genitives in ium are frequently written without inserting the i,
FIGURES OF PROSODY. 117
Ovid. Inde legit Capreas promontoriurnywe Minerva. Id. Et tellus Olrc&a, et spissi litoris Antium.
Lucret. Imbecillorum esse Gquum misererier omnium. Ovid. Cum tua sint cedantque tibi confinia mensium. Virg. Exclusi, ante oculos lacrymantiumjue ora parentum.
8. CONTRACTION IN 00.
cooluerint is pronounced as coluerint.
cooperiant " " coperiant.
cooperuisse " " coperuisse.
Lucret. Tandem cooluerint ea qua conjecta repente. Id. Cooperiant maria ac terras immensa superna.
Id. Per terras omneis atque oppida cooperuisse.
9. CONTRACTION IN €6.
decsse is pronounced as desse.
deest " " dest.
deer at " " derat.
deero . " " dero.
deerrarunt " " derrarunt.
deerraverat " " derraverat.
Lucret. Talibus in rebus communi deesse saluti.
Virg. Deest jam terra fugas : pelagus Trojamne petamus
Id. Divitis uber agri Trojave opulentia deerit.
Lucret. Deerrarunt passim motus ab sensibus omnes.
Virg. Vir gregis ipse caput deerraverat, atque ego Daph-
II. Synaeresis may sometimes be referred to synaloepha, or, in other words, the first vowel in several instances may rather be considered as elided, than as uniting with the fol-
as, parentum, serpentum, mensum, &c. The poets, however, use the open form also, when it can be conveniently introduced ; as, parentium, terpentium, &c. ; nor must it be supposed that the contraction is purely a poetic license, since it is found in the best MSS. of prose authors. LRamsay's Lot. Pros., p. 124.)
118 FIGURES OP PROSODY.
lowing one to form one syllable. Thus many words com- pounded with semi followed by a vowel, or by the letter h with a vowel, such as semianimis; semianimus, semiadaper. lus, semihians, semihomo, semiustus, &c., lose by elision the final vowel of semi, and are to be pronounced in verse, semianimis, semianimus, semiadaper tus, semihians, sem'homo, sem'ustus, &C.1
Virg. Semianimesywe micant digiti ferrumque retractant. Lucret. Languida semianimo cum corpore membra videres. Ovid. Obliquum capiat semiadaperta latus. (Pentam.) Catull. Semihiante labello. (Choriambic.) Virg. Semihominis Caci fades quam dira tenebat. Id. Fama est Enceladi semiustum fulmine corpus.
III. Words which contain an h between two vowels oc- casionally drop the h, and contract the two vowels into one syllable ; thus, we have vehemens, vehementi, vehementer, vehementius, and also vemens, vementi, vementer ; soprehensi and prensi, dehinc and deinc, mhtlum and nilum, mihi and ml, prohibeat, pronounced prtnbeat (three syllables), &c.2 Virg. Transit equum cursu, frenisque adversa prehensis. Id. Ingentes tollent animos, prensique negabunt.
Id. Cervici subnecte dehinc ubi libera colla.
Id. Eurum ad se Zephyrumque vocat, dehinc taliafatur.
Lucret. Nam sive est aliquid quod prohibeat efficiatque.
IV. More violent than these are ostrea, eadem, eodem. e&dem, eosdem, torreat, debrsum, sedrsum, sebrsus, omnia, vtetis, Gain, onundi, patrm, flmtant, pronounced as dissyl- lables ; precantta, uizyges, duellica, prczbptarit, as trisylla- bles ; prout, a monosyllable ; all of which might be, and most of them often aie, employed without being contracted.3
1. Among these some would place grarfolcns and suav'olens, but these ought to be considered as two distinct words, grave olens and suave olens. (Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 123.)
2. Vemens occurs in Horace, Epist., 2, 2, 120 ; vcmcnti in Lucre- tius, 3. 153 ; vementer in the same, 2, 1023, and 4, 821.
3 Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 124.
FIGURES OP PROSODY. 119
Horat. Sudando, pinguem vitiis albumque neque os'.rea. Virg. Una eademque via sanguis animusque sequ'jntur. Propert. Hoc eodern ferro stillet uterque cruor. (Pentam.) Lucret. Uvescunt, eeedem dispansas in sole liquescunt. Id. Eosdem habuit secum quibus, est elata capillos.
Id. Quod sitis exurat miseros atque arida torreat.
Id. Pondera quantum in se est deorsum deducere pvg-
nent. Id. At neque seorsum oculei, neque nareis, nee manus
ipsa.
Id. Seorsus item sapor oris habet vim, seorsus odores
Virg. Bis patrice cecidere manus; quin protenus omnia. Horat. Qui sudor vietis, et quam malus undique membris. Propert. Et qui nunc nulli, maxima turba Gabii. (Pentam.) Lucret. Denique ccelesti sumus omnes semine oriundi. Stat. Nocturnique canum gemitus, ubi lumina patrui. Lucret. Per malos volgata trabeisque trementia fluitant. Virg. Pr&ferimus manibus vittas et verba precantia. Ovid. lazyges et Colchi, Metereaque turba Getaeque. Lucret. Lanigera pecudes, et equorum duellicaproZgj. Catull. Omnibus his Thesei dulcem praeoptarit amorem. Horat. Pasco libatis dapibus. Prout cuique libido est.
V. I is sometimes considered as a consonant, and in these cases had, it is probable, the sound of the English y in young, yes, &c. Thus, abiete, ablefibus, anete, parieti- bus, were pronounced in dactylic verse as abyete, dbyetibus, aryete, paryettbus, the first syllable being considered long by position.1
Virg. jEdificant, sectaque intexunt abiete costas.
Id. Abietibus^wuenw patriis et mantibus aquas.
Id. Custodes sufferre valent. La \at ariete crebro.
Id. H&rent parietibus scalas, postesque sub ipsos.
VI. Upon the same principle, although without the plea 1. Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 131.
120 FIGURES OF PROSODY.
of absolute necessity, we find jluvloriim in a passage of Virgil (Georg., 1, 482), where it must be pronounced jluv~ yonim; and Nasidieni in Horace (Sat., 2, 8, 1), which must be pronounced Nasidyeni. In Propertius likewise, we have abtcgni (4, 1, 42), to be pronounced abyegni, and abiegna (3, 19, 12), to be pronounced abyegnte.
Virg. Fluviorum rex Eridanus, camposque per omnes. Horat. Ut Nasidieni juvit te ccena beati?' Propert. L&serat abiegni venter apertus equi. (Pent.) Id. Induit abiegnae cornua falsa bovis. (Pent.)
VII. In the same way the poets took advantage of the double power of u, and made it a consonant in words where such a change, was necessary or convenient. In this way tenuia, tenulus, tennis, tenue, tenuem, tenui, tenues, genua, curruum, fortmtus, pitultd, become tenvia, tcnvius, tenvis, &c., genva, currvum, fortvitus, pitvita, &c.2 Virg. Vclleraque utfoliis depectant tenuia Seres. Lucret. Qua neque mobilius quidquam neque tenuius cxstat. Virg. Tenuis ubi argilla el dumosis calculus arvis. Id. Genua labant, vastns quatit aeger anhelitus artus.
Id. Per compos pascuntur equi ; qu& gratia curruum.
Juv. Non quasi fortuitus, sed ventorum rabie, sed. Horat. Pr&cipue sanus, nisi quum pituita molesta est.
Horat. Nee fortultum spernere cespitem. (Alcaic.)3 Catull. Mucusque et mala pMIta nasi. (Phalaecian.)
1. NasuRene, without contraction, occurs in Martial (7, 8): " Aut tigila aiit dormi, NdsitKene tUri." (Pentam.)
2. By combining the processes described in this and paragraph V., icnuiorc is pronounced tenv-ydrc. (Ramsay's Lai. Pros., p. 132.)
3. Fortultus, without contraction, occurs also in Phaedrus (2,*4, 4). On the other hand, in Manilius (1, 182) we have fortvitiu.
FIGURES OF PROSODY. 121
IV. DLERESIS.1
I. Di&resis is defined to be the division of one syllable into two ; as, aurai for auras, suadent for suadent, miluus for milvus, sylua for sylva, soluo for solvo, <kc.
Virg. JEthereum sensum, atque aura'i simplicis ignem.
Lucret. Atque alias alii irrident, Veneremque suadent.
Phaedr. Columbae s&pe quum fugissent miluiim. (Iambic.)
Horat. Nunc mare, nunc syluae. (Dact. Trim. Cat.)
Tibull. Nulla queat pcsthac nos solu'isse dies. (Pentam.)
II. In strictness, however, no such figure as diaeresis ex- ists, nor did the poets ever assume the power of stretching out words, although they sometimes contracted them. The examples usually quoted of this so-called figure, including those given under the preceding paragraph, are in reality archaisms, or antiquated forms of expression, which were adopted by the poets for the sake of convenience or orna- ment.
III. As the Ionic dialect in Greek frequently resolves the diphthongs ei and q into ijt, the Roman poets occasionally availed themselves of that license i^ words of Greek origin, written in the latter language with either of those diph- thongs ; as,
Ovid. Flebilis indignos, Elegeia solve capillos. Stat. Quas inter vultu petitions elegeia propinquat.
Ovid. Invocat, Hippomenes, Cytherela, comprecor ousts.
Virf. farce metu Cylhereia ; manent immota tuorum.
Ovid. Quid quod avus nobis idem Pelopeius Atreus.
Lucan. Eumenidum vidit vultus Pelopeius Orestes.
Propert. Pleiadum spisso cur edit imbre chorus. (Pent.)
Ovid. Pleiades incipiunt humeros relevare paternos.
Id. Pleias enixa est, letoque del imperat Argum.
Virg. Pleias, et Oreani spretas pede repulit amnes.
1. Aio/pfffif, "a separation," "a taking or drawing asunder," from 6ta. and alpea,
L
122 FIGURES OF PROSOD1
So also Phabeius and Pk&bJius ; Theseius and Thesei- tis ; T/treicius, Threcius, and Thrdcius ; Pegaseius and Pe- gaseus, &c.
V. PROSTHESIS.' — APH^RESIS.S
I. Prosthesis is defined to be the addition of a letter or syllable to the beginning of a word ; as, gnatus for natus, gnavus for navus, &c.
II. In strictness, however, no such figure as prosthesis exists. On the contrary, the forms which are cited as in- stances of it are in reality archaisms, or antiquated modes of expression.
HI. Apharesis is defined to be the cutting off of the first letter or syllable of a word ; as, maragdus for smaragdus, conia for ciconia. —
IV. Aphaeresis is, in truth, as imaginary a figure as pros- thesis. The forms usually cited as instances of it are ei- ther archaisms or colloquial shortenings. ~^-
VI. SYI^OPE.3 EPENTHESIS.4
I. Syncope is defined tojbe the dropping of a letter or syllable out of the body of a word ; as, aspris for asperis, caldior for calidior, circlos for circulos, oraclum for oraculum, periclum for periculum, &c.
Virg. Improvisum aspris veluti qui sentibus anguem.
Horat. Caldior est ? acres inter numeretur. Opinor.
Virg. Ac primum laxos tenui de vimine circlos.
Catull. Oraclum Jovis inter cestuosi. (Phalffician.)
Virg. Vota me.tu duplicant matres, propiusque periclis.
II. We must not imagine, however, that forms such &a
and KOTTTU.
FIGURES OF PROSODY. 123
these were all peculiar to the poets, or that syncope was a figure the use of which was confined to tins class of wri- ters. Many of these shortened forms, on the contrary, oc- cur also in prose. Thus, for example, vinda is found in Cicero (Ep. ad Fam., 16, 18). Quintilian (1,6) says that calfacit was more common in his time than calefacit ; while from the contracted periclum we have the verb periclitor, and so on.
/- III. The words most frequently contracted by syncope are the praeter tenses of verbs; as, scripsti for scripsisti, dixti for dixisti, promisse for promisissc, illuxe for illuxisse : the participles of compound verbs ; as, repostum for repos- iturn : genitives plural; as, deum for deorum, amantum for amantium ; and words which have a « in the penult before
,.- the consonant I ; as, vinclum for vinculum. &c.
IV. Epenthesis is defined to be the insertion of a letter i or syllable into the body of a word ; as, pluvi,fuvi, annum,
genuvi, which is done, according to the grammarians, in order to lengthen the -short u of plui, fui, annul, genui. All these so-called instances of epenthesis occur in Ennius.
V. Epenthesis is, however, an imaginary figure, like those of which we have already made mention. " If we study," observes Ramsay, " the etymological formation of the Latin verb, we soon discover, that, in a very large class, the per- fect tense is distinguished by the addition of v to what Bopp calls the crude form ; we shall also readily perceive that the v is frequently dropped, as in amasti, amarunt, au- dieram, &c. We shall then have no difficulty in recogni- sing the true old perfects of pluo, fuo, &c., in pluvi, fuvi, &c. ; and, as might be expected, they are found in the very earliest specimens of the language, and scarcely, if ever, appear after the time of Plautus. It would be just as rea- sonable to assert that a v had been inserted in audiveram or abivi, in order to lengthen the short i of audii and abii, as to advance the same proposition with regard to pluvi,fuvij
124 FIGURES OF PROSODY.
and the rest. Moreover, we have the express testimony of Priscian, that preterites in ui had the u long in the oldest writers, especially those derived from the present in uo ; as, eruo, erui ; arguo, argui ; annuo, annui ; and he quotes from Ennius, ' Annuit sese mecum decernere ferrof in all of which it is clear that the long quantity of the u pointed out the recent disappearance of the w."1
VII. Apocope.2 — PARAGOGE.*
I. Apocope is defined to be the omission of the final vow- el or syllable of a word ; as, men1 for mene.
II. In such instances as the one just cited, where a quick colloquial interrogation occurs, the figure may be allowed to stand. In other cases, however, its existence is purely imaginary ; as, for example, in the following line from Lu- cretius :
Disjectare solet magnum mare transtra, guberna,
f where guberna is said to be by apocope for gubernacula.
III. Paragoge is defined to be the addition of a letter or syllable to the end of a word ; as, amarier for amari, doce- rier for doceri, legier for legi.
IV. Paragoge is also, in strictness, an imaginary figure, A and amarier, doccrier, legier, &c., are merely archaisms, or
antiquated modes of expression, mistaken for a poetical or grammatical figure.
VIII. TMESIS.*
I. Tmesis is defined to be the separation of a word into two parts, for the purpose of inserting another word be- tween them ; as,
1. Lot. Pros., p. 160. — Compare Voss.. de Art. Gramm., 2, 13.
2. 'kTTOKOiri), " a cutting off," from UTTO and KOTTTU.
3. Tlapayuyy, " a leading or bringing beside," from Trapd and uyu. In military phraseology, " the extending a line of troops beyond the flank, and presenting a new line or front."
4. Tfu'jaif, " a cutting." from riiivu, " to cut."
FIGURES OF PROSODY. 125
Virg. Talis Hyperboreo Septem subjecta trioni. Lucret. Languidior porro disjectis dis^we supatis. Id. Ceelera de genere hoc, inter quaquomque pretantur.
Id. Conlaxat, rarejuc facit lateramina vasi.
II. Here the words septemtrioni, dissipatis, interpretantur, and rarefacit, are supposed to be divided by the figure tme- sis. The truth appears to be, however, that, in the earlier forms of the language, many words which were used sep- arately were in process of time compounded together ; and hence, just as we should expect, these separations are much more frequent in Lucretius and the older writers than in those who succeeded them.1
IX. ANTITHESIS.2 METATHESIS.3
I. Antithesis is defined to be the putting of one letter for another; as, olli for illi, faciundum for faciendum.
II. Antithesis is, in fact, no figure at all. The forms com- monly assigned as instances of it, are merely old modes of spelling words, which are found under this shape on many monuments, some of them of a late date, and certainly many of them not antiquated even in the age of Augustus.4
' III. Metathesis is defined to be a transposition of letters ; as, Evandre for Evander, Thymbre for Thymber, corcodilus for crocodilus.
Virg. H(EC mea magna fides? At non Evandre pudendis. Id. Nam tibi, Thymbre, caput Evandrius abstulit ensis. Phaedr. A corcodilis ne rapiantur, traditum est. (Iamb.)
1. Ramsay's Lot. Pros., p. 161. — Compare the remark of Hermann • " Qiiam tmesin vacant grammalici, ea et natura ct usu prior fuit quana avvdtcig. Sed nimirum, quoniam recentior consuetude, ad quam omnia exigebant, avvdeaiv usurpabat, tmesin istam ut discessionem a communi usu animadvertere jubebant." (De Emend. Rat., G. G.,p. 117.) Con- sult also, on the subject of tmesis in early Greek, the remarks of Mat- thise (G. G., vol. 2, p. 1398, 3d Germ. ed.\ Kiihner (G. G., vol. 2, p. 313), and Nagelsbach (Anmerk. zu Ilias, Excurs. 16).
2. 'Avn'0e<Kf, " a substitution," from avri and rid?]fti.
3. Mera0£<rtf, " a transposition," from /J.STU and riQrmi.
4. Ramsay's Lai. Pros., p. 162.
L2
126 FIGURES OF PROSODY.
IV. The instances, however, that are given of metathesis are merely antiquated forms of expression. Thu.s, Evandre and Thymbre are nothing more than vocatives regularly formed from old nominatives in us ; and corcodilus is mere- ly another form for crocodilus, obtained through the Greek."
X. SYSTOLE.2
7 Li I I. Systole is defined to be the shortening of a syllable, which, from its natural quantity or from position, ought to be long.
II. No such figure, however, as systole in reality exists ; and we must not suppose that the poets could shorten syl- lables at their own caprice.
i i j •) III. Under systole are placed, for example, those com- pounds ofjacio which sometimes drop the^'. Thus, For dbjicit, abjici, we find a&icit, abici. adjicit, adjici, " adicit, adici.
conjicit, u conicit.
injicit, " inicit.
objicis, objicit, " obicis, obicit. subjicit, subjici, " subtcit, subtci. IV. These, however, are by no means cases of systole or poetic license, but are, in reality, old forms of the language.3
1. The Greeks appear to have said both Kponodtdof and
as they said icpadia and Kopila, KpaTcpoc. and Kaprcpoc, and as the Scotch use indifferently frith and firth. (Ramsay, L. P., p. 162.) — Gudius, indeed, maintains that the form corcodilus is more correct than crocodi- lus. His words are as follows : " Testari' possum, in optimis et sep- tingentorum, ct amplius annorum membranis, non tantum apnd poetas, iis in locis, ubi metri ratio id postulat, scd etiam in prosa apud oratores et philosophos reperiri Corcodilus. Neque his obstabit, quod belluse is- tius Niliacae nomen a Graecis Latini acceperint, qui Kpoic66ei3.oc scrip- serint. Sic enim saepc vocabula, quae a Grascis habenl Latini, immuta- runt. Sic lard'us a ppadvf, etc. Eodem modo ndprfpof et tsparcpof. Non negandum vero est; poetas, quoties prima foret corripienda, ad im- itationem Graecorum scripsisse Crocodilus. Sic Hor., Epod., 12, 11: Postea unice tandem obtinuit ut scriberetur Crocodilus." (Gud. &d Phecdr., 1, 25, 4.)
2. SvtTToX);, " a drawing together," from <n>v and ffre^Au.
3. Ramsay's Lot. Pros., p. 13& —Pareus, Lex. Cnt.—Noris,
FIGURES OF PROSODY. 127
V. Under systole we also find Tanked the shortening of the penultimate syllable in the third person plural of per- fects ; as, dederunt, tulerunt, steterunt, &c. It is probable, however, that we have here the ancient pronunciation ; at least the analogy of the language is in favour of it.1
VI. To systole is also attributed the quantity of the ini- tial syllable in aperio, omitto, hodie, and the like, which, being compounded, as is said, of ad and pario, ob and mitto, hoc and die, &c., ought to have the first syllable long. It will be sufficient, however, to observe, in reply, that the quantity of these and similar words is invariable, and must therefore have been the result of the ordinary pronunciation, and not of any poetic license.2
VII. A similar remark maybe made with regard to videri for videsne. In the latter of these two forms the syllable es
olaph. Pis., diss. 4, c. 4. — Aul. Gell., 16, 7. The last-named writer blames Laberius for using coicior, on the ground that it was " obsoletum, ant ex sordidiore usu vulgi depromptum."
1. By some these anomalies have been attributed to the mistakes of transcribers, who, it is supposed, may have written erunt instead of erant, or in some cases crint, bftth which terminations are occasionally found in MSS. Thus, in the following line from Virgil's Eclogues (4, 61), " Matri longa. dccem tulerunt faslidia menses," we find three readings in the MSS., tulerunt, tulerant, and tulerint. If we examine, however, with care the different examples adduced, it will be found that in not a few of these the indicative perfect cannot be struck out without great vi- olence ; nor can we fail to perceive that a transcriber, when copying a MS., if he came to such a quantity as tulerunt or steterunt, which he might consider anomalous, would be much more likely to change it to tulerint or lulerant, than to transform one of these into tulerunt, in vio- lation of all ordinary rules. (Ramsay's Lot. Pros. p. 105.) — Others, again, have boldly contended that the poets who used these forms were inadvertently guilty of a breach of prosody. There might be some plau- sibility in this assertion, if the instances of this pretended violation of rule were only few in number. It happens, however, that in Lucretius there are no less than 15, in Virgil five, in Propertius five, in Ovid 19, &c. It is idle, therefore, to talk in such a case of "inadvertent" errors. — The supposition in the text, that the penult of the perfect, in the third person plural, was originally short, seems much more probable, and coincides also with the general rule of c short before r, or, in other words, with the analogy of the language ; and, in confirmation of this opinion, we may cite the words of the grammarian Diomedes : " Fere in tertio ordine plerumque veteres tertia persona fmitiva tcmporis perfccti, numeri plu- ralis, E mediam vocalem corripiunt, quasi legerunt, emerunt," &c.
2. Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 156
128
FIGURES OF PROSODY.
is uniformly long ; whereas in viden? the e is as uniformly short. The reason probably is this, that in videii, as well as in satin' and ait/*', the pronunciation was so rapid that the voice was not permitted to dwell upon any of the syllables.1
XI. DIASTOLE.2
I. Diastole (or Ectasis3) is defined to be the lengthening of a syllable naturally short. Like systole, however, it is merely an imaginary figure.
II. To diastole is attributed the lengthening of the first syllable in 'Italia, Pnamides, 'Arabia, &c., from ~Italus> Priamus, "Arabs, &c. But the true reason is, that such forms as Ildfid, Priarmdes, Arabia, <fec., could not have been used in dactylic verse unless the first syllable were lengthened. This license was therefore assumed by the Roman poets, in imitation of the Greeks.4
III. To diastole is also attributed the lengthening of the first syllable in certain compounds of Re. Thus, we find
rellgio, reUglone, religionum, religiosa.
reliquiae, retiquiarum, reliquias.
reddere, recidimus.
relatum, remotum.
rcducit, reducunt, reducere.
To these must be added the three preterites reperit, repulit, retulit, and the tenses formed from them, repereris, repere- rit ; repuleris, repulerint ; retuleram, retulerat, retuleris, re- tulerit, <fec.4
IV. Various explanations have been given of this anom- aly. According to some, such words as religio, reliquiae, recidere, could not find a place in dactylic verse, unless the first syllable were made long ; but, although this is true as far as ihese Avords are concerned, it will by no means ap-
1. R(unsay''s Lai. Pros., p. 156.
2. Aiaarol.r), "a separation," "a drawing out," from did and trre'/Uu
3. 'E/crc<Tif, " a stretching out," from t/c and reivu.
4. Ramsay's Lai. Pros., p. 139, scq.
FIGURES OF PROSODY. 129
ply to relatus, remains, reducit, &c., which are generally found with the first syllable short ; nor will it explain the quantity of reperit, repulit, retulit, which is invariable.1
V. Other scholars, following the old grammarians, con- tent themselves with doubling the consonant after re in all cases where that syllable is long, and write relligio, rel- liquias, redduco, remmotus, &c.^but this at best is but an evasion of the difficulty.
VI. A more plausible explanation is grounded upon the supposition that the ancient form of re was red, as it appears in reddo ; for it cannot be said that the d is here inserted for the sake of euphony, as may be urged in regard to such words as redeo, redimo, and the like. In this way the ori- ginal form of refero, recido, removeo, reduco, &c., was red- fero, redcido, redmoveo, redduco, &c. ; and, although the d was afterward dropped, the poets, especially the earlier ones, considered themselves entitled to make use of either form, as best suited their convenience.
VII. This may be. the true account of the matter in most instances, but it certainly does not apply to the preterites reperit, repulit, retulit, which ought always to be written with the consonant doubled, being in reality contractions for the reduplications repeperit, repepulit, retetulit. This is the account given by Priscian2 with regard to repperit, and it applies equally to the other two.3
VIII. The first syllable in quatuor, when made long, has also been regarded as an instance of diastole, since quat- uor is found short in Ennius, and its derivatives qualer, quaterni, quadrupes, &c., have the a short. But Gesner and Vossius correctly maintain, that Virgil should be made the standard of pronunciation with regard to the word in
1. The old reading in Catullus (66, 36), " Si reditum retulisset is, aut in tempore longo, et" is now charged in the best editions to " Si reditum tetulisset," &c.
2. Vol 1, p. 509, ed. Krehl.
:i. Ratnsan'x Lai. Pros , p. 140.
130 f FIGURES OF PROSODY.
question, and that the first syllable should be considered long, as he uniformly makes it.
XII. SYNAPHEIA.1
I. Synapheia is the connecting of verses together, so as to make them run on in continuation, as if the matter were not divided into separate verses.
II. By this arrangement, the initial syllable of a succeed- ing verse has an influence on the final syllable of the pre- ceding, affecting it by the concourse of consonants, by ec- thlipsis, and by synalo3pha.
III. Synapheia chiefly prevailed in anapaestic and Ionic a minore verse, in which strict attention was paid to its ob- servance. Its occurrence in other kinds of verse was occa- sional and limited, and in these kinds it was seldom resort- ed to by good writers.
IV. The following anapaestic lines furnish examples of the effect of synapheia :
Prticeps \ sylvas || montes\que fugit || •
Citus Act\&on, || agiUs\que magls ||
Pede per \ sdltus || et sax\a vagus \\
Mctult | molas || Zephyrts \ plumas. \\ (Seneca.) The short final syllables of fugit, magls, and vagus here become long by position before their own final, and the initial, consonants in the lines that immediately follow.
V. Among other instances of synapheia, the following may be enumerated :
Virg. Jnseritur vero etfatu nucis arbutus Aomlda Et steriles platani molds gessere valentes.
Virg. Jactemur, doceas: ignari fiominumque Zocorw/nlque Erramus, vento hue, et vast is fluctibus acti.
Ilorat. Dissidens plebi, numero beato\mm
Eximit Virtus, populumque falsis.
.
1. Swa^tto, " a junction," from avv and airru.
FEET. 131
Horat. Cur facunda parum deco\ro
Inter verba cadit lingua silentio ?
In the first of these examples, the first line ends with horn, and the i, being regarded as the final syllable of the verse, becomes long. The syllable da combines with Et in the * second line, and by synapheia and synaloepha we have d'et as the initial syllable of this line.
• In like manner, the second line of the second example commences with qu'erramus, the second line of the third with r'eximit, and the second of the fourth with r'inter. In r'eximit, it will be observed, an ecthlipsis operates.
VI. In most cases of synapheia (except in anapaestic and Ionic a minore measures) there is little or no pause at the end of the line.
VII. The rule of synapheia is carefully observed by the Greek tragic writers in their anapaestic systems ; and, as far as our authorities go, by the Latins also. The law of synapheia was discovered by Bentley.1
SECTION XXVII.
OF FEET.
I. A Foot is a combination of two or more syllables, with due regard to their times or quantities.
II. Feet in metre are so called, because by their aid the voice, as it were, moves along through the verse in a meas- ured pace.2
III. Feet are divided into simple and compound. Of the simple feet, four are of two syllables, and eight of three. The compound feet are sixteen in number, and contain each four syllables.
1. Dissertation upon Phalaris, p. 190, cd. Dyce. — For farther pbser- vations respecting synapheia, consult remarks on the Anapasstic and Sapphic measures.
2. " Pes vocalur, sive quia in percussione metrica pcdis pulsus poni- lur tolliturque ; seu quia, ut nos pedibus ingredimur atque progredimur, ita et versus per hos p< les metricos procedit et scandit." (Mar. Viet., p. 2485.)
132 FEET.
SIMPLE FEET OF TWO SYLLABLES.
I. The SPONDKE (Spondceus) consists of two long sylla bles, as omnes, and derives its name from o~ovSi], '• a liba~ tion," because it was much used in the slow, solemn chant which accompanied a sacrifice.1
II. The PVRRHICH (Pyrrhichius) consists of two shoit syllables, as deus, and was so called from the martial Pyr- rhic dance (irvppixT]), which was performed in quick time, and in the measure adapted to which this foot predomina- ted.2 \
III. The TROCHEE (Trochaeus) consists of one long and one short syllable, as servat, and takes its name from rpi- #a>, " to run," or from rpo^og, " a u-heel" in consequence of the tripping character which it communicated to the verses in which it prevailed.3 It was also called by the Greeks %opeiog (from %opof, " a dance"), and by the Lat- ins Chorius or Choraeus, because it is well adapted to dan- cing.4
IV. The IAMBUS (Iambus) consists of one short and one
1 . 'O CTTrovdoiOf , e/c dvo /naKpiJv avyneipcvof e/c/ljyft? de ovrof , 6n kv Tai£ c~ovdaif , uf LTTOIOVVTO Trpbf rovf fieovf , TOIOVTU ftirptf) k^puvro' K. T. /I. (Scliol, HephcEst., p. 82, 4.) According to Diomcdes (fib. 3, p. 473), this foot was called by Numa Pompilius Pontificius, from its being employed in the music 'of the Salic hymns. (Consult Terent. Maur., ed. Sanlen., p. 62.)
2. Hofa/j.iKTi 6e tioxei elvat TJ irvppix'n- "Evo-xhoi -yap avrrjv iratdef bpxovvrai. Tujovf <5e del T& Tro^e/iO elf TO SIUKEIV, KOI elf TO i)TTup.e- vovf <j>evyeiv, fH]6e peveiv, ftTjff aldeioftai Kanovf elvai. (Atkcnaus, 14, p. 629, c.) — Another derivation of the name is from Pyrrhus, the son of Achilles, " gui crebris et cilis exsultaliombus bis breviter prominentem clypeum genibus incumbens, et, per hunc, terrorem hostibus immittcns, infer ebalur, sicut versus illustrat, VTraanidia Trpo6i6<JvTOf." (Diomed., 3, p. 471.) — The Pyrrhich was also called yyepuv, " the leader" because by some it was ranked first among metrical feet. Another name was Ai6po£t;f, which the Latins rendered by Bibrevis. It was likewise call- ed IJapta/ifiof (Par iambus'), " quod minus habeat unum tempus ab lam- bo : Trapu enirn Graeci minus dicunt." (Mar. Viet., p. 2489. — Compare Schol. ad Hephast., p. II.)
3. Mar. Victorm , p. '2487. — Schol., Hephast ., p. 82. — Plntius, p. •2\^5.~Dwmcd.. )>. 474. — Sa.ntcn..ad Ttrcnt. Muiir.,p. 69.
4. Tho names Chorins (or Qkoretui) and Trvchaux were also given tu ti.e tr:bracb.
FEET. 133
long syllable, as pws. Most of the old grammarians would derive it from lambe, the name of a damsel, the slave of Eleusinian Celeus, who amused Ceres by dancing and song when mourning the loss of her daughter Proserpina.'
SIMPLE FEET OF THREE SYLLABLES.
I. The MOLOSSUS (Molossus) consists of three long syl- lables, as dclectant, and derived its name, according to the scholiast on Hephaestion, from Molossus, son of Pyrrhus and Andromache, who- repeated hymns, in which this was the prevailing foot, at the shrine of Dodona in Epirus.*
II. The TRIBRACH (Tribrachys} consists of three short syllables, as melius, whence its name is derived (rpelg, " three" and j3pa#?;c, " short"}. It is also called Chorius,* and sometimes Trochaus*
III. The DACTYL (Dactylus) consists of one long and two short syllables, as carrriina, and derives its name from dd/CTV/lof, " a finger" because each finger consists of one long joint and two short ones.5
IV. The ANAP.EST (Anap&stus) consists of two short syllables and one long, as animos, and it is thus denomina-
1. Plotius, p. 2625.— Schol., Nicand. Alex., v. 130, p. 139.— Schol., Hephast., p. 81. — Eustath. ad Od., 11, 277. — Other derivations may be found in the notes of Santenius to Terentianus Maurus, p. 67, seqq.
2. Others say that it was named from the Molossi in Epirus, who used it in their war-songs. (Diomcd., p. 475.) It was known also by several other names, such as Vortumnus, Extensipes, Hippius, Chaon- ius. (Diomed., I. c.)
3. Schol., Hephast., p. 158.
4. QuintiL, 9, 4. — Terent. Maur., v. 1446. — Sanlen., ad loc.
5. Plotius, p. 2625. — Cledonius, p. 1885.— Victorinus, p. 2488, quo- ted, among other authorities, by Santen (ad Terent. Maur., v. 1406). — Diomedes gives another derivation for the name : " ab Idens Dactylis. Hi namque in insula Creta Jovem cuslodiendo, ne vagilu se parculus proderct, lusus excogitate gcnere, clypeolis aneis inter se concurrentes, tinnilu cris illisi rhylhmica etiam pedis Dactyli compositione celavere vocem infantis." To the same effect the scholiast en Hephaestion re- marks : j) U.TTO TL>V &a.Krvhuv, ov£ £7: i^adofisvrj TTJS y^f dvijuev ?f 'Pea,
ol Js/ca ovref, KOL TOVTU rw fisl.ei adovn^ KOL bp^ovufvoL, TOV
Kpovov JIKUTUV. (Schol , Hephffst., p. 82.) The dactyl was also call- ed Herons, from i's being particularly employed in relating the exploit* of heroes. (Aristi*., R.'ift., 3, 8.— Cic., de 0/at., 3, 47, scq.)
M
134 FEET.
ted from the eerb dvoTrato), " to strike in reverse order" be- cause the order of its syllables is directly the reverse of that observed in the dactyl.1 Hence the anapaest is also called 'AvTidaKTvkog (Antidaclylus) by the Greeks, and Retroac- tus by the Latins.2
V. The BACCHIUS (Bo/t^tof) consists of one short sylla- ble followed by two long ones, as dolores, and it is so call- ed from its having been frequently used by worshippers in the hymns to Bacchus.3
VI. The ANTIBACCH!US ('AvTifiaK^etof)4 consists of two long syllables followed by a short one, as pelluntur, and it takes its name from its opposition to the Bacchius.
VII. The AMPHIMACER ('A/t$£|uaKpo?), or CRETIC (Creti- cus), is composed of one short syllable between two long, or, in other words, of a long, a short, and a long, as cdsti- tas. Both names are mentioned by Quintilian, who makes the second, however, the more usual one. The former of these two appellations comes from d[jupi, " on both sides" and paKpog, " long," while the latter is said to have been given to this foot from its resembling in time the blows struck by the Corybantes in Crete on their brazen shields, to drown the cries of the infant Jove, lest these should reach the ears of Saturn.5
VIII. The AMPHIBRACH (Amphibrachys) consists of o'ne long syllable between two short, or, in other words, a short,
1. " Dictus irapa rot avarraleiv, Kara TO avaTra/.iv avriicpoveiv npbf rov Ao/crvAov, quia recurrcndo repercutiens Dactylum sono reciproco ob- loquilur ei per antistrophen." (Diomed., p. 475.)
2. Diomed., 1. c. — Quintil., 9, 4, 81.
3. A great deal of confusion exists among the old grammarians with regard to the bacchius and antibacchius. — Terentianus Maurus, for el- ample, makes the former consist of two long syllables followed by a
short ( ~), and the antibacchius the reverse of this (~ ). The
common distinction, however, as given in the text, has the authority of Quintilian (9, 4, 82) in its favour. (Consult Santcn. ad Terent. Maur., I. c.)
4. Called also Palinbacchius.
5. Compare note 5 page 133, where a similar etymology is given for the term dactylus.
.FEET. 135
a, long, anil a short; as. amdre. It derives its name from d[i<f>i, " on both sides" and j3pa%vg, " short."1
COMPOUND FEET.
I. The DispoNaEus, or Double Spondee, is composed of four long syllables, or, in other words, of two spondees ; as, inflmtls.
II. The PROCELEUSMATICUS consists of two pyrrhichs, or of four short syllables ; as, hominibus. It is said to have taken its name from Kshevopa, the word of command given by the ballet-master, in double quick time, to accelerate the step.2
III. The DIIAMBUS, or Double Iambus, consists of two iambi ; as, severitas.
IV. The DITROCEUEUS, or DICHOR^ECS, consists of two trochees ; as, permanere.
V. The IONICUS MAJOR (or a Majore) consists of a spon- dee and a pyrrhich, that is, of two long syllables followed by two short ; as, calcanbus.
VI. The IONICUS MINOR (or a Minore) consists of a pyr- rhich and a spondee, that is, of two short followed by two long ; as, proper abdnt.'
The two feet just described are called Ionic, either from their having been favourites with the lonians, or from Ion, their inventor.3 One is called lonicus Major, or a majore, because it begins with the greater quantity, that is, with two long syllables ; and the other is called lonicus Minor,
1. The amphibrach is also called Amphibrems. (Diomed., 3, p. 475.) Victorinus styles it Mesites (p. 1956).
2. 'Hywro 6s KO& EKaarov %6pov elf avrjp, o? hediiov TOtf dA/loif ra T?iq opx^OEUC oy^uetd irpuTOf, d6ot/>opuv rdf TroAe/w/cdf ical avvrovovf KiVT/creir h> roif irpoKe7i.Eva/j.aTiKoif 6$ ra iroTJ^a pv6fj.ol^. (Dion. Hal., Ant. Rom., 1. 7, p. 476.) For some learned observations on the proce- leusmaticus, consult Santen. ad Terent. Maur., v. 1460.
3. Gesner thinks that the Ionic mode of dancing was adapted to these two feet, whence their name. (Thesaur. L. L., s. •».) Plotius, on the contrary, refuarks, " lonici ab lone inventore suo dicti" (p. 2626).
136
FEI;T.
or a minore, because it begins with the less quantity, that is, with two short syllables.1
VII. The CHORIAMBUS consists of a choraeus or trochae- us and an iambus, that is, of two short syllables between two long ; as, nobititas.2
VIII. The ANTISPAST (Antispastus) consists of an iam- bus and a trochee, that is, of two long syllables between two short ; as, secunddre. It derives its name from dvrt- andtt), " to draw asunder" two long syllables being separa- ted or drawn asunder by two short ones.3
IX. The EPITRITUS PRIMUS, or First Epitrit, is compo- sed of an iambus and spondee, and consists of one short syllable and three long ; as, salutantes.
X. The EPITRITUS SECUNDUS, or Second Epitrit, is composed of a trochee and a spondee, and consists of a long, a short, and then two long syllables ; as, cbncitatl.
XI. The EPITRITUS TERTIUS, or Third Epitrit, is com- posed of a spondee and an iambus, and consists of two long syllables, followed by a short and a long ; as, commu- nicant.
XII. The EPITRITUS QUARTUS, or Fourth Epitrit, is composed of a spondee and a trochee, and consists of three long syllables and one short ; as, incantare.
1. The Greek names for these two feet are 6 UKO fieiCovoc. Jlu
and 6 an' VXaaaovoc, 'luviKOf. — The greater Ionic was also called Per- sicus, because Persian histories were written in this measure. Hepai- «df <5e, 6tu TO raf iaropiac; ruf TlepaiKuf TOVTU TV fitrpy •yc (Schol., Hephasf., p. 82.) The minor Ionic was likewise styled Hypo- cyclius ("fnoKVK?.iof. — Schol., Hcphast., I. c.).
2. The choriambus was also called Cyclius (Kti/cAtof), and Hypobac- chius ('YTrofiuKxeiof), and likewise Bacchus a Trochao (Ba/c^etof KOTO, Tpoxalov). It was probably used in the circular dances around the altar of Bacchus, whence the names just mentioned, which are given by the scholiast on Hephaestion (p. 83). Compare Santen. ad Tcrent. M^nur., v. 1487.
3. The antispast was also calleu* Spondcfocus (27rov<5am/cof) and Ba/c- Xeioc, KOTU 'iafi6ov. (Schol., Hcpluest., p. 83.) — This foot appears to have been a favourite with the prose writers. Vossius states (fnst., Oral., 4, 4) that he counted in Cicero's oration for Archias twenty-six instances of an ai.t.spast at fur i-r-d of a rianso. 'Compare Profits, p. 14'92, and Dimni..!:*. \< "n~i
FEET. 1 37
These four last-mentioned feet derive their name from the word i~i~pi~og, which denotes a combination or pro- portion containing some particular number, together with a third part thereof. Thus, in the present instance we have three long syllables, which may be regarded in one sense as the basis of the foot, and besides these we have another syllable, a short one, from the relative position of which last in each of the four feet are derived the names of first, second, third, and fourth epitrits. In other words, we have three syllables, with a third of these, namely, one syllable, added thereto (rpfT^-eTri).1
XIII. The P^:ON PRIMUS, or First Paeon, is composed of a trochee and a pyrrhich, and consists of one long syl- lable followed by three short ; as, confuere.
XIV. The P.EON SECUNDUS, or Second P<eon, is compo- sed of an iambus and a pyrrhich, and consists of a short and a long, and then two short syllables ; as, resolvere.
XV. The PJEON TERTICS, or Third P<son, is composed of a pyrrhich and a trochee, and consists of two short syl- lables followed by a long and a short ; as, soctdre.
XVI. The P.EON QUARTUS, or Fourth Peon, is compo- sed of a pyrrhich and an iambus, and consists of three short syllables and one long ; as, celeritas.
The P&on, according to some authorities,2 derived its name from Paeon, an ancient poet, its alleged inventor. According to other and better accounts, however, this foot was so denominated from its having been particularly used in the hymns to Apollo.3 Hence also, besides the appel-
1. Cicero renders e^irpiTOf, which Plato uses in his Timaeus (p. 36, a., ed. Stcph.), by the Latin sesquitertius (Tim., c. 7), a term likewise employed by Augustinus (de Mus., 2, p. 76). — Aulus Gellius (18, 14) defines an epitritus as follows : " Epitnius est qui habet totitm aliqucm •numerum, et ejusdcm partem lerliam." (Compare Macrob., in Sotnn. Scip., 2, 2.) The scholiast on Hephaestion has also the following: 'Em'rptrof upidfidf Aeyerai, 6 upi6/nov riva l^uv kv iavru, nai TO rpirov TOVTOV. *
2. Plotius, p. 2626. — Isidor., Orig., 1, 16, p. 830.
3. OI fif 'AiroAXwva <5e ypa^ovre f , rai nodi rotJ-ry, rci Tlaiuvi,
M 2
138 FEET.
lation of Paeon, it received that of Paan.1 — The paeon is directly opposed to the epitrit. In the latter there is one short syllable with three long ones ; in the former, one long with three short. Thejirst, second, third, and fourth paeons are so named from *.he relative situation of the long sylla- ble in each.
To the list of co.npoxind feet are sometimes added the following :
I. The DOCHMIUS (4o%/uof), composed of an antispast and a long syllable, and consisting of five syllables, namely, a short, two long, a short, and a long ; as, aberraverant.2
II. The MESOMACER (M.eo6[i,aKpog), composed of a pyr- rhich and a dactyl, and containing also five syllables, namely, two short, a long, and two short ; as, avldisstmus*
The following table exhibits the feet, both simple and com- pound, in the order in which they have just been described.
SIMPLE FEET OF TWO SYLLABLES.
t 1. SPONDEE
\ 2. PYRRHICH ~ ~
( 3. TROCHEE — ~
f 4. IAMBUS ~ —
rat. (Schol., Hephtest., p. 12.) Compare the remark of another scho- liast : Toi>f iraiavcLf pdovref kxpuvro avroif [Ilatucri] ol ird^aioL. (Schol. , Hermog., p. 394.)
1. Arislot., Rhet., 3, 8.— Cic., de Oral., 1, 59.— Santen. ad Terent. Hour., v. 1532.
2. The Dochmius takes its name from <56;tyutof, " obliquus" in allu- sion to the irregularity that marks the order or succession of its compo- nent times ; or, in the words of an ancient writer, 6iu TO TtoiKihov /cat avouoiov, K<U TO pi) KOT' evdv tieupeladai TT/V frvdftOTroitav. (Aristid., de Mus., 1, p. 39.) — This foot is sometimes called Dochimus, but incor- rectly. (Erncsti ad Cic., Oral., 64. — Santen. ad Terent. Maur., v. 1551, p. 130, seq.)
3. From /ieerof, "mddle," and //a/cpof, "long," the name being de- rived from the position of the long syllable, in the middle, between two •hor* on each side.
FEET. 139
SIMPLE FEET OF THREE SYLLABLES.
1. MOLOSSUS .......
2. TRIBRACH
3. DACTYL ,
4. ANAPAEST ........
5. BACCHIUS ........
6. ANTIBACCHIUS . . . . .
7. AMPHIMACER
8. AMPHIBRACH
COMPOUND FEET. FOUR UlTH THE SAME FOOT DOUBLED.
1. DlSPOND^US
2. PROCELEUSMATIC ;s
3. DlTROCH-ffiUS
4. DlIAMBUS .
FOUR OF CONTRARY FEET.
1. GREATER IONIC ....
2. MINOR IONIC . . . . .
3. CHORIAMBUS
4. ANTISPAST
FOUR tN WHICH LONG TIMES EXCEED.
1. FIRST EPITRIT
2. SECOND EPITRIT
3. THIRD EPITRIT . . . . FOURTH EPITRIT
FOUR IN WHICH SHORT TIMES EXCEED.
'l. FIRST P^EON
2. SECOND PJEON
3. THIRD P^EON . . . . .
4. FOURTH
TWO OTHER COMPOUND FEET, OF FIVE SYLLABLES.
1 DOCHMIUS . . . . . . . ~ w —
2 MESOMACEE -^ ~, - _ ^
•
140 METRE.
SECTION XXVIII.
OF METRE.
I. METRE, in the general acceptation of the word, signi- fies a combination of verses belonging to the same or to different classes, which succeed each other in a fixed or- der. When we speak of Dactylic metre, Iambic metre, &.C., the word metre is employed in this general sense, and is then synonymous with verse.
II. But a metre, in the technical and restricted sense, signifies either a single foot in a verse, or a combination of two consecutive feet, according to circumstances.
HI. In Latin poetry, the metres employed are the follow- ing:
1. DACTYLIC.
2. ANAPJESTIC.
3. IAMBIC.
4. TROCHAIC.
5. CHORIAMBIC.
6. IONIC.
IV. These metres have received their respective names from the frequent recurrence in them of some particular foot ; and it has been supposed that each species was ori- ginally made up of those feet only from which it is denom- inated, but that others, equal in time, were afterward ad- mitted under certain restrictions.
V. Metres, however, are often called also after the name of some celebrated poet, who used a particular species of verse ; as, Sapphic, Anacreontic, Hipponactic, &c.
VI. Metres are likewise classified according to the num- ber of feet or measures which they contain. Thus, a verse
of seven metres is called Heptameter. " six " " Hexameter,
"five " " Pentameter.
METRE. 141
of four metres is called Tetrameter. " three « " Trimeter.
" two " " Dimeter.
" one " " Manometer.
VII. In Anapaestic, Iambic, and Trochaic verses, a mefre consists of £«;0 feet ; but in the other kinds of verse a sm- gle foot constitutes a metre.
VIII. Thus, in Anapaestic, Iambic, and Trochaic versifica- tion,
a Manometer contains two feet.
Dimeter " four "
Trimeter " six "
Tetrameter " eight "
Pentameter " ten "
Hexameter " twelve "
Heptameter1 " fourteen "
On the other hand, in Dactylic, Choriambic, and a# oZAer measures except the three just mentioned, a Manometer contains one foot. Dimeter " two feet.
Trimeter " three "
Tetrameter " ybwr " Pentameter " _/ive " Hexameter " *za; " Heptameter " seven "
IX. A combination of two consecutive feet is sometimes termed a dipodia (617706 ia) or syzygy (pv^vyia). Most usually, however, the combination of two dissyllabic feet is called a dipodia, and that of two trisyllabic, or a dissyl- labic and trisyllabic, a syzygy.
X. The conjunction of two feet is often likewise termed c base?
1. Some of these, of course, do not occur. They are given, however, to illustrate the rule laid down.
2. Diorned.,?. 501.— Mar. Viet., p. 2489.
142 • ISOCHRONOUS FEET.
SECTION XXIX.
OF ISOCHRONOUS FEET.
I. By ISOCHRONOUS (or even-timed1} feet are meant those that are interchangeable in metre.
II. In order to ascertain what feet are thus interchange- able, recourse must be had to the arsis and thesis.
HI. As has already been observed,2 that part of the foot which receives the ictus, the stress of the voice, or beat of the time, is called arsis, or " elevation." The rest of the foot is termed thesis, or " depression."
IV. The natural place of the arsis is the long syllable of the foot, and hence in the iambus it falls on the second syl- lable ; in the trochee, on the first ; while the spondee and tribrach leave its place alike uncertain.
V. The fundamental foot of a verse, however, deter- mines the arsis for the other feet, and hence the spondee, in iambic and anapaestic verse, has the arsis on the second syllable, but in trochaic and dactylic on the first.
VI. So, again, the tribrach, when it stands for the iam- bus, is to be pronounced ~ ~ ~ ; but when it stands for the trochee, ^ ~ ~.
VII. Now the ancients considered those feet only iso- chronous which were capable of being divided into parts that were equal in time ; so that a long syllable should have either a corresponding long syllable or two short ones.3
VIII. The following scheme will exemplify this more clearly, the place of the arsis being denoted, as above (VI.), by a mark resembling that of the acute accent.
( Iambus . ) Tribrach
Trochee Tribrach
1. 'IffOf, "equal," and ^povof, "time."
2. Page 106, note 1.
3 Daiocs, Misc. Crit., p. 62, scqq., ed. Kidd,
ISOCHRONOUS FEET. 143
V Dactyl . . — I ~ ^ ( Anapaest / Spondee . — | — ( Spondee
IX. By this we perceive that the iambus and the trochee are each interchangeable with the tribrach, and that the dactyl, spondee, and anapaest are interchangeable with each other.
X. In like manner it will appear that the iambus and the trochee are not interchangeable, and that an iambus never admits a trochee into iambic verse, nor a trochee an iambun into trochaic verse. Thus,
Iambus
Trochee ....
Here it will be perceived that the long syllable of the iam- bus has neither a correspondent long syllable in the tro- chee, nor two short ones in the same. And the case is precisely similar with the long syllable of the trochee, which has nothing to correspond to it in the iambus. Hence the two feet are not interchangeable or isochronous.1
XI. Again, it may be shown in the same way that the spondee and amphibrach are also not interchangeable. Thus,
Spondee . Amphibrach . . ^ -
N
Here, in whatsoever way the amphibrach be divided, each division contains either more or less than the correspond- ent part, of the spondee. Hence the two feet are not iso- chronous ; and, for the same reason, the amphibrach is not isochronous with the dactyl or anapaest.
1. For this reason the scholiast on Hephaestion calls the iambic and trochaic measures avrnradovvra fterpa, and Tricha remarks, avrnrafiris tiol olov VTTEvavTiOf T& id/udu 6 rpoxaiof. (Schol. ad Hcphatt., p. 76. — Trich., de Melr., p. 9, ed. Herm. — Compare Dawey, Misc. Grit., p. 103, ed. Kidd.)
144 VERSE.
SECTION XXIX.
OF VERSE.
I. A Verse is a certain number of feet disposed in a reg- ular order, and forming a line of poetry.
II. A Hemistich' is, properly speaking, a half verse ; the name, however, is commonly applied to either portion of a hexameter line divided at the pcnthemimeris ; as,
^Ere ciere viros, || Marlemque accendere cantu.
III. Scanning is the dividing of a verse into the feet of which it is composed, and the assigning of their proper quantity to the respective syllables of each foot.
IV. Verses are denominated Acatalectic, Catalectic, Brachycatalectic, ffypercatalectic (or Hypermetcr), and Acephalous.
V. An Acatalectic verse is one that is complete in all its parts, and comes to a full termination ; as the following, which is Iambic Dimeter Acatalectic.2
Musas | Joins || suntfll\tae. ||
VI. A Catalectic verse is one that wants a syllable at the end to complete the measure ; as the following, which is Iambic Dimeter Catalectic.3
Muses | Jovem |1 cane\bant. — ||
VII. A Brachycatalectic verse is that which wants two syllables at the end to complete the measure ; as the fol- lowing, which is Iambic Dimeter Brachycatalectic.*
Musee | Jovis I! gnatae \ -- ||
1. From fjfj.1, " half," and crt^of, " a verse."
2- Acatalectic, from uKarahijicTiitoc; (a and Karakfiyu, to stop), i. e., not having an abrupt termination. Compare Hephestion (c. 4, p. 24, cd. Gaisf.): 'Aicarafo/jcra *a?.«rat fie~pa baa rbv TE?.EV-CUOV iroda oAo-
3. Catalectic^ from KaraA^Jtruroc, whiqfr is itself a derivative from KarciMiyu, denotes verses that stop before they reach their full ending. Compare the language of Hcphaestion (/. c.) : KoraAjjicrwca <Je 6aa fu-
4. ~BpaxvKara'/»i]KTa 6e Ka&eiTai, aaa axb diirodias -at. ( Hepkaut. , I. c.)
DACTYLIC MEASURES. 145
VIII. A Hypcrcatalectic or Hypermeter verse is that which has a syllable at the end beyond the complete measure ; as the following, which is Iambic Dimeter Hypercatalectic or Hypermeter. *
Musae | soror\\es sunt \ Minervlla:.
IX. An Acephalous verse is that which wants a syllable at the beginning ; as the following, which is Acephalous Iambic Dimeter.2
Non | ebur || neque ~aur\eum. H
SECTION XXX.
DACTYLIC MEASURES.
I. The only feet admissible in dactylic verses are the dactyl and spondee..
II. Originally all the feet were dactyls, but the spondee was afterward admitted, as being an isochronous foot, and in order to impart more gravity and dignity to the line.
III. It will be remembered that in dactylic verses a sin- gle foot constitutes a metre ; and hence a dactylic hexam- eter contains six feet, a dactylic pentameter jive, a dactylic tetrameter four, &c.
IV. In treating of the dactylic, as of other measures, we will commence with -the simplest in use, and end with those of the greatest length.
1. DACTYLIC DIMETER ACATALECTIC, or ADONIC.
I. This measure consists of two feet, a dactyl and spon- dee ; as,
Terruit \ urbem. Visere- \ mantes.
II. The dactylic dimeter, or Adonic, is usually subjoined
1. "fTrepKaTa^.TjKTa 6e oaa Trpdf TU T&KM Trpoaekade (Hcphast., I. c.) Some call it Hypcracatalcctic e., going beyond acatalecfir..
9. Acephalous, from d/t£'(?a/lof, " without a head" (u and
N
146 DACTYLIC MEASURES,
to three Sapphic lines, thus forming what is called the Sap- phic stanza, of which an account will be given elsewhere.
III. In tragic choruses, the Adonic is arbitrarily added to any number of Sapphics, without regard to uniformity.1
IV. This measure was called Adonic (Adonium metrum — 'Adomov fterpov) because employed originally by the Greeks in the lamentations for Adonis.2
V. Sapplio is said to have composed entire poems in this measure, now lost. Terentianus Maurus, from whom we derive this information, has also left us a short piece of this kind,3 and another of thirty-one successive Adonics occurs in Boethius.4 »
2. DACTYLIC TRIMETER CATALECTIC.
I. This measure, also called Archilochian Penthemime- ris, is an heroic penthemimeris, or the first five half-feet of a dactylic hexameter. In other words, it consists of two feet and a half.
II. Horace, who uses this verse in one of his odes (4, 7) alternately with the dactylic hexameter, uniformly has two dactyls and a semifoot ; as,
Horat. Arbon\busque com\ee. Id. Flumind \ pra:tere\unt. Id. Ducere \ nuda chor\os. Id. Quiz rapit \ hora dt\em, &c.
III. Ausonius, however, who has a poem of fifty-seven lines,5 all in this measure, sometimes makes the first foot a spondee, and in two instances uses a spondee also in the
1. Scnec., (Ed., 110, seqq. — Id., Troad., 1010, seqq. — Id., Thyest., 646, seqq., &c.
2. Mar. Viet , p. 2564.— Plotius, p. 2640.
3. Terent. MJLUT., v. 2160. — Some commentators think that the words ?Q rbv "\6uvtv, cited by Plotius (p. 26-10), belonged to the Adonic poem of Sappho mentioned by Terentiauus. (Santcn. ad Ter. Maur., I. c.)
4. De Cons. Phil., 1, raetr. 7. 6. Auaon., Prof., 10.
DACTYLIC MEASURES. 147
second place. But the spondee, in either case, is a dispar- agement to the verse, particularly in the latter.
Auson. Doctrl\na exigu\us.
Id. et ti\berti\na.
Id. et tu | Concor\di.
3. DACTYLIC TRIMETER ACATALECTIC.
I. The Dactylic Trimeter Acatalectic consists of the last three feet of a dactylic hexameter ; that is, the first foot may be either a dactyl or spondee, but the second must be a dactyl, and the third a spondee ; as,
Horat. Grato \ Pyrrha sub \ dntro.
II. But the lines which are usually thus denominated are with greater propriety included in the class of choriam- bics, and ranked with Pherecratics.
4. DACTYLIC TRIMETER WITH A BASE.
I. This measure consists of two dactyls, followed by a spondee, with a base (that is, one long, or two short sylla- bles) prefixed to the beginning of the line. — Ausonius will afford an example.1 Thus,
Modu\lammc \ rmma \ tristt,
Tacit\um sine hon\ore re\linquat,
Super | indole \ cujus ad \ ulli,
Mag\n<K bona \ copia \ laudis. •
5. DACTYLIC TRIMETER HYPERCATALECTIC. I. This measure consists of three dactyls, and a syllable over. The following example of its use is taken from Au- sonius.2
Pdrva e£i\amfmt \ Idatt\a, Nomine \ pradita \ qua Paphi\ji,
1. Parent., 17, 1.
2. Ib., 28.
148 DACTYLIC MEASURES.
Et speci\em meru\it Vener\is, Qua: genit\a est mthi \ pane so\ror , Fitia | namfuit \ lieec ami/!«, Quam cele\brdt sub hon\ore pi\o, Noenia \ carmine \funerc\o. II A variety of this measure is found in Boethius (3,
mett 6), which admits of a spondee" in the first two places.
Thus,
Hlc claus\lt membr\ts anim\os. Onus e\riim re\rum pater \ est. Ni viti\ts pej\orafov\ens. III. The Dactylic Trimeter Hypercatalectic is called by
some Tetrameter Catalectic.
6. DACTYLIC TETRAMETER MEHJRUS, or FALISCAN.'
I. This measure consists of the last four feet of an ordi- nary hexameter, except that the concluding foot is an iam- bus instead of a spondee. Thus,
Sept. Ser. Vitis et \ ulmus ut\l simul j eant. Id. Liberal \ arva pri\us fruti\cibus.
Boeth. Fdlce rub\os fili\cemque re\secdt.
II. The dactyl was preferred in the first three places, though the spondee was nevertheless admissible into the first and second.
• 1. The name Meiurus is from the Greek : „ UTTO rov pfiovadai TIJV oiipdv, quod vtluti cauda minor et mutilus sit." (Forcelt., Lex.) Dio- medes calls such verses " Ecaudes" (3, p. 499), and Marios Victorious styles them Ttliambi (p. 2512). — The origin of the name Faliscan has been much disputed. The form Phaliscus, given in some editions of Terentianus Maurus, as well as Paliscus (Avgustin.. dc Mus., 4, p. 83), are erroneous. It is probable that the appellation Faliscan was given to this species of verse from the poet Annianus, who frequently employ- ed it, and wha was of the nation of the Falisci. (Santen. ail Tcrent. Afflur, 1998.) Victorinus states that this measure was called by the Greeks Calabrion (p. 2f>78). — Servius, the grammarian, stylos Fnliscan poems " docta," the reason for which appellation is unknown. (Scrv., in Centimetr., p. 1824.)
DACTYLIC MEASURES. 149
7. DACTYLIC TETRAMETER A POSTERIORE, or SPONDAIC TETRAMETER.
I. This measure consists of the last four feet of a dac- tylic hexameter, and hence it is called Tetrameter a poste- riore, because supposed to be taken from the latter part of an hexameter line (a posteriore parte versus hexametri).
II. In other words, the first two feet of this measure may be either dactyls or spondees, the third is generally a dac- tyl, rarely a spondee, but the fourth is invariably a spondee. Thus,
Horat. Ibirnus, \ o soci\l cormt\esque. Certus e\nim prd\mlsit Ap\dllo. Me nee \ tarn pad\ens Ldce\dcemon. O Jort\es pej\ordque \ passi.
III. In the following line a spondee is found in the third foot, preceded by a dactyl, answering to the spondaic line of the hexameter ; and in such a case as this, the prece- ding foot ought always to be a dactyl, or the line will be too heavy. Thus,
Horat. Mensor\em cohi\bent Arch\ytd.
8. DACTYLIC TETRAMETER A PRIORE, or ALCMANIAN.*
I. This measure consists of the first four feet of a dac- tylic hexameter, with merely this difference, that the fourth or last foot is always a dactyl. And it is called a priore because taken from theirs* part of an hexameter (a priore parte versus hexametri). Thus,
Boe'th. Lummt\busque pn\or redi\it vigor. Id. Desuper | in terr\dm nox \ fund/itur. Auson. Dice\bas in | me ma\tertera.
II. The Dactylic Tetrameter a priore is also called the Alcmanian Tetrameter, from the Greek poet Alcman, by whom it was frequently employed.1
III. This metre was much used in tragic choruses.
1. Serv., p. 1820, ed. Putsch. N 2
150 DACTYLIC MEASURES.
9. PHAL.ECIAN DACTYLIC PENTAMETER.
I. This measure, which is called Phalaecian on the au- thority of Terentianus,1 consists of a dactylic penthemime- ris (two feet and a half), followed by a dactylic dimeter or Adonic ; as,
Boe'th. Vlse\bdt getidfe || slderd \ brurricK.
Id. Heu qudm \ prascipit\l [\ jnersd pro\fundo.
II. Like the ^Eolic Pentameter, this species of Phalae- lian verse admits a trochee in the first place ; as,
Senec. Arvd \ mutdn\tes || quasque Mai\dtis.
Id. Allu\it gent\es \\frlgldd \fluctu.-
Id. Quasque \ despect\dt || verfice \ summo.
III. Besides the trochee, Boethius uses the iambus in the first and second places ; as,
Htc e\mm ca«|sa,s || cernere \ promptum est. HKc | ldten\tes || pectord \ turbant. Cunctd | qua rar\a || provehlt \ atas. Stupet | cum subi\tls 11 mobile \ vulgus.
IV. A Phalaecian Dactylic Pentameter may be formed from an hexameter, by striking out the fourth foot and the latter half of the third. Thus,
Hex. At re\glna grdv\ijdm [ dudum \ saucid \ curd. " Consed\ere du\ces et \ vulgl \ stdnte cor\ona.
" Sdnguine\dque mdn\u crepi\tdntid \ concutit \ drma.
Phalaec. At re\gind grdv\l \\ saucid \ curd. \ " Consed\ere du\ces || stdnte cor\ond. \ " Sdnguine\dque mdn\u || concutit \ drma.
1. " Namque hie de genere est Phalccciorum." (Ter. Maur., r. 1946.) The name is derived from that of the poet Phalaecus, who wab said to have been the inventor of this species of verse, along with the others that went under this general appellation. The true form is Pha- kecian, not Phaleucian. (Santen. ad '"cr. Maur., v. 2545.)
DACTYLIC MEASURES.
151
V. Those Phalaecian Ifties in which neither the trochee nor iambus occur, may be scanned as Choriambic Tetram- eters Catalectic. Thus,
Vtse\bat geltdce \ sidera brumfe
Jam nunc \ bldnda melds \ carpe Dto\ne.
10. ^EOLIC PENTAMETER.
I. The JEolic Pentameter, so called from its native dia- lect, was invented, it is said, by Sappho, a native of the ^Eolic island of Lesbos.1
II. It consists of four dactyls, preceded by a spondee, a trochee, or an iambus. In other words, it is a Dactylic Tetrameter Acatalectic with a base.2 Thus,
Terent. Maur. Cordt \ quando fu\tsse sl\bi cantt \ dtthida Id. edt\dit tuba \ terribi\lem soriit \um procul.
11. DACTYLIC PENTAMETER.
I. The Dactylic Pentameter was so called in consequence of the manner in which it was scanned by some of the old grammarians, who viewed it as consisting of five continu- ous feet, namely, two dactyls or spondees, followed by a spondee and two anapaests, according to the following scale :
|
1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
|
— ^ ^ |
— ^ *^ |
|
^x <_» — |
•wx ^ |
Frigidi\us glaa\e pect\us amantfis erdt. Nil mtht | rescrlb\ds dt\tamen tps\e verii. Lassa\ret vidu\ds pend\ula tel\a manus. Flebdm \ success\u pos\se cdre\re dolos.
1. Terent. Maur., v. 2148. — Compare Mar. Viet., p. 2559.— Plot., p. 2636.— Scrv., p. 1824. — The 29th Ictyl of Theocritus is in this measure: Oivoc, | w <pft£ \ ircii, 7ieyl\Tai not u\^.u8tu, \ K.T.%. Foroth er examples, consult Gaisford ad Hephast., p. 275.
2. Terent. Maur., v. 1722.— Diomed., p. 502.— Qumtil., 9, 4.
152
DACTYLIC MEASURES.
II. Hephsestion, however, who has been followed by al- most all modern scholars, regards it as composed of two dactylic penihemimers. In other words, the first two feet may be either dactyls or spondees ; then comes a long syl- lable, to which succeed two dactyls, followed by another long syllable.1 Thus,
|
1 |
2 |
3 n 4 |
5 |
6 |
|
— V -^ |
— _ -^ |
-II — |
— ^ •-, |
— |
ldci\e \\ pectus dm\dniis er\dt. Nil mihi \ rescrib\ds fl altamen \ ipse venjt. Ldssd\ret vidu\ds |j penduld \ tela mdn\us Flebdm | success\u \\ posse cdr\ere dol\os.
III. That this last is the proper view to take of the struc- ture of the pentameter seems certain from the fact, that a division of the verse takes place invariably at the end of the fifth half-foot, as well in the Greek as in the Latin wri- ters.
IV. Ovid is considered the model of this species of verse among the Romans, and the wonderful smoothness and melody of his compositions are the result of close atten- tion to a number of minute observances, which were alto- gether neglected by the Greeks, and by their imitators, Ca- tullus, Tibullus, and Propertius.2 These rules will now be given.
Rules for the Structure of Dactylic Pentameters.
I. The pentameter must always be so constructed as to have the caesural pause after the penthemimeris, and thus
1. Tot; <5c daicrvXiKOv irevdqfitpepovf 6tf ?.a[i6avoph>ov ytverai TO fXf}'£tov, AC. T. A.. (Hcphtzst., p. 92, cd. Gaisf.) Compare the language of the scholiast (p. 186): BcArtov rfe OVTU fterpelv hrel xai ctf dvo diy- prtrai rrevdjjuiuepij, K. T. X.
2. Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 184. — Tote, Remarks on Dactylic Pen- tameters, in the Classical Journal.
DACTYLIC MEASURES. 153
oe divisible into two equal portions of two feet and a half each. And the pause ought always to be strictly the last syllable in a word, and not fall on any syllable before this.1 Hence the following line is faulty :
Inter nostros gentilis oberrat equus.
2. It is also deemed a blemish for the caesura to fall af- ter a syllable which has become the last by elision ; as in the following lines from Catullus :
Quam veniens una atque || altera rursus hyems, Troia virum et virtutum || omnium acerba cinis. Nee desistere amare || omnia si facias.
3. If the first caesural syllable be a monosyllable, which ought not to happen frequently, it must be preceded by a long monosyllable, or by a word of the same time, i. e., a word consisting of two short syllables ; as,
Ovid. Et mihi si non vis || par cere, parce meis. Id. Tu dominuS) tu vir, || tu mihi f rater eras. Id. Nulla tibi sine me || gaudiafacta neges. Id. ProRierito magis est || iste pudendus amor. An exception to this rule, however, is made when the monosyllable is est, and the word before it suffers elision. Such lines as the following are not uncommon :
Ovid. Litteraqite invisa est, || hac mea parte tibi. Id. Quo nisi consilio est || usa puella tuo. But such as the following are very rare in Ovid : Sed sic inter nos || tit latuisse velint. Quod licet inter vos || nomen habete meum. Justaque quamvis est, || sit minor ira dei. Quaere suburbana hie II sit. mihi terra locum.
4. The last word of a dactylic pentameter is, in the great majority of instances, a dissyllable in Ovid. We oc-
1. There is no exception to this, even in Greek, except in a proper name ; as,
'leou vvv 6f biooKOvpitieu yeverj. (Callim., frag, cxcii.)
154 DACTYLIC MEASURES.
casionally find est in this place, preceded by a dissyllable which suffers elision ; as,
Hie est cujus amans hospita capta dolo est. Nee repetor ; cessas, iraque lenta tua est. More rarely two monosyllables ; as,
Pr&mia si studio consequor ista, sat est. But such a line as the following must be considered al- together unworthy of imitation ;
Omnis an in magnos culpa deos scelus est.1 . 5. The trisyllabic ending, although very common in the Greek poets, in Catullus, &c., may be said to be altogeth- er excluded from the Ovidian pentameter. We find one example only in his earlier works, and five others in the Epistles from Pontus, which, together with the Tristia, were composed while the poet was plunged in the deepest despondency, and bear tokens of less accurate revision than his other productions.
Qua tamen externis dandaforent generis.2
Ne non peccarim, mors quoque non faciet.8 Quolibet ut saltern rurefrui liceat.4 Aut quod saspe soles, exigis ut recitent.5 Vix excusari posse miki videor.6 Spectarem, qualis purpura te tegeret.7
6. The quadrisyllable ending is likewise very uncommon, except in the Tristia and Epistles from Pontus. We have, however, two or three examples in his other works.
Undo simul miserum vitaque deseruit.8 , Et circumfusis invia fluminibus.9 Cantabat m&stis tibia funeribus.19
1. Odd, Ep. ex Pont., 1, 6, 26. 2. Ovid, Heroid., 14, 62.
3. Id., Ep. ex Pont., 1, 1, 66. 4. Id. Ep. ex Pont., 1,8,40.
5. Id. ib., 3, 5, 40. 6. Id. ib., 3, 6, 46.
7. Id. ib., 4, 9, 26. 8. Heroid., 19, 202.
9. Fasti, 5, 582.
10. 76., 6. 660 — Other examples are f;ven in Ramsay, p. 184.
DACTYLIC MEASURES. • 155
7. The quiuquesyllabic ending is still more rare than the quadrisyllable.
Lis est cum forma magna pudicitise.1 Nee sedeo duris torva superciliis.2
8. As to the kind of words that conclude the line, they ought to possess some emphasis. They are usually nouns, the personal and possessive pronouns, or verbs. Adjec- tives do not often occur in this place, adverbs still more rarely, and less frequently than either, the present participle active.
9. Elisions should be resorted to sparingly, especially in the second half of the verse, where they are by no means harmonious. They may be allowed in the first of the two dactyls ; as,
Ultimus est aliqua decipere arte labor. Incipis, incipiet desinere esse mea. But when they fall on the second dactyl, the melody of the line is destroyed ; as,
Quis scit an haec sasvas tigridas insula habet ?3
10. At the beginning of the verse it is better to have a dactyl followed by a spondee than the reverse. Thus,
Vix Priamus tanti totaque Trojafuit. Res est solKciti plena timoris amor.
V. Dactylic pentameters are never found in a system by themselves, in the classic writers (unless seven lines in Ausonius can be taken as an exception), but always in com- bination with hexameters.
VI. Hexameters and pentameters, placed alternately, constitute what is termed the Elegiac Distich.4
1. Heroid., 16,288.
2. 16., 17, 16. — For other instances, consult Ramsay, p. 184.
3. 16., 10, 86.
4. The Greeks employed this combination of the two measures in war-songs, hymns, and epigrams or inscriptions ; the Romans in epi- grams, epistles, and amv',ory poetry.
156 DACTYLIC MEASURES.
VII. The name of Elegy (TEAeyof) was first applied to the alternating hexameter and pentameter in the time of the Greek poet Simonidea ; whether it was that he himself in- troduced the name, or whether the mournful and plaintive nature of his themes justified this appellation from others.1
VIII. Ovid, in some of his elegiac pieces, employs oc- casionally a species of metrical echo, if we may so term it, the second half of the pentameter being a repetition of the commencement of the preceding hexameter, either pre- cisely the same words being used, or else a slight change being made in them. Thus,
Militat omnis amans, et habet sua castra Cupido : Attice crede mthi, militat omnis amans.2 '
Graia juvenca venit, qu<B te patriarnque domumque Perdat. lo prohibe ! Graia juvenca venit?
Invida vestis eras, qua tarn bona crura tegebas ; Quoque magis species, invida vestis eras.4
Ars tua, Tiphy,jacet, si non sit in aequore fluctuf Si valeant homines, ars tua Phoebe jacet.s
Auspiciis animisque patris, puer, arma movebis, Et vinces animis auspiciisque patris.6
IX. Martial also, in one of his epigrams (9, 98), has six consecutive distichs, each commencing and ending with the words rumpitur invidia?
1. This combination of hexameters and pentameters is said to have been invented by Callinus, and applied by him to martial themes. It was not called lAcyof at first, but I— of, the latter of which terms was afterward confined to heroic verse, when Simonides brought in the name Iteyof, and along with it the handling of plaintive themes in this species of measure.
2. Am., 1. 9, 1 3. Her., 5, 117.
4 Am, 3, 2, 27. ' 5 Tnst., 4, 3, 77.
6. A. A, 1, 191.
7 This species of play upon words gave rise, in later ages, when lasti- had become thoroughly corrupted, to entire poems. Verses of thi»
DACTYLIC MEASURES. 157
Rumpitur invidia quidam, carissime Juli, Quod me Roma legit, rumpilur invidia.
Rumpitur invidia, quod turba semper in omni, Monstramur digito, rumpitur invidia, &c.
12. DACTYLIC HEXAMETER.
I. The Dactylic or Heroic* Hexameter was considered to be the most ancient as well as the most dignified species of verse, and was said to have been invented by Phemonoe, the first priestess of the Delphian Apollo, who, when in- spired by the god, was wont to chant his oracles in this measure.1
II. The origin of dactylic versification, however, is to be traced back to the earliest periods of the Greek language, and connects itself with the peculiar mode of intonation that characterized the JEolic tribes.2
kind were called " Versus Lyrici, Ophites, and Serpcnlini." Some of these pieces may be found collected in the Miscell. Obs. Nov. (vol. 5, p. 475, scqq.). Wernsdorff gives in his collection (Poet. Lat. Min., vol. 3, p. 268) a poem of this kind by Pentadius, " De Adventu Veris," the commencement of which is as follows :
Sentio fugit hyems, Zephyrisque moventibus orbem Jam tepet Eurus aquis ; sentio fugit hyems^
Parturit omnis ager, prasentit terra calorem, Germinibusque novis parturit omnis ager.
Lata vireta tument, foliis sese induit arbor, Vallibus apricis Iceta vireta tument, &c.
1. Schott. ad Prod., p. 18.— Voss., Inst. Poll., 3, 3, 2.— Fdbnc., Bibl. Gr., vol. 1, p. 154.— Plin., H. N., 7, 5G.—Pausan., 10, 5.— Schol. ad Eurip., Orest., 1093.
2. Goltling's Greek Accentuation, § 2, seq. — The tendency in the ./Eolic pronunciation was to throw the accent back on the root, or as near to it as possible, so that the dactylic rhythm, with the arsis on the first syllable of the foot, could easily and naturally arise from this kind of pronunciation. As the JEolic dialect Was spoken at Delphi, the na- tive city of Phemonoe, the two accounts just given may easily be recon- ciled.— The most ancient hexameters known are those which Herodotus informs us (5, 59) that he himself saw at Thebes, in the temple of the Ismenian Apollo, inscribed on certain tripods, consecrated by Amphitry- on, and by two other princes of the 13th or 14th century before our era. It is more than probable, however, that the historian was here imposed upon by the priests. (R'dhrad Herod., I. c. — Wolf, Prolcgom. ad Horn , p. Iv.)
o
158 DACTYLIC MEASURES.
•
III. The dactylic hexameter was introduced into Latium by the poet Ennius, who first discarded the rude Saturnian measure of his predecessors.1
IV. This species of verse is also called the Heroic, from its having been selected by both the Greeks and Romans as the proper medium for heroic or epic themes. It was also employed in didactic and satiric compositions.
V. The Dactylic Hexameter consists, as its name im- ports, of six feet, whereof the fifth is usually a dactyl, and the sixth always a spondee, while each of the other four feet may be either a dactyl or a spondee, at the pleasure of the writer ; as,
Virg. Sic abe\unl rede\untque me\t vqri\antque tim\ores. Catull. Et quam\vis te\cum mult\d con\jungerer \ usu. Virg. Talis et \ ipse ju\bam cer\vice eff\udit e\quina. Id. Collect\umque frem\ens volv\it sub \ naribus \ Ignem.
VI. Sometimes, however, in a solemn, majestic, or mourn- ful description, or in expressing astonishment, consternation, vastness of size, &c., a sporidee is admitted in the fifth foot, and the line is thence termed Spondaic ; as,
Virg. Card deurri soboles, magnum Jovis \ lncre\mentum. Id. Constitit,atque^>culisPhrygiq,agmina \ circum\spexit. Cat. jEquoreas monstrum Nereides \ admir\antes. Man. Scorpius ingentemperterru.it \ On\ona.
VII. In spondaic lines the fourth foot is usually a dac- tyl ; not uniformly, however. Thus,
Virg. Saxa per et scopulos et \ depresses con\valles. Id. Aut leves ocreas lent\o du\tunt ar\gento.
VIII. The t)lder poets do not scruple to use lines con- taining spondees alone ; as,
Enn. Olli \ respond\et rex \ Alba\i long\ai.
1. Lua ;t., 1, 118, seqq. — Sil. Ltd., 12, 410, seq.— Column., Ennn Vit., p. 6 "-For an account of the Sa'urnian, vid. page 199.
DACTYLTC MEASURES. f 159
Enn. Gives \ Roma\ni tune [ facti \ sunt Cam\pdni. Lucret. An cwl\um no\bls na\tura ult\ro cor\ruptum. Catull. Quis te \ lent\rem no\bis, neu | conar\cre.
IX. Spondaic lines are much more common in the Greek than in the best Latin poets. There are, for instance, some twenty-eight of this description in Virgil, while in a single piece of Catullus" (containing 409 lines), who formed his verses upon the Greek model, we find a greater number.8
CtEsura in Dactylic Hexameters.
X. The beauty and harmony of hexameter verse depend in a very great degree upon the proper management of the caesura. In its application to single feet, the caesura has already been explained ; it only remains to consider it with reference to whole verses, in which acceptation it may be more correctly termed the Cassural Pause.
XI. The caesural pause most approved of in heroic po- etry, and which, above all others, tended to give smooth- ness and rhythm to the line, was that which took place after the penthemimeris. This was particularly distin- guished as THE Heroic Cassural Pause. Thus,
Virg. At dom^s \ interior, || regali splendida luxu. Id. Julius \ a magn\o.\\ de'missum nomen liilo.
XII. Sometimes the penthemimeral pause is found com- bined with others ; as,
Virg. Ad nos vix tennis \\ fama \\ perlabitur aura. Id. Insignis || reserat || stridentia limina consuk Id. Sunt gemincR || belli || porta, \\ sis nomine dicunt.
XIII. Instead, however, of the caesural pause at the ex- act penthemimeris, a different division was equally admitted as heroic, which took place after a trochee in the third foot ; as,
Virg. Effigi\em statu\ere, \\ mfas qua triste piaret. Id. Tecta met\u peti\ere, || ruunt de montibus amnes.
1. Catull, 64. 2. Ramsay's Lot. Pro*., p. 173.
160 DACTYLIC MEASURES.
XIV. Next in merit to the penthemimeral was the heph- themimeral pause. Thus,
Virg. Arbori\busque sat\isque Not\us, \\ pccorique sinister. Id. Haud mora \ prosilu\ere su\is : \\ ferit athera clamor.
XV. In some instances we find lines where the penthe- mimeral is combined with the triemnneral ; as,
Tibull. Di patrii || purgamus agros, \\ purgamus agrestes. Virg. Prima tenet, || plausuque volat, \\ fremituque secundo.
XVI. The caesural pause the least approved of in heroic poetry was that which divided the verse exactly into halves, since it gave the line an undignified air, and degraded it to a Priapean.1 Thus,
Virg. Cut non \ dictus Hy\las puer || et La\tonia \ Delos ? Id. Exple\ri ment\em nequit || ardes\cilque tu\endo.
XVII. The caesural pause between the fourth and fifth feet was considered by grammarians as peculiarly adapted to pastoral poetry, more especially when the fourth foot was a dactyl ; and it was termed, from this circumstance, the Bucolic caesural pause ;2 as,
Calpurn. Idas \ laniger\i domi\nus gregis, || Astacus horti. Auson. Commu\nis Paphi\e dea \ slderis || et deafloris.
13. PRIAPEAN.
I. The Priapean measure was so called because origi- nally employed on themes having relation to Priapus, the god of gardens.
II. This measure is generally regarded as a species 01 hexameter, the first, as likewise the fourth, foot of whicL was most commonly a trochee, often, however, a spondee,
1. The Priapean will be considered after the hexameter.
2. Valckenaer was the first to mark the bucolic ciesura in Theocritus. The first seven Idyls, with the tenth and eleventh, contain 927 lines, ol which not less than 71 1 have this casnra. Virgil's Eclogues consist ol 830 lines, bui of (,hese only 2.T2 conform to the bucolic model ( Wai ton. de Vo'/is Bucul. — Thcocril .. vo! 1. |>. xxxvi )
ANAPJESTIC MEASURES.
161
but rarely a dactyl ; the second almost always a dactyl ; the third, though sometimes a dactyl, much more frequently an amphimacer. The scale is as follows :
|
1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
|
— |
|
_ ~ _ |
:L |
-~~ |
|
Catull. O col\oma \ qua cupls || ponte \ ludere \ longo. Id. lnfdss\a Llgu\ri jdcet \ supper\nata se\curi.
III. A preferable mode of scanning, however, is to make the first hepiistich a Glyconic, and the second a Pherecratic verse, and thus to consider the line, not as forming one dactylic verse, but as composed of two choriambics.
14. HEXAMETER MEIURUS.
I. The Hexameter Meiurus is a defective species of hex- ameter, having an iambus in the sixth place instead of a spondee ; as,
Liv. Andron. Dirige odorisequos ad certa cubilia canes.
II. It is to be considered, however, rather as a vicious and defective hexameter, than as forming a separate spe- cies of verse ; though Livius Andronicus designedly wrote such lines as these, which he alternately mingled with per- fect hexameters. They have all, however, perished except two.
SECTION XXXI.
ANAPAESTIC MEASURES.
I. In Anapaestic verse the feet admissible without restric- tion are, the anapaest, the spondee, and the dactyl.
II. Dactyls, however, ought to be employed sparingly in Latin anapaestics. When introduced, they ought to be the first foot in the dipode, and ought to be followed bj a spon« dee in preference to an anapaest.
02
162 ANAP.ESTIC MEASURES.
III. Anapaestic verse is scanned by metres of two feet each ; thus, an anapaestic raonometer contains two feet ; a dimeter, Tour ; a trimeter, six, &c.
IV. No specimen of anapaestic verse is extant in the pu- rer Latin writers. Those that have reached us belong to a later age.
V. No Latin poet ever wrote anapaestics necessarily con- sisting of four anapaests (with the exception of a few in Seneca and Ausonius) ; but they all appear to have intend- ed their anapaestics for single measures or monometers, leaving the reader to connect or disjoin, as the sense might require or his own judgment dictate. Convenience in printing, however, is answered by the division into dime- ters, and hence they are generally exhibited in this form in editions of ancient authors.
VI. Anapaestic verses arranged in monometers or dime- ters, and thus forming a succession of many lines, are call- ed Systems.
VII. The species of anapaestics most in use among the Greek tragic writers was the Anapaestic Dimeter Acatalec- tic, which is frequently found in systems interspersed with the Manometer Acatalectic.
VIII. These systems of anapaestic dimeters are usually closed, among the Greeks, by an Anapasstic Dimeter Cata- lectic, otherwise called a Parcemiac, it having been a favour- ite vehicle for proverbs (Hapoipiai).
IX. The Latin writers do not, as often as the Greeks, close a system of dimeters by a Paroemiacv Seneca never does.
X. It must be borne in mind that anapaestic systems pro- ceed on the principle of continuous scansion. Hence the last syllable of every verse is not common, but is subject to the ordinary rules of prosody, unless at the end of a sen- tence, or any considerable pause in the sense.1
1. Consult remarks under the article Synapkeia, page 130.
ANAPAESTIC MEAStniES.
163
XL The only exception to the rule laid down in the pre- ceding paragraph is in the case of the Parremiac, the last syllable of which is common. An anapaestic system, there- fore, is, in fact, one long line broken up into several lines, the end of which long line is marked by the Paroemiac.
XII. Hence we see why the last syllable of the ParoEmi- ac is the only one in the entire system that is common, it being in reality the concluding syllable of a long line, which line is supposed to commence with the first verse of the system.
1. ANAPAESTIC MONOMETER ACATALECTIC, or ANAP^STIC
I. The Anapaestic Manometer consists of two feet, which
may be either anapaests, spondees, or dactyls.
II. The scale, therefore, of this measure is as follows :
Senec. ululass\e canes. \\ Id. Fundlte \fletig || Edite | planctus || Fmgite | luctus \\ Resonet \ trlsti || Clamor\e forum. \\
2. ANAPAESTIC DIMETER ACATALECTIC.
I. The Anapaestic Dimeter Acatalectic consists of four feet, which may be either anapaests, spondees, or dactyls.
II. The scale is as follows :
164
ANAPAESTIC MEASURES.
Senec. Indus \ gclidum || potat Ar\axem, ||
Albim | Persx, \\ Rhenum\que bibunf H Venient \ anriis || sceculd \ sens \\ Quibus O\cednus || vincula \ return || ' Ldxet et \ ingens || pateat \ tellus || Tethys\que novos \\ detegat \ orbes || Nee sit | terns \\ ultima \ Thule. \\
3. ANAPJESTIC DIMETER CATALECTIC, or PARCEMIAC.
I. This measure consists of three feet, followed by a catalectic syllable.
II. The third foot of a^Paroemiac must always be an an- apaest. The dactyl is less frequently used in the first and second places than the spondee.
III. The following is the scale.
Prudent. Venient \ cito scBC\\ula cum [ jam Socius | color oss\\ a revis\it, Ariimat\aque sang\\ume viv\o Hdbitac\ula pnst\\ind gcst\et.
IV. Prudentius, from whom the above lines are taken, does not admit a dactyl, and uses a spondee in the first place only. Boethius, however, allows himself greater lat- itude, as may be seen by the following :
Qul se | volet ess\\e potent\em. Jlnlmos \ domct ill(\e fero\ces, Nee vict\d libl\\dine coll\a Faidts | submitt\\at hdbe\nis. Etcnim | licet ind\\ica long\e Tellus \ tiiajur\\a tremis\\cat, Et servfiat ultima T/tii\le, Tdmen atr\as pell\\ere cur\dst
'
IAMBIC MEASURES. 165
Miseras\que Juga\\re quere\las Non poss\e, potent\\ia non | est.
SECTION XXXII.
IAMBIC MEASURES.
- . I. Iambic verses are scanned by measures of two feet, it having been usual, in reciting them, to make a short pause at the end of every second foot, with an emphasis.
II. This kind of verse derived its name from the iambus, of which foot it was originally composed, to the exclusion of all others.
III. Afterward, in order to vary the rhythm, and dimm- ish the labour of the poet, a spondee was allowed in the odd places of the verse, the iambus still occupying the even places.
IV. In the even places, the long syllable of the iambus was resolved into two short ones, and thus the tribrach, which is isochronous with the iambus, gained admission.
V. In the odd places, by resolving the first long syllable of the spondee, an anapaest was formed ; and, by resolving the second syllable, a dactyl.
VI. Thus eventually all these feet were employed in iambic measures, subject, however, to certain restrictions, which will now be specified.1
1. An iambus is admitted into everyplace, which maybe resolved into a tribrach in every place except the last, where there must be invariably an iambus.
2. The spondee may be used in the uneven places ; that is, in the first and third of the dimeter, and in the first, third, and fifth of the trimeter.
3. The dactyl may be used in the uneven places, like the spondee ; but its appearance in the fifth place of the trimeter is very rare.
1. The rules here given are much less strict, as regards the dactyl and anapaest, than those which regulate the Greek iambic trimeter.
166 IAMBIC MEASURES.
4. The anapaest also is admitted into the uneven places, and in the fifth place seems to have been particularly affected by the Roman tragedians.
5. A proceleusmaticus is sometimes found in the first place of the iambic trimeter.
1. IAMBIC DIMETER CATALECTIC.
I. This measure consists of three feet, properly all iam- bi, and a catalectic syllable.
II. It admits, however, the tribrach, spondee, and ana- paest into the first place, but suffers no variation in the third foot.
Petron. anus \ recoct\\a v1n\o trement\tbus II labellfis.
Prudent. Lex h<r.c \ data 1st \ cadu\ds Deo | jubent\\e membr\ts ut temp\eret || labor\em medica\bilis || volupt\as.
2. IAMBIC DIMETER ACEPHALOUS.'
I. This measure is an iambic dimeter, wanting the first syllable.
II. Horace and Prudentius made no variations, but uni- formly employed the iambus in the few lines they have left us of this metre.
Horat. Non \ ebur \\ neque aur\eum. Prud. Do\nd con\\scien\t'i(e.
III. Some consider such lines as catalectic trochaic dim • eters, and scan them as follows-:
Non eb\ur ne\\que aure\iim. Dona | consci\\entife.
1. Acephalous, i. e., without a head (or initial syllable), from a, priv and KBjxi'/Jr, " a head."
IAMBIC MEASURES.
167
3. IAMBIC DIMETER HYPERCATALECTIC.
I. This measure, likewise called Archilochian, and form- ing the third line in the Alcaic stanza, is an iambic dimeter with an additional syllable at the end.
II. According to the usage of Horace, the first foot may be either a spondee or an iambus, but is generally a spon- dee ; the second foot is an iambus ; the third is invariably a spondee,1 and the fourth an iambus. The Horatian scale, therefore, is as follows :
Horat. Sylvas \ ldbor\\dntes \ gelu\\que. Id. Depro\me quadr\\imum \ Sabin\\a. Id. Puer | quis ex \\ auld \ cdplll\is.
HI. The practice of Horace differs from that of Alcaeus as regards the third place, the latter having uniformly an iambus in this part of the line.
IV. This measure is called by some the Alcaic Ennea syllabic?
4. IAMBIC DIMETER ACATALECTIC.
I. This measure consists of four feet or two metres.
II. Propeily speaking, all the feet are iambi. It admits, however, the variations that are usual in iambic verse, and its scale is as follows :
1. The line of Horace, which occurs Od., 2, 19, 15, "Disjecta non led rttina," has been corrected by Bentley, from MSS., as follows* " Disjecta non lenl ruina."
2. Consult remarks on the Alcaic measure.
168 IAMBIC MEASURES.
I
Horat. tndrs\lt a'St\\uos\ms. II Id. Vel h(ed\us c\\rcptus \ lupo. \\
Id. imbres \ ntves^que com\pdrdt. II
Id. dst ego | vidss\\lm ris\ero. II
Id. Vtder\e proper\\dntes \ domum. H
Prudent. Jam mcll\d de \\ scopulls \ fluunt. II Hadr. drnmu\ld vagu\\ld bldnd\uld, \\ Hospes | cdmes\\que corp\orls, || QUCB nunc \ dbl'i\bls In | locd, || PdlUdu\ld rtgl\\duld nu\duld ? || Nee ut j 50/65 || ddbls \ jocos. tl
III. Although Horace has not used this metre except in conjunction with verses of a different kind, other authors wrote entire poems in it, as Prudentius, St. Ambrose, Pope Damasus, Sedulius, &c.
IV. The Liturgy of the Church of Rome has several hymns in this metre. The following lines form the com- mencement of one of them, and will also furnish an instance of rhyming or Leonine versification.
Salutis humana sator,
Jesu voluptas cordium,
Orbis redempti conditor
Et casta lux amantium :
Qua victus es dementia
Ut nostraferres crimina? &c.
5. IAMBIC TRIMETER CATALECTIC.
I. This measure is the iambic trimeter, wanting the last syllable. In other words, it consists of five feet, properly all iambi, followed by a catalectic syllable ; as,
Horat. Vocd\tus dt\\que non \ vocd\\tus aud\it. Prudent. Plus \ fidc\\Ks ln\nocens \\ pudt\cus. *
II. Like the trimeter, however, it admits the spondee
IAMBIC MEASURES.
169
into thirst and third places, but not into the fifth, which would render the verse too heavy and prosaic.
Horat. Trdhunt\que stc\\cds md\chin~<B \\ cart\nas. Prudent. Nonnull\d querc\u sunt \ cdvd\\ta et ulm\d. III. Terentianus prefers scanning this kind of verse as part of an iambic trimeter, with three trochees following. Thus,
Trdhunt\que slc\cds \\ mdchi\naB cdr\lnds.
6. IAMBIC TRIMETER ACATALECTIC.
I. This measure consists of three metres, or six feet, originally all iambi, and when a line of this kind still oc- curs, it is called a pure iambic line.
II. The other feet that were subsequently allowed to en- ter, and the places proper to each, have been considered elsewhere.1
III. When other feet besides the iambus enter into the line, it is called a mixed iambic.
IV. Another name for this measure is the Senarius, from the six feet of which the line is composed.
V. The caesural pause most commonly falls after the fifth semifoot ; as,
Phdse\lus 1ll\e || quern \ vide\fis hosp\ttes.
VI. The scale of the mixed iambic trimeter is as follows:
Pure Iambics.
Horat. Comes \ minor\\e sum \ futur\\us in | metu. || Catull. Es im\pudi\\cus et ' vorax || et dl\co. \\
1. Consult introductory remarks on iambic verse, paragraphs III.. IV., V., VI.
170 IAMBIC MEASURES.
Spondee in 1 and 3. Catull. Per cons\uldltum peyerdt \\ Vdtin^us. fl
Spondee in 1, 3, 5. Horat. Gnxe\rc ma\\tres /j/i« dd\diclum \ feris. ||
Tribrach in 1, and Spondee in 5. Horat. Sed oTtjus ardljor awi | /me//||5J candjufce.
Tribrach in 2 und 4, Spondee in 1, 3 and 5. Horat. Vec^aj&or Au7ner||ts ^«nc | ego ini\\mids \ eques,
Tribrach in 3, and Spondee in 5. Hor£t. Li&e£ | jace\\re modo \ sub an^fiqua ll\ice. fl
Dactyl in 1, Spondee in 3 and 5. Horat. Aut amtlte le\vl rar\a tend\\it re\(ia. ||
Dactyl in 3, Spondee in I and 5. Horat. Quo quo \ scelest^l rui\tis out 11 cur dex\teris. D
Anapaest in 1 , Spondee in 3 and 5. Horat. Positds\que vern\\ds di\tls ex\\amen \ domus. |
Anap&st in 1 and 5, Tribrach in 2. Horat. Pawdum|yue lepo\\rem et dd\vendm | laqueo \ gruem.^
Dactyl in 1, Tribrach in 3 and 4. Horat. Altti\bus dt\que cani\bus homt\\cldam Hect\orem. II
VII. The prevalent caesural pause in iambic triir,cters is, as we have already remarked, the penthemimeral. If this be wanting, the line must then have the hephthemimeral pause. Thus,
Catull. Ait fuisse || navium cehrrimus.
Id. Rhodumve nobilem \\ horridamve Thraciam.
Horat. Defixa cado || devocare sidera.
Id. Cave ! cave namque \\ in malos asperrimus.
IAMBIC MEASURES. 171
Catull. Neque ullius natantis || impetum trabis. Id. Proponiida trucemve \\ Ponticum sinum. VIII. There is no instance in Catullus of the total omis- sion of the caesural pause, and only two in Horace, namely (Epode, 1, 19) Ut assidens implumibus pullis avis. (Epode, 11, 15) Quod si meis inasstuat pracordiis.
Porsonian Pause.
IX. Porson, in his celebrated preface to the Hecuba, as serted that the following rule was always observed by tho Greek tragedians :
" When the iambic trimeter has, after a word of more than one syllable, the cretic termination (— ^ — ), either in- cluded in one word, or consisting of — ^ and a syllable, or of a monosyllable and -^ — , then the fifth foot must be an iambus."
X. There is no exception to this law in Catullus, whose iambic trimeters are almost all pure ; but it is constantly violated by Horace, in those odes in which iambic trime- ters are combined with other kinds of verse ; whereas in Epode 17, where these form a system by themselves, it is but once neglected :
Alitibus atque canibus homicidam Hectorem.1
7. SCAZON, or CHOLIAMBTJS.
I. This measure, called also Hipponaclean, is a variety of the Senarius. It differs from it in this, however, that while the iambic trimeter has invariably an iambus in the sixth place, the scazon has invariably a spondee in the sixth place, and an iambus in the fifth.
II. In all other respects the scazon is the same as the trimeter.
III. An iambus is necessary in the fifth place, in order that the line may not be too lame and heavy ; as in spon-
1. Ramsay's Lot. Pros., p. 208.
172 IAMBIC MEASURES.
dale hexameters, we usually find the fourth foot a dactyl for a similar reason.
JV. The terms Scazon (Luafav, " limping" or " halting") and Choliambic (XwAta^fii/cd^, " lame iambic") have refer- ence to the peculiar characteristic of this measure, namely, its lame and halting gait, occasioned by the spondee in the sixth place, in opposition to the brisk and lively ending of the regular trimeter.
V. The name Hipponactean is derived from that of the virulent poet Hipponax, who, according to some, invented this measure. After his example it was much employed in invectives and in sarcastic composition generally.
VI. The following may be taken as a specimen of this measure.
Catull. Suffe\nus ist\\e Vdr\e quern \\ probe \ nosti, ||
Homo est | venust\\us et \ dlcax H et urb\dnus, \\ \dem\que long\\e plur\imds \\fdcit \ versus. \\ Puto ess\e ego lll\\i mttl\ia out \\ decem out \ plurd [| Perscript\a nee || sic, ut \ fit, In || pdlim\psesld || Reld\td : chdrt\\<B rcg^iz, || novi \ libn, \\ Novi umb\ili\\ci, lbr\d rubr\\d, membr\dnd || Direcl\d plumb\\o, et pu\mice omn^ia <E\qudta. ||
8. COMIC IAMBIC TRIMETER.
I. In comedy, satire, and fable, the poets indulged in very great licenses as regarded the structure and scansion of the trimeter.
II. They admitted the spondee and its equivalents, the dactyl and anapaest, into the second and fourth places, not confining themselves to the iambus except in the sixth.1 Thus,
1. " Cum nonsolum Tercntius, sed eliam Plautus, Ennius, Accius- que et Ncevius atque Pacumus Turpiliusque, et omnr.s tarn tra.gce.diat quam comaedift vetcris Latins scriptores codem metri modo lambici sunt usi, ut omnibus in locis indifferenter poncrcnt qitinque pcdes ; id cst iambum, vd tribrachyn, vel ana pas turn, vel dactyhtm, vel spondceum, vbsquc postrcmo loco, in quo vd iambum vd pyrrkicfiium omnino poau-
IAMBIC MEASURES. 173
Petron. An ut \ mdtro\\na ornd\td phdle\\ris peld\gns. ||
Id. Two | pdld\\to cldu\sus pdv\\o pdsc\ltur. ||
Id. ~JE,quum est \ indue^re nupt\dm ven\(tum textfilfp. ||
Phaedr. Peri\culd\\sdm fe\cit medi\\andm \ lupo. ||
Id. Est dr\deUo\num qua\ddm Ro\\m(B nG\lio. \\
Id. Rex urb\is e\\jus ex\perien\\dl grd\tm. ||
Id. lgno\tos fdllfct no\tis est || den\sui. ||
Terent. Fide et \ tddtur\\nitd\te. Exspect\\o quid \ veils. [1
Id. Cur simu\lds if^-i|Uwr rem om\ncm dprin\\cipio au\dies. |
Id. Quod ple\riquc om^nes fdti\unt ddu\\lescen\tuli. \\
Id. Alere dTit \ canes II dd ven\dndum out ]| dd phtlo\so-
phos. II
Id. Nunqudm \ preEpon\\ens se ill\is ltd || fdcill\ume. ||
Id. Age\bdt ldn)\a dc te\ld vicC^um qu&\ritdns. \\
Id. Egomet | continued me\cum cer\\te cdpt\us est. ||
Id. Die so\des quts her\\l Chrysfidem hdbu^ll nam An]
dna. || Id. Qu(ere\bdm cdm^peru\bdm riihil || dd Pdm\philum. \\
9. IAMBIC TETRAMETER ACATALECTIC, or OCTONARIUS.
I. This species of verse consists of four measures or eight feet, properly all iambi, but subject to the same vari- ations as the iambic trimeter ; so that, by prefixing one measure to a common iambic trimeter, we convert it into an Octonarius.
II. This metre is often used by the Latin comic writers. Terent. Sane \ pol ls\\td te [ mulent\\a est mutt\er et \\ tem-
erdr\id. \\ Id. Nunc htc \ dies \\ dlidm \ vitam a~u\\fert dli\os mo-\\
res post\uldt. \\ Id. Pdtere\tur : ndm \\ quern ferr\et si || pdrent\em non \\
ferret \ suum ? ||
issc inveniuntur ; miror quosdam vel abnegare esse in Tcrentii comacdiis mctra, vel ca quasi arcana qu<edam, et ab omnibus doctis semota, sibi salts esse cognita, confirmare." (Priscian, de Vers. Com. — vol. 2, p. 403, ed. Krehl.)
P2
174 IAMBIC MEASURES.
Terent. Lena \ sum fatc\\or per\nlcles \\ cbmmu\ms ddo\\les-
cent\lum. \\ Id. « Nequld \ proptcr \\ tudm \ fldem \\ decept\d pdte-\\
tetur | mail. || Id. Cujus | nunc mlse\\r<e spes \ opes\\que sunt \ In te
H\\no bmries \ slice. \\ Plaut. lllbs | qui ddnt \\ eos \ derl\\des; qui \ delu\\dunt de-\
perls. ||
10. IAMBIC TETRAMETER CATALECTIC.
I. This measure, called likewise Hipponactic, from its inventor, Hipponax, is the tetrameter or Octonarius depri« ved of its final syllable.
II. The same variations are admissible here as in the case of the trimeter and tetrameter, and the comic writers, who sometimes used this species of verse, took as great liberties with it as with the trimeter ; always observing, however, to make the seventh foot an iambus.
Catull. Remltt\e pall\\lum \ mlhl \\ meum \ quod ln\\volds\ti. Id. Dcprens\d nau||zfs In \ marl || ue*ajnzen||^e venl\o.
Id. Quum de \ via \\ muller \ aves || ostend\lt osc\\ltant\es.
Terent. Non poss\um saf? || narrdr\e quos || ludos \ prabue-H
rls lnt\us. ^
Id. Nostrd\pte cul\\pd facl\mus ut |) maids \ expedi\\at
ess\e.
III. In this measure there is uniformly a division of the verse at the end of the fourth foot. Thus,
Remitte pallium mihi || meum quod involasti Deprensa navis in mari \\ vesaniente vento.
IV. This species of verse is a great favourite with the Greek comic poet Aristophanes, and is also found in many passages of the Latin comedians. The only specimen of it, however, in a pure state in the Latin classics, is a short poem of Catullus'.1
1. This measure comes to our ears with a very lively and graceful cadence in those lines where accent and quantity do not clash. Thus,
IAMBIC MEASURES.
175
11. GALLIAMBUS.
I. This measure derives the first part of its name from the Galli, or priests of Cybele, by whom it was employed in their wild orgies.
II. The only specimen of this verse extant is the poem of Catullus on the legend of Atys, consisting of 93 lines, and remarkable for the wild dithyrambic spirit that per- vades it.
III. From the scanty remains that we possess of this measure, it becomes a difficult task to determine its struc- ture with any great degree of precision. The following, however, is the scheme given by Vulpius, an eminent com- mentator on the Roman poet :
1. The first foot of the six into which he divides the measure is generally an anapaest, but sometimes a spondee or a tribrach.
2. The second is generally an iambus, rarely an anapaest, a tribrach, or a dactyl.
3. The third is generally an iambus, rarely a spondee.
4. The fourth is a dactyl or spondee.
5. The fifth is often a dactyl, sometimes a cretic or spondee.
6. The sixth is an anapaest, and sometimes an iambus, preceded by a cretic.
According to this view of the Galliambic measure, the scale is as follows :
Idemque Tholle turbida rapacior procclla ;
like the English ballad, " And thus we daily dance and sing, and cast all care behind us "
TROCHAIC MEASURES.
IV. The following lines will afibrd an idea of the meas- ure :
Super dl\td vect\us At^s ccler\l rate \ mdrid. Ubi cdp\ild Md,\nddes j mjdci\unt hede\ngerte. Viridem [ cltus dd\tt \\ddm proper\dnte pe\de chorus Ahero | ford \ pdla:sl\rd stddi\o et gymn\dsus.
V. Some prosodians, however, make the Galliambic measure consist of an iambic dimeter catalectic (the first foot of which is generally a spondee or an anapaest), fol- lowed by another such dimeter wanting the last syllable. Hence they give the scale with its variations as follows:
|
1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
7 |
|
|
^ — |
~ - |
— |
|
~- |
^ — |
|
~^~^ |
||||||
|
ft- — — 1 |
i — — i — |
, |
w W| *,_ |
Ubi cdpi\td M<cn\ddes \ vi \\ jdciunl \ hederi\gerce. Viridem \ cilus dd\it l\ddm || properdnt\e pcde \ chorus.
SECTION XXXIII.
TROCHAIC MEASURES.
I. Trochaic verse derives its name from the foot which prevails in it, namely, the trochee.
II. Originally the trochee was the only foot allowed to enter into the line ;~ but variations were afterward introflu- ced, as in the case of iambic verse.
II f. The trochee, like the iambus, is convertible into a tribrach- Hence this last-mentioned foot is allowed to en- ter, and so are the spondee and anapaest. The dactyl, however, is in general not admitted, except in the case of a proper name.
IV. A difference, deserving of careful notice, exists be- tween the iambic and trochaic measures, in that the former
TROCHAIC MEASURES. 177
admits the spondee and anapaest into the uneven places but the trochaic into the even only.
1. TROCHAIC DIMETER CATALECTIC.
I. This measure consists of three feet, properly all tro- chees, and a catalectic syllable ; as,
Horat. Non e\bur ne\\que <&re\um. Prud. Dona \ cdnsci\entl\<B.
II. In the second place it admits the spondee, the dac tyl, and likewise the anapaest.
Senec. Lents \ dc modt\\cumjlu\ens, Aura | nee ver\\gens ldt\us Ducat | lnlrepV\ddm rdt\em Tutd | me medi\\d ve\hdt Vita | decurr\\ens vi\a.
III. The trochaic dimeter catalectic is otherwise scanned as an Iambic Dimeter Acephalous.
2. TROCHAIC DIMETER ACATALECTIC. I. The trochaic dimeter consists of four feet, properly all trochees ; as,
Boeth. Nonfd\ctt quod \\ optat \ ipse.\\ •II. The spondee, however,, and its equivalents in quan- tity, the anapaest and dactyl, are admitted into the second place.
Buchanan. Inco\lae terr\\drum db \ or/«, || Solis | uUl[\mum dd cu\blle || Ejd | Domino || jubi\ldt e. \\ Consci\os sceler\\is ne\fdndi. \\
3. TROCHAIC TETRAMETER CATALECTIC.
I. This measure consists of seven feet and a catalectic syllable.
II. Originally all the feet were trochees, but variations
178
TROCHAIC MEASURES
having been subsequently introduced, the following result was finally obtained :
1. The trochee may in every place be resolved into a tribrach.
2. In the even places, that is, the second, fourth, and sixth, in addition to the trochee, a spondee is admis- sible, which may be resolved into an anapaest.
3. A dactyl is aRnissible, in the case of a proper name, in any place except the fourth and seventh.
III. The csesura uniformly takes place after the fourth foot, thus dividing the verse into a trochaic dimeter acata- lectic and a trochaic dimeter catalectic.
IV. The scale, according to what has just been laid down, is as follows :
|
1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
7 |
||
|
-- |
|
|
||||||
Cras am\et qui || nunquam am\amt || qutque am\avlt \\ eras
am\et.
Ver nov\um, ver || jam can\orum || vere j natus || orois \ est. Vere \ concord\\ant am\ores, || vere \ nubunt | atit\es, £t nem\us com\\am re\solvit ][ de mar\itis \\ lmbn\bus.1
V. The following lines are given without the marks of scansion, to show the place of the caesura.
Quando ponebam novellas [| arbores mali et piri Cortici summ<R notavi \\ nomen ardoris mei. Nullafit exinde finis || vel quies cupidinis : Crescit ardor, gliscit arbor, || ramus implet literas?
VI. This metre was much used in hymns, for whicH,
1. These lines are taken from the Pcrvigilium Veneru.
2. Burmann, Anthoi. Lot., vol. 1, p. 687.
CHORIAMBlC MEASURES. 179
from its grave and sonorous character, it is well adapted. The division made in the line by the caesural pause would suit, no doubt, the convenience of the chorus, one portion of their number singing the complete dimeter, the other the catalectic. Thus,
Prudent. Macte judex mortuorum, ||
Made rex viventjum. M. Cap. Scande cceli templa Virgo, ||
Digna tanto feeder e.
VII. The comic writers took equal liberties with this as with the iambic measure, introducing the spondee and its equivalents, the anapaest and dactyl, into the trochaic places. Terent. Quot mod\ts con\\temtus | spretus? \\fdcta \ trans-
act\\a omrii\a hem. Id. Tantdm J rem tarn || necle\genter \\ agere? \ prceteri-\\
ens mod\o. Id. Obs£ipu\i cen|jsea' me \ verbum || potulss\e ullum ||
prolo\qui out. Id. Tot me lm\pediunt || euros \ qua me^um ariimum \
divorllsce tra\kunt. Id. Attquid | facerem, ut || hoc ne \ fdcerem || sed nunc \
quid pri^mum exse\quar?
SECTION XXXIV.
CHORIAMBlC MEASURES.
I. Choriambie verses are so denominated from the foot (or measure) which predominates in them, namely, the choriambus, compounded of a choree (or trochee) and an iambus ; as, Tantalidae,
II. The structure of choriambic verses is extremely sim- ple, the first foot (with the exception of the dimeter) being generally a spondee, sometimes a trochee or iambus, the last an iambus, while one, two, or three choriamb! are in- terposed.
160 CHORIAMBIC MEASURES.
1. CHORIAMBIC DIMETER.
I. The Choriambic Dimeter consists of a choriambus and a bacchius ; as,
Horat. Lydta die \ per dmnes. Perdcre cur \ apricum. Cur neque mi\Utaris. Temperat o\ra freriis.
II. This measure occurs once in Horace, in conjunction with another species of choriambic verse^
2. CHORIAMBIC TRIMETER ACATALECTIC, or GLYCONIC.
I. This measure, called Glyconic from the poet Glycon, its inventor, consists, as it appears in Horace, of a spondee, a choriambus, and an iambus ; as,
Sic te | Diva potens \ Cypri. Vento\rumquc regal \ pater. Ndvis \ qua tibi cre\ditum.
II. This species of choriambic verse is not used in * system by itself in the works of either Horace or Catullus, but in combination with other species of choriambic meas- ures.
III. Horace, who was very fond of the Glyconic, invari- ably adheres to the spondee in the first place, except in the two following instances, where a trochee occurs :
Teucer et Sthenelus sciens. (Orf., 1, 15, 24.) Ignis Iliacas domos. (Ib., 1, 15, 36.) The best editions, however, now read,
Teucer, te Sthenelus sciens. Ignis Pergameas domos.
IV. Catullus, however, frequently has a trochee in the first place ; as,
Rustfya agricbla: \ bbnis. Cinge | tempora flbr^ibus. Flamme\um cape l<K\tus hue.
CHORIAMBIC MEASURES. 181
Nupti\alia con\cinens. Voce | carmina £inn\ula.
V. The same poet also occasionally uses an iambus in the first place ; as,
Puell\(R et pueri ln\tegn.
VI. In the following line Horace lengthens a short final syllable by the force of the caesural pause :
Siji\gtt adamant\inos.
3. CHORIAMBIC TRIMETER CATALECTIC, or PHERECRATIC.
I. The Pherecratic verse, so called from the poet Pher- ecrates, is the Glyconic (which we have just been consid- ering) deprived of its final syllable. It consists of a spon- dee, a choriambus, and a catalectic syllable ; as,
Horat. Gralo \ Pyrrha sub an\tro. Id. Nigris \ Hzquora vent\is. Id. Sperdt \ nescius ourfe.
II. This species of verse, like the preceding, is not found in a system by itself in the works of either Horace or Ca- tullus.
III. In Horace, the first foot is invariably a spondee. In Catullus, although a spondee is sometimes employed in *he first foot, a trochee is far more common ; as,
Amrii\umque sonant\um. Dicta \ famine Lun\a. Tecta | frugibus ex\ples.
IV. An iambus also occurs in Catullus, but rarely ; as,
Puell\(zque cana\mus. Hymen \ 0 Hymence\e.
V. In one instance in Catullus, a long syllable is found supplying the place of the two short ones that contribute to form the choriambus ; as,
Nutri\unt humor\e.
Q
182 CHORIAMBIC MEASURES.
VI. The Pherecratic, as it appears in Horace, with a spondee in the first place, is scanned by some as a dactylic trimeter acatalectic. Thus,
Grata \ Pyrrha sub \ dntro. Nigris | aequord \ ventis. Sperdt | nescius \ aura.
4. CHORIAMBIC ASCLEPIADIC TETRAMETER. I.»This measure (sometimes called the Minor Aschpia- dic) consists of a spondee, two choriambi, and an iambus.
II. The name Asclepiadic is derived from that of the poet Asclepiades, who is said to have been the inventor of the measure.
III. The following are specimens of it : Horat. M<ece\nds atams || edile re\gibus. Senec. Non ill\um poterdnt |I figere cuspfides. Prud. Hostis | dirus ddest || cum duce per\fido.
IV. The caesural pause always falls after the first chori- ambus, as marked in the lines just given ; and in the fol- lowing verses this pause lengthens a short syllable.
Horat. Quam si quidquid ardt |] impiger Appulus. Certa sede manet, \\ humor et in genas.
V. The position of the caesural pause after the first chori- ambus, facilitates the scansion of this measure as a dactylic pentameter catalectic. Thus,
Mazcc\nds atd\vts \\ edite \ regibus.
Non lll\um pote\rdnt \\ftgere \ cuspides.
Hostis | dirus dd\est^ cum duce \ perfido. VT. This latter mode of scanning was, as we learn from Terentianus Maurus, adopted by many of his contempora- ries. He himself, however, condemns the practice.1
1 Sunt qui tradidtrint, ultima nersui
Tanquam pentametro syllaba dempta sit,
Qxam si rcstituas, pentametrum fore, &c. (Ter. Maur., 2650.)
CHORIAMBIC MEASURES. 183
VII. Sometimes, though very rarely, the first foot of the Asclepiadic was made a dactyl ; as,
Senec. E,ffugi\um, et ttdseros libera rnors vocet. M. Capell. Omnige\num genitor regna movens Deum.
5. CHORIAMBIC TETRAMETER ACATALECTIC.
I. This species of verse consists of three choriambi and a bacchius (-^ ) ; as,
Sept. Ser. Jane pater, \ Jane tuens \ dive biceps \ btformis. Auson. Tu bene si j quid facias | non meminiss\efasest. Claud. Omne nemus, \ cum fluvus, \ omne canal \ pro- fundum.
II. It admits, however, of variations, each of the three choriambi being changeable to other feet of equal time ; as,
Seren. Cui resera\t.d mugiunt \ aurea daust\ra mundi. Id. Tlbi vetus ar\d caluit &bo\rigineo \ sacello.
6. CHORIAMBIC PENTAMETER ACATALECTIC.
I. This measure consists of a spondee, three choriambi, and an iambus ; as,
Horat. Tu ne \ qu&sieris, \ scire neffc, \ quern mihi, quern \
tibi.
Id. Nullam \ Vare sacra \ vite prius \ sevens arb\orem. Catull. Alphe\ne immemor, dt\que unammis \falsesoda\Hbus.
II. This species of verse is sometimes called the Great- er Asclepiadic.
EPICHORIAMBIC VERSE.
I. By Epichoriambic verse is meant a species of measure wb'ch admits some feet that do not properly belong to cho-
And again :
Quod jam pentametri nan patitur modus ;
Nam tic tres videas essc pedes datos. (Id., 2663.)
184 CHORIAMBIC MEASURES.
riambic measure, but which are, as it were, superadded thereto.1
II. The most important varieties of this species of meas- ure are the two following :
1. EPICHORIAMBIC TRIMETER CATALECTIC, or SAPPHIC.
I. This measure is a variety of the choriambic trimeter catalectic, and is composed of a second epitrit, a choriam- bus, and a bacchius ; as,
Horat. Jam satis ter\ris ritvis at\que diras. Catull. Casaris vts\ens mdnument\a magni.
II. In practice, however, it is more convenient to con sider it as composed of a trochee, a spondee, a dactyl, and two trochees ; as,
Jam satfis terras riivls \ atque \ dlr$. Casarfit vis\ens monu\menta \ magni.
III. Horace invariably has a spondee in the second place ; but Catullus, imitating the example of the Greeks, admits a trochee ; as,
Seu Sac\ds sag\itttfer\dsque \ Parthos.
IV. Horace generally makes the first syllable of the dac- tyl caeeural ; as, .^
Pindarum quisquis \\ studet CEmulare. Sanguinem, per quos || cecidere justa. Integer vitas || scelerisque purus.
V. More rarely the first two syllables of the dactyl close a word, thus forming a species of trochaic caesura ;2 as,
1 . The term Epichoriambic is from kxi, " in addition <o," and xopt-
2. Horace, however, seems to have changed his opinion with regard to this pause. In the first three books of the Odes it occurs but seldom (as, for example, 1, 10; 1, 12; 1, 25; 2, 30; 2, 6, &c.), while in book fourth it happens eleven times in odes second and sixth, four timea in ode eleventh, and twelve times in the Carmen Saculare. The form
Nuntivm curcecque lyra parcntcm, where the enclitic que is the second *yl!al»!c of the dactyl, occurs twice
CHORIAMBIC MEASURES. 185
Laurea donandus \\ Apollinari. Pinus out impulsa \\ cupressus Eu fo.
VI. In one instance, Horace lengthens a short syllable in the caesura ; as,
Angulus ridel || ubi non Hymetto. (Od., 2, 6, 14.)
VII. Catullus, following the Greeks, neglects this caesu- ra altogether ; as,
Sen Sacas sagittiferosque Parthos. (11, 6.) Ultimi flos prostereunte postquam. (11, 22.)
Sapphic Stanza.
I. This stanza, so called from the two celebrated frag- ments of the gifted Sappho that have reached our times, consists of three Sapphic lines, such as have just been de- scribed, followed by an Adonic, or Dactylic Dimeter Acat- alectic.
II. Taking Horace for our model, the scale of the Latin Sapphic stanza will be as follows :
Jam satis terris \\ nivis atque dirts Grandinis misit \\ pater, et rubente Dextera sacras \\ jaculatus arces Terruit urbem.
III. There is one feature prominently conspicuous in the Sapphic stanza, namely, a close connexion between the third and fourth lines, and hence Horace four times divides a word between them :
only in the first three books, namely, Od., 1, 10, 6, and 18, while in the fourth book it is found four times in ode second, once in ode sixth, and seven times in the Carmen Saculare. (Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 195.)
Q 2
186 CHORIAMBIC MEASURES.
Labitur ripa, Jove non probante, ux-
-orius amnis. (1, 2, 19.) Tkracio bacchante magis sub inter-
-lunia vento. (I, 25, 11.) Grosphe non gemmis ncque purpura ve-
-nale nee auro. (2, 16, 7.) Pendulum zona bene te secuta e-
-lidere collurn. (3, 27, 59.)
IV. We have a similar instance in Catullus (11, 11) :
Gallicum Rhenum horribilisque ultim- -osque Britannos.
V. This division of a word is confined, it will be -remem- bered, to the third and fourth verse; no example being found of such a division at the end of the first, second, or fourth. Hence it has been conjectured, and the supposi- tion is a very probable one, that neither Sappho, nor Catul- lus, nor Horace ever intended the stanza to consist of four separate verses, but wrote it as three, namely, two five foot Sapphics, and one of seven feet (the fifth foot of the long verse being indiscriminately either a spondee or trochee) ; thus:1
Jam satis terris nivis atque dirce Grandinis misit pater, et rubente Dextera sacras jaculatus arces, terruit urbem.
dum se nimium querenti Jactat ultorem, vagus et sinistra Labitur ripa, Jove non probante, uxorius amnis.
Otium bello furiosa Thrace, Otium Medi pharelra decori, Grosphe, non gemmis, neque purpura venale nee auro.
VI. Elision sometimes takes place between the second I. Monthly Review, January, 179? p. 45.
CHORIAMBIC MEASURES. 187
and third, and the third and fourth lines. Thus, in 'Hor- ace,
I 2. Dissidens plebi numero beator(um) I 3. Eximit virtus, &c. (2, 2, 18.)
2. Mugiunt vacca, libi tollit hinnit(\im)
3. Apia quadrigis equa, &c. (2, 16, 34.)
2. Plorat, et vires animumque moresfaue)
3. Aureos educit in astro, nigro(que)
4. Invidct Oreo. (4, 2, 22.)
:3. Romulas genti date remque prolemfaue) 4. Etdecusomne. (C. S., 47.)
VII. Elisions of this kind, however, are not necessary in their nature. Thus we find an hiatus between the third and fourth lines in the following, from Horace : Neve te nostris vitiis iniquum
. Odor aura. (1,2, 47.) Between the first and second, from the same : Sive mutatajuvenem figura Ales in terris, &c. (1, 2, 41.) And between the second and third :
Aut super Pindo gelidove in Haemo Unde vocalem temere insecutas
Orphea sylvas. (I, 12, 6.)
2. EPICHORIAMBIC TETRAMETER CATALECTIC, or GREATER
SAPPHIC.
I. This measure consists of a second epirrit, two chor- iambi, and a bacchius ; as follows :
Horat. Te 'deos or\o Sybarin\\cur pr operas \ amandd.
188 IONIC VERSES.
II. It is, in fact, the ordinary Sapphic, with the addition of a choriambus in the third place.
III. The first syllable of the first choriambus ought to be caesural, and there ought to be a division of the verse after the first choriambus.1
SECTION XXXV.
IONIC VERSES.
Ionic verses are of two kinds, the Ionic a majore and Ionic a minore, which are so denominated from the feet or measures of which they are respectively composed.
1. IONIC A MAJORE VERSES. Of these the most celebrated is the
Ionic a Majore Tetrameter Brachycatalectic.
I. This measure is otherwise called the Sotadean, from Sotddes, a Thracian, who lampooned Ptolemy Philadelphus.
II. In its pure state it consists of three Ionic a majore feet, followed by a spondee, according to the following scheme :
Tula mans \ iras vtdet j e littore J nauta.
III. Several of these Sotadean verses are to be found ia the remains of the Greek poets, and have been carefully analyzed by Hermann. In Latin, a short fragment of En- nius, and a few irregular lines in Martial and Petronius Arbiter, are the only specimens of the measure, except such as are met with in Plautus. (AuL, 2, 1, 30 ; 3, 2.)
IV. The Ionics a majore of Martial, and these are but two lines, have the proper foot in the first two places, and a ditrochaeus in the third, followed by a spondee.
Has cum gemin\d compede \ dedicdt catenas Sdturne tib\l Zbilus \ dnnulos pri\ores.2
1. Hermann, D. M. E., 3, 16.— Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 199.
2. Ep., 3, 30.
IONIC VERSES. 189
V. This change of the third measure to .a ditrochaeus eems to have been a favourite with the writers in this
species of verse, as tending to giv.e greater softness and harmony to the otherwise stiff and monotonous line.
VI. By a farther variation, either of the long syllables in each of the three Ionic measures might be resolved into two short, which resolution was regarded as an improve- ment ;' but it does not appear that both the long syllables were ever thus resolved at the same time.
Petron. Pede tendite, | cursum addite, convolate planta.
Cafcillus er|i£ consimilis pedis figura?
Solet integer \ anapaestus et | in fine locari.
Hunc ejfici\et Minucms | ut quis vocitetur.
Catalexis enim dicitur \ ea clausula | versus. Petron. Ferrum timui, quod trepi\do male dabat [ uswn.
2. IONIC A MINORE VERSES.
I. The Ionic a minore verse is entirely composed of that foot or measure called the Ionic a minore.
II. We have one specimen of this kind of verse in Hor- ace (Od., 3, 12), which is differently arranged by different editors, but is usually considered as a system of Tetramc' ters Acatalectic.
III. Ionic a minore verses, in fact, are not confined to any particular number of feet or measures, but may, like anapaestics, be extended to any length, provided only, that, with due attention to synapheia, the final syllable in each measure be either naturally long, or be made long by the concourse of consonants ; and also that each sentence or period terminate with a complete measure, having the spondee or two long syllables of the Ionic foot for its close.
1. " Nam, quofuerint crebrius hipedes minuti,
Vibrare sonum versiculos magis videmus."
(Terent. Maur.,v. 2054, seq.)
2. This line, together with the* ihree that follow, are taken from Te- rentianus.
190
LOGAOSDIC VEFxSES.
IV. The specimen from Horace above alluded to is as follows :
Mlserdrum est \ neque dmbri \ dare ludum, \ neque dulcl Mala vino \ Idvere ; out ex\dnimdri \ metuentes Pdtruce verb\erd lingua. \ Tibi qudlum \ Cylhereas Puer ales, \ tibi telds, \ operdsce\que Minerve Studium laufert, \ Neobule, \ Lipdrei \ nitor Hebri, &c.
SECTION XXXVI.
LOGACEDIC VERSES.
I. Loga&dic verses are those which, are formed by add- ing any number of trochees to any dactylic verse.
II. They receive their name from Adyo^, " discourse" and aoidrj, "song" because dactylic verse is the lofty language of poetry, whereas the trochaic approaches more nearly to ordinary discourse.1
III. Of logaoedic verses tlie most important are the fol- lowing :
1. ARCHILOCHIAN HEPTAMETEE.
I. This measure is composed of a Dactylic Tetrameter a priore, followed by a pure Trochaic Dimeter Brachycata- lectic.
II. The first three feet may be either dactyls or spon- dees ; the fourth is always a dactyl ; the last three are tro- chees. Thus,
|
1 |
2 |
3 |
4 II 5 |
6 |
7 |
|
— |
|
|
1 |
Horat. Solvilur \ acns hy\ems grd\td vice || verts \ et Fav\orii.
III. The first syllable of the third foot ought to be caesu ral, and the fourth foot ought to end with a word.
1. The iambus is the true foot for discourse, and the trochee for dan- cing. Thus Aristotle remarks, /idAiora ^EKTIKOV ruv ptrpuv TO mu- tetov tan. (A. P., 4.)
LOGACBDIC VERSES. 191
IV. Horace uses this species of verse once in Od., 1, 4, where it is placed alternately with an Iambic Trimeter Catalectic.
2. ALCAIC DECASYLLABIC, or MINOR ALCAIC.
I. This measure consists of a pure Dactylic Dimete- Acatalectic, followed by a pure Trochaic Manometer Acat alectic ; as,
Flumina \ constiter\lnt ac\uto.
II. This forms the fourth line of the celebrated Alcaic or Horatian stanza, Avhich we are presently to consider.
3. PHAL^ECIAN HF.NDECASYLLABIC.
I. This measure, termed Phalaecian from the poet Pha- laecus, and Hendecasyllabic because consisting of eleven syl- lables (IvSena aivl/lafiat), is composed of five feet, a spon- dee, a dactyl, and three trochees ; as, .
Mart. Non est \ vlvere \ sed val\ere \ vita. Catull. Quoi don\o lepld\um nov\um Kb\ettum.
II. In other words, it consists of a Dactylic Dimeter Acatalectic, followed by a Trochaic Dimeter Brachycatalectic.
III. Catullus, with whom this is a favourite measure, uses a trochee not unfrequently in the first place, and some- times an iambus ; as,
Aridja modo pumice expolitum. (1, 2.) Tota | millia me decem poposcit. (41, 2.) Aml\cos medicosque convocate. (41, 6.) Meas | esse aliquid putare nugas. (1, 4.)
IV. This liberty, however, was rarely taken by the po- ets subsequent to Catullus.1
V. Catullus has in some instances marred the elegance
1. In Statius, for instance, not a single example of the kind occurs in upward of 450 lines; in Prudentius, not one in above 260 ; not one in Ausonius, who has more than 2000 verses in this measure ; while Sido- nius Apollinaris, in upward of 1200 Phalascians, has not above two that can bo proved, and those are proper names. (Carey's Lot. Pros., p. 282.)
192 COMPOUND MEASURES.
and harmony of this measure, by introducing a heavy spon- dee into the second place ;l as,
Te camp\o (\\\<es>\ivimus minore. (55, 3.) Etf mult\ls \ang\uoribus peresus. (55, 31.)
VI. The same poet, in one line of a very irregular piece, has a tribrach in the first place, a license, however, which appears authorized by the difficulty of otherwise employing a proper name.
Cameri]um mihi pessima puclla. (55, 10.)
VII. The name Hcndecasyllabic does not exclusively be- long to Phalaecian verse, since there are other measures to which it is equally applicable. For instance, the Sapphic and a variety of the Alcaic not only contain the like num- ber of syllables, but also in Iflte proportion of long to short, so that the same words sometimes may, in different posi- tions, become either a Phalaecian, a Sapphic, or an Alcaic. Thu
(Phal.) Summum \ nee metu\as di\em nee \ optes. (Sapph.) Nee di\em summ\um metu\ds nee \ optes. (Ale.) Summum \ nee opt\es || nee metu\as diem.
SECTION XXXVII.
COMPOUND MEASURES. 1. DACTYLICO-IAMBIC.
I. This measure occurs in the eleventh epode of Horace being used there alternately with the Iambic Senarius, and consists of a Dactylic Trimeter Catalectic, followed by an Iambic Dimeter Acatalectic ; as,
Scribere \ versicu\los \\ amor\c per\\cussum \ gram. ||
II. This measure properly falls under the head of Asy- nartete* verses, that is, the component parts are not subject
1. This is made by some a separate measure, and called Pseudo-Pha- leecian.
2. From a, privative, and avvapruu, " to join together ;" hence daw oprj/rof , " not closely joined together"
COMPOUND MEASURES. 193
to the ordinary laws of prosody and versification, since the last syllable of the first member of the verse may be either long or short, just as if it were the final syllable of a separ- ate line ; and, moreover, an hiatus may take place between the two members of the measure. Thus,
Inachia furere, || silvis konorem decutit.
Arguit et latere |1 petitus imo spiritus.
Libera consilia j| nee contumelies graves
Fervidiore mero || arcana promdrat loco.
Vincere mollitia fl amor Lycisci me tenet. These lines all occur in the eleventh epode of Horace. In the first, second, and third, the short final syllables in fu- rere, latere, and consilia are considered long, by virtue of their position at the end of the dactylic trimeter catalectic ; while in the fourth and fifth there is an hiatus between the two members of the verse (mero arcana and mollitia amor).
2. IAMBICO-DACTYLIC, or ELEGIAMBIC.
I. This measure is directly the reverse of the preceding, that is, it consists of an Iambic Dimeter, followed by a Dactylic Trimeter Catalectic. Thus,
Horat. Tu vi\na Torq\\uato \ move \\ consuls \ pressa me\o. Id. Redu\cet in \\ sedem \ vice. \\ Nunc et A\cha:meni\o. Id. Levdr\e dlr\\ls pect\ora \\ solKci\tudin1\bus. Id. Findunt ) Scamand\\ri flum\ina || lubncus \ et Simo\is.
II. This measure, like the preceding one, belongs prop- erly to the class of Asynartete verses ; and hence, in the second, third, and fourth lines just cited, the short final syl- lables in vice, pectora, and Jlumina are considered long, by virtue of their position at the end of the iambic dimeter.
HI. There are in all nine lines belonging to this species of verse in Horace. It is not used in a system by itself, but is placed alternately with the heroic hexameter in Epode 13.
B
194 COMPOUND MEASURES.
3. ALCAIC HENDECASYLLABIC, or GREATEK ALCAIC.
I. This measure is compounded of an Iambic Monome- ter Hypercatalectic and a pure Dactylic Dimeter Acatalectic ; as,
Horat. Vides \ ut alt\a II stet riive \ candidum. Claud. Venus \ revers\um || spernat A\dontdem.
II. But the first foot of the iambic portion is, of course, alterable to a spondee ; as,
Horat. O ma\tre pul\chra || filid | pulchrior. Claud. Victum \ fate\lur || Delos A\poltin<xn.
III. Horace much more frequently has a spondee than an iambus in the first place, and Prudentius always a spon- dee.
IV. The Alcaic is sometimes scanned with a choriambus and an iambus in the latter colon or member ; as,
Vides | ut alt\a [| stet nive cdnd\idum. Venus | revers\um |j spernat Jldo\ritdem.
V. Although Horace, who has made greater use of this measure in his lyric compositions than any other, never employed it except in conjunction with two other species of verse (see Alcaic Stanza, below), other write.-s have composed entire poems in it alone, as Prudentius, who h.ae a long piece entirely consisting of unmixed Alcaics (Perif teph., 14), and Claudian a shorter p'oduction (In Nup Hon. Aug. et Mar.).
VI. Claudian's piece begins as follows :
Princeps corusco sidere pulchrior, Partkis sagittis tendere certior, Eques Gelonis imperiosior, QuaK digna mentis laus erit ard.ua ? Qua digna forma laus erit igneat ? &c.
THE ALCAIC STANZA. I. This consists of four lines : the first two are Alcaic
COMPOUND MEASURES.
195
Hendecasyllabics, or Greater Alcaics ; the third is an lam- bic Dimeter Hypermeter, or Alcaic Enncasyllabic ; and the fourth is an Alcaic Decasyllabic, or Minor Alcaic.
II. The scheme of the Alcaic stanza is therefore as fol- lows :
Lines 1 and 2.
Line 3.
|
1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
|
^ — |
v-' — |
— |
_ s_x ^ |
V_x V. |
Line 4. I —
Vides ut alta stet nive candidum Soracte nee jam sustineant onus Sylvai laborantes geluque Flumina constiterint acuto ?
III. According to the scheme which has just been gi^'en, it will be seen that the first foot in each of the first two lines may be either an iambus or a spondee. Horace, however, as we have already remarked, gives a decided preference to the spondaic commencement. Out of 634 Alcaic Hendecasyllabics extant in his works, 18 only have an iambus in the first place ; that is, about one in thirty-five.
IV. Once only do we find in the same poet two lines in succession beginning with an iambus ; as,
Metu deorum continuit? quibus
Pepercit arts? O utinam nova. (1, 35, 37.)
V. The fifth syllable in the first and second lines ought always to be caesural ; as,
Non si trecen[is \ quotquot eunt dies.
VI. Horace, however, directly violates this rule twice.1
1. Special rules for the structure of the Alcaic stanza may be found in Ramsay, Lat. Pros., p. 220, seqq.
196 MISCELLANEOUS MEASURES.
Mentemquc lympTiatam Mareotico. (I, 37, 14.), S&ectandus in certamme Marlio. (4, 14, 17.)
SECTION XXXVIII.
MEASURES NOT INCLUDED UNDER THE PREVIOUS CLASSIFICATION.
1. CRETIC VERSE.
I. Cretic numbers belong in strictness to the trochaic, and are nothing else b'ut a Catalectic ' Trbchaic Dipodia, which consists of arsis, thesis, and arsis again.
II. Since this order is periodic, it is plain that the thesis cannot be doubtful, but consists always and necessarily of one short syllable only, but that each arsis may be resolv- ed ; whence it comes to pass that both the first and fourth paeon, and, moreover, even five short syllables, may be put for the ere tic. Thus,
III. It must also be remarked, that when several cretic feet are conjoined in one verse, no one coheres with an- other in a periodic order ; and the last syllable of the last foot, as every final syllable, cannot be resolved except in systems in which, since the numbers are continued in one unbroken tenour, the last foot of the verses, unless it is at the same time the last foot of the whole system, is subject to the same law as each intermediate foot.
IV. Cretics are much used by the Roman tragedians and comedians, and with the same license as to prosody as the rest of the metres. Whence, if they ever put a molossus for a cretic, they do it in such a manner as to conceal the faultiness of the measure under the ambiguity of a familiar pronunciation.1 Thus,
Plaut. Aut solu\tos smdt, \ qubs argcnt\o emerlt.2
1. Bciitlcy ad Cic., Tusc., 3, 19.— Id. ad Ter. Adelph., 4, 4, 2.— Hermann, D. E. M., 2, 19.
2. Captiv., 2, 1, 11.
MISCELLANEOUS MEASURES.. 197
Plain. Qua ne eject\ae c mdri dml>^a> sumus, \ te obsecro.1 Id. Ot tuo | reclpids \ tecto, serv\esque nos.*
V. As they commonly use the tetrameter, they often made the verse, divided into two equal parts, asynartete.' Thus, Ennius in the Andromacha :
Quid pct.dm \ praesldi out \ exscqudr, \ quove nunc Aut auxlK\o exsili \ — out fuga \fretd simf
VI. Plautus has not only dimeters sometimes, but still oftener catalectic tetrameters, and that, too, with the third foot having the last syllable doubtful, and the fourth admit- ting a resolution of the arsis. Thus, in the Trinummus (2, 1, I7,seqq.):
Da mlhi hoc, \ mel meum, \ si me amas, \ si audts :
Ibi pendent\em ferit : \jarn dmplius \ drat.
Non satis id \ est mall, \ ni dmpUus't \ etiam, &c.
2. BACCHIAC VERSE.4
I. The ancient metricians referred bacchiac numbers to the paeonic kind, as having arisen from the contraction of the second or fourth paeon.
II. Modern scholars,4 however, on account of the iambic anacrusis, have joined them with trochaic numbers, although they are in reality spondaic with an iambic anacrusis.
III. The numbers of the amphibrach (~ — —), if repeat- ed, were with reason displeasing to the ancients, on account of their too great weakness. Wherefore, to give them strength, they changed the trochee into a spondee, and thus produced the bacchius (— ).
IV. The Roman tragedians and comedians made great use of bacchiac verses, joining also, for the most part, many
. of them together.
1. Rud., 1, 5, 15. 2. Ibid., 1, 5, 19.
3. Vid. page 192.
4. Herm., Elem. Doctr. Metr., 2, 22.
R2
i
198 MISCELLANEOUS MEASURES.
V. The legitimate measure of a bacchius in the middle of verses is this, — ; but in the end of verses this,
The freer prosody of the Latins, however, tolerates both a long anacrusis and a dissyllabic one. And a dissyllabic one was usually admitted by Plautus in the first and third foot of tetrameters, that is, in the beginning of each mem- ber, which is commonly composed of two feet ; sometimes in the second and fourth foot also. Thus, in the Auhda- ia (2, 1, 4, seq.) :
Quamquam hand fals\a sum nos \ odidsas \ hdberi. Nam multum \ loquaces \ merito omnes \ habemur. In the Menaschm. (5, 6, 6) :
Merito hoc no\blsflt qui \ quidem hue ven\erimus. In the Amphitryon (2, 1, 15) :
Tun1 me verb\ero dudes \ herum lu\difican.
VI. Tetrameters having a caesura at the end of the sec- ond foot are a kind very much in use. That caesura, how- ever, is often neglected. Plautus, who delighted very much in this measure, sometimes inserted a dimeter in the midst of tetrameters. Sometimes he even coupled two verses by means of an elision ; as in the Amphitryon (2, 2) :
Satin parv\a res est \ volupta\tum in vita aij(que) In <Bta\te agunda, \ prUe quam quod \ molestum est.
VII. These tetrameters sometimes appear to have clau- sulae of an iambic dimeter catalectic ; as in Terence, An- drian, (3, 2, 4) :
Quod jussi ei\dari btber\e et quantum im\peravi || date max \ ego hue | revert\or.
VIII. Bacchiac verses sometimes appear to be continued in systems, so that a doubtful syllable has no place in the end of ti e verses, and words may be divided between two
MISCELLANEOUS MEASURES.
199
verses. Thus, we have the following from Varro (rrepl 'EfaywyT/f, ap. Non., p. 336) :
Quemnam te css\e dicam- \ fera qui \ manu cor-) ports ferv\idos font\ium aperis \ lacus san-\
gumis, te\que vita \ levas ferr\eo ense. \ IX. Catalectic bacchiacs, having the last foot an iambus, are remarkable in Plautus. Thus, we have the following dimeters in the Pcrsa (2, 28, 30) : Perge, ut copperas, Hoc, lend \ tlbl Delude, ut \ lubet, Herus dum hinc \ abcst. Videsne, tit \ tuis Dictls par\eo ?
3. SATURNIAN VERSE.
I. The Saturnian verse, which some rank among the asyn- artete measures, appears to have been the only one used by the most ancient Roman poets.
II. In it both inscriptions and poems were written. Liv- lus Andronicus translated the Odyssey into this measure, and in it Naevius wrote his poem on the First Punk; War.
III. The Saturnian has the following scheme :
|
1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
7 |
|
^ — |
•^ — |
V-1 |
^ |
v-x |
v-x |
Dabunt j maltim \ Melell\l \\ Nasvi\b po\etas.
IV. But the rude poets of this early age both disregard- ed the caesura often, and used every kind of resolution, re- solving even the doubtful syllable in the end of the first member. After the manner of ancient language, too, they allowed spondees in all the places. Nay, the most ancient of the poets seem to have thought it sufficient if their verses only bore some sort of resemblance to these numbers. The
i
200 UNION OF DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE.
verses of the inscription composed by Naevius on himself, and preserved by Aulus Gellius (1, 24), are tolerable enough :
Mbrta\lis im\morta\lis \\fiere \ siforletfas, Flerent \ diva | Cam<e\n(2 \\ N(zvi\um po\etam. Itaque \ pdstquam est \ Orcl\nb || trad~t\tus thes\auro, ObU\tl sunt | Roma \ loqui\\er Lat\ind \ lingua. V. The last of the Romans who used this measure ap- pears to have been Varro in his Satires.1
SECTION XXXIX.
ON THE UNION OF DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE.2
I. A poem receives the name of Monocolon, Dicolon, Tri- colon, &c., according to the number of different species of verse which it contains.
II. When a poem contains one species of verse only, it is called Monocolon (from ^ovog, " alone" " single" and KtoAov, " a limb? or " member''"). The Eclogues, Gcorgics, and JEneid of Virgil, the Satires and Epistles of Horace, the Metamorphoses of Ovid, are all examples of Carmina v. Monocola, since they consist of hexameters alone. So also the first ode of the first book of the Odes of Horace is a Carmen Monocolon, since it is a system of choriambic As- clepiadics, unbroken by any other species of verse ; and so on.
III. When a poem contains two species of verse, it is called Dicolon. The Fasti and Epistles of Ovid, the Ele- gies of Tibullus and Propertius, which are composed of dactylic hexameters and dactylic pentameters, placed alter- nately, are Carmina Dicola. So also those odes which are written in the Sapphic stanza : the third of the first book of Horace, which contains two different species of chor- iambic verse, and numerous others.
1. Herm., Doctr. El cm. Metr., 3, 9.
2. Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 230, seq.
UNION OF DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE. 201
IV. When a poem contains three different species of ?erse, it is called Tricolon. Of this we have an example in the Alcaic stanza of Horace, which is composed of three different kinds of verse.
V. Another series of terms has been "devised in order to point out the intervals after which the first species of verse used in any poem regularly recurs.
VI. When the first species of verse regularly recurs after the second line, the poem receives the epithet of Distrophon.
VII. Thus, poems composed in elegiac verse are called C»rmina Dicola Distropha. But a poem in the Sapphic stanza, although Dicolon, is not Distrophon^ because the first species does not recur regularly until after the fourth line.
VIII. When the first species of verse recurs after the third line, the poem receives the epithet Tristrophon ; after the fourth line, Tetrastrophon ; and after the fifth line, Pen- tastrophon.
IX. According to this system, a poem written in the Sapphic stanza is termed Carmen Dicolon Tetrastrophon; in the Alcaic stanza, Carmen Tricolon Tetrastrophon ; while the Epithalamium of Julia and Manlius, in Catullus, is Di- colon Pentastrophon.
X. This species of nomenclature, however, is by no means perfect, as it does not point out the circumstances under which the first species of verse is repeated. Thus, in the Alcaic stanza, the first two lines are in the same species of verse, the third and fourth are different from this and from each other ; the grammarians, however, call a poem in this stanza Tricolon Tetrastrophon. But if a stanza of four lines is arranged in such a manner that the first line is one species of verse, the second and the third different from the first, but the same with each other, and the fourth different from any of the preceding ; or if the first and second are different from each other, the third and fourth different from
202 LATIN ACCENTUATION.
the two preceding, but the same with each other, then, in either of these cases, the poem must be called Tricolon Tetraslrophon. So a poem in the Sapphic stanza is called Dicdlon Tetr a strop/ton ; but if a stanza were composed con- taining one Sapphic line followed by three Adonics, the poem would still bear the same appellation.
SECTION XL. LATIN ACCENTUATION.'
In every word of more than one syllable, one is distin guished by a peculiar stress or elevation of the voice, which is called accent, of which those that precede or follow are destitute. The syllable so distinguished is said to have the acute accent, which is sometimes marked thus (') ; the grave (^), which is seldom marked, is supposed to be placed over those syllables which are pronounced without that stress of the voice before spoken of. The circumflex, (*) or (~), is supposed to be formed by a combination of the acute and the grave, and hence is usually placed over contracted syllables.
In modern languages, the accent, when it falls upon a short syllable, has, in most cases, the same effect as if it were long ; but in Latin and Greek, accent and quantity were distinguished from each other ; and, by care and prac- tice, this may be done in reading those languages.
Words of two syllables have in Latin the accent on the first : if this is naturally long, as in Roma, mater, there is no difficulty ; if short, as homo, pater, we must endeavour to give the first syllable that percussion of the voice which constitutes the accent, without lengthening the vowel, 01 yet doubling the following consonant.
The accent never falls on the last syllable of Latin words except when words of the same letters, but different senses are to be distinguished by it : e. g., pone, behind ; ergo, on
1. Zum.pt' s Latin Grammar, Kenrick's edition, p. 469, seqq.
LATIN ACCENTUATION. 203
account of; to distinguish them from p6ne (imper. of pono), and €rgo, therefore.
Words of three syllables or more ha.ve the accent on the last syllable but one (penultima) when it is long, and on the last but two (antepenultima\ when the penult is short ; as, amasse, audisse, imperdtor, homines, Constantindpolis. No accent is in Latin thrown farther back than the antepenult- ima.
Some words, from their close connexion with those which precede them, are pronounced as if they were the last syl- lables of those -words ; e. g., prepositions when they are placed after their cases, and ne, que, ve. They are called enclitics; and the last syllable of the word to which they are appended always has the acute accent ; as, pectoribus- que.
As the system of accents in Latin is so simple, no ac- centual marks are used except the circumflex, which is placed over some contracted syllables, and over the abla- tives of the first declension (musd, poetfi), to distinguish them from the nominative. The Latins themselves do not place the circumflex over the genitive ; and it is doubtful if this form arose from contraction.
APPENDIX.
RELATIVE VALUE OF THE LATIN POETS AS METRICAL AUTHORITIES.!
I. WE will first give a list of the Latin poets, with the dates of their birth and death, where these particulars can be ascertained, and then a statement of their relative value as authorities in matters of a metrical nature.
Born. Flourished. Dud.
Lmus ANDRONICUS .B.C. . . 240 . . 220
NJEVIUS . . 235 . . 204
ENNIUS 239 . . . . 169
PLAUTUS 227 .. . . 184
C-ECILIUS . . 179 . . 168
PACUVICS 219 .. .. 130 (?)
TERENTIUS 194 . . . . 160
ATTIUS 170 .. 139 (alive 103)
LUCILIUS 149 . . 121 . . 103
AFRANIUS ...... . . 100 . .
LUCRETIUS 96 . . . . 52
CATULLUS ...... 87 .. . . 46
VIRGILIUS 70 .. . . 19
HORATIUS 65 .. . . 8
TIBULLUS 59 (!) . . . 20
PROPERTIES 54 (?) . . . 14
OVIDIUS 43 .. A.D. 17
Cornelius Gallus. Pedo Albinovanus. Publius Syrus. Marcus Manilius. Gralius Faliscus. Aulus Sabinus. CcEsar Germanicus.
1. Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. vii., seqq. S
206
APPENDIX.
Born. Flctibhed. Died.
PH.EDRUS .... A.D. . . 48 ..
SILIUS ITALICUS .... 25 . . . . 100
PERSIUS 34 . . . . 63
LUCANUS 38 . . . . 65
JUVEXALIS 40 .. . . 120
MARTIALIS 40 .. . . 101
PETROMUS ARBITER ... . . 61 . .
VALERIUS FLACCUS ... . . 69 . . 88
STATICS 61 .. . 96
SULPITIA . . 88 . .
Avianus . . 160 . .
Dionysius Cato .... . . 160
Serenus Sammonicus . . . . . . 212
Commodianus .... . . 265 . .
Nemesianus . . 280 . .
CALPURXIUS . . 284 . .
Porphyrius . . 326 . .
Juvencus . . 337 . .
ACSONICS 309 . . . . 394
Falconia . . 394 . .
Prudentius 348 . . 392 . .
CLAUDIANCS 365 (!) . 400 . .
Numatianus . . 416 . .
Paulinus 353 .. . . 431
Prosper Aquitanus ... . . . . 463
Sedulius . . 450 . .
Mamercus . . . . 474
Sidonius Apollinaris . . . 438 (!) . . . 484
Dracontius ' . . 456 . .
Martianus Capella ... . . 474 . .
Avitus . . 490 . .
Boethius 470 (?) . . . 524 (!)
Verrantius Fortunatus . . 530 . . . .
II. In the above list, some who precede Lucretius must be thrown out of consideration altogether. We can attach no importance, in controverted points, to these early bards, of whom nothing has descended to us except short and mutila- ted fragments. It is well known that these scraps are all
APPENDIX. 207
I
collected, at second hand, from the old grammarians and others, who. cited them for the purpose of proving or illus- trating particular points, which seldom have any reference to quantity. The quotations, it would seem, were frequently made from memory, and therefore subject to every kind of change and corruption in the first instance, in addition to the subsequent mutilations which they suffered in transcription, arising from the strange and uncouth dialect in which many of them were expressed.
III. The comic dramatists, Plautus and Terence, must also, in strictness, be excluded. We are still comparatively igno- rant of the laws by which their verse is regulated, notwith- standing the labours of such men as Erasmus, Scaliger, Fa- ber, Hare, Bentley, Hermann, and a host of others.
IV. Lucretius and Catullus, although inferior in genius to none of their successors, scarcely occupy the first rank in the estimation of the prosodian, because they may be said to exhibit the language in its transition state, at a period when much of the ancient roughness was removed, but when it had not yet received the last brilliant polish.
V. Virgil, Horace, Tibullus, Propertius, and Ovid are our great standards ; yet even among these slight differences may be perceived. The first two never admit the double i in the genitive oj^iouns of the second declension in ium and ius, which is common in Ovid ; and the shortening of final o in verbs, which was afterward extended to nouns and adverbs, first begins to appear in the immediate successors of Virgil.
VI. Of the above, Propertius is the least valuable, on ac- count of the small number and imperfections of the MSS., which have, in many passages, baffled the acuteness of the most practised editors.
VII. Next follows a group of seven, all of little moment. After these we come to Phaedrus, whose fables are now gen- erally received as authentic ; but the text is derived from one or two indifferent MSS., and is, consequently, in many places confused and unsatisfactory.
VIII. With regard to those who come after, up to the end of the first century, it may be laid down as a rule, that their authority is admissible in points where we can obtain no information from purer sources, but must never be placed
208
APPENDIX.
in competition with that of the great masters who went before.
IX. All the successors of Statins must be regarded as of little value for matters of prosody, except Calpurnius, Auso- nius, and Claudian, the latter of whom is not more remark- able for the purity of his diction than for the false glitter of his style.
INDEX.
Fige
A final 66-68
A (i in numerals n. 3 on 68 A ending 1st member of com- pound words 43
A in sing, increment of 1st declension ...... 49
A in sing, increment of 3d de- clension 50
A in plural increment of nouns 59 A. in increment of verbs . . 61 A the preposition in composi- tion 40
A in Greek compounds n. on 43 A vocative of Greek nouns in
es and e ... n. 2 on 68 Ab, the preposition in compo- sition 41
Abicit, abici 126
Abiegni as ab-yegni . . .120 Abiete as ab-yete . . . .119 Absridi and abscidi ... 33 Academia . . . n. 2 on 22 Acatalectic verses . . . .144
Accent., Latin 202
Acephalous verses .... 145 Achille .... n. 1 on 69 Ad, preposition in composition 41 Adicit (adjicit), adici, <fc. . 126 Adjectives ending in -acus, -icus, cf-c., quantity of pe- nult of 99
Adonic verse 146
Ador n. 1 on 57
Aeta n. on 25
^Egaeon 5-7
JEolic dialect, pronunciation
of n. 2 on 157
JEolic pentameter . . . .151 Afranius, metrical authority of 206
Agnltum 37, 40
Agri-cultura 45
Ai in genitive of 1st declension explained . . . . n. on 17
Ai, quantity of 19
S2
Aio (trisyllabic and dissylla,
bic) 19
Aio explained . . n. 2 on 19 AL, nouns ending in, incre- ment of 51 and n.
Alcaic verse (the greater) . .194
" (minor) . . .191
enneasyllabic . . .167
decasyllabic . . . .191
hendecasyllabic . . .194
stanza .... 194-5
Alcmanian tetrameter . . . 149
Alexandrea 21
Alius 18
Alterius .... n. 1 on 18
Ambe 23
Ambitus and ambitus
25, 35, n. on 40 AN, Greek accus. from nom.
a n. 2 on 85, 87
AN, Greek accus. from nom. as 85
Anap&st 162
Anapcestic verses . . . 161—5 " dimeter . . . .163 " " catalectic . 164
" manometer . . . 163
Anas 90
Anceps, ancipes, <fc. n. 1 on 49 Antea, ^-c., formation of n. 1 on 66
Antithesis 125
Aperio, quantity of initial syl- lable 127
Aph&resis 122
Apocope 124
Appendix, increment of
n. 1 on 56 AR, nouns in, increment of
56 and n. Arabia, quantity of 1st syllable 128
Archaisms 121
Archilochian iambic dimeter
hypermetcr 167
Archilochian heptameter . . 190 Ariete as ar-yete . . . .119
210
INDEX.
Aristophanes, metre much used
by 174
As final 52, 89
As, Greek nouns in, increment
of 52
As, Greek nominative ... 90 As, " accusative plural . 90 Asclepiadic verse (minor) . . 182 AT in contracted preterites . 81 Atreides, Atrldes . n. 2 on 98 Attius, talus as metrical au- thority 206
Ausonius, value as metrical
authority 208
Authority in quantity ... 15
B.
3 final 80
Bacchiac verse 197
Base in metre 141
Bebryx, increment of ... 56
Bibi, from bibo 32
Bldnum, 4-c 46 and n.
Bigae, 4-c n. 3 on 45
Bimus, 4-c- • • • n. 6 on 45 Bobus and bubus . n. 1 on 48 Brachycatalectic verse . . . 144 Britto, increment of ... 57
C.
81
C final
Caecilius, value as metrical
authority 206
Ceesura 101
kinds of .... 102
" rules for .... 104
" power of . . 106-107
-Cams, trisyllabic .... 18
Callinus, inventor of elegy . 156
Calpurnius, value as metrical
authority 208
Catalectic verses .... 144 Catullus, value as metrical au- thority 207
Causidicus 40
Cave, quantity of . n. 2 on 70 Cecldi and cecldi .... 31
Celtiber 50, 88
Censltum, censltor, 4-c.
n. 2 on 36
Choliambus 171
Chorea and chorea .... 20 Choriambic verses . . 17 188
Choriambic pentameter . . 183 " tetrameter . . . 183 " Asclepiadic te- trameter 182
Choriambic tetrameter catalec-
tic 151
Choriambic trimeter acatalectic 180 " " cataicctic 181 " dimeter acatalectic 150 Ciris, value as metrical au- thority n. on 7?
Citum, citum, and compounds 35 Claudian, value as metrical
authority 208
Cogmtum, 4-c 37, 40
Compendl-facio 45
Compound words, quantity of 39 " metres . . 192-196
Concitus 34-35
Conjicio 126
Conjugations, ancient form of
n. 4 on 23
Connubium 40
Conopeum and Conoplum
n. 1 on 22
Consonants . • 13
Contracted syllables . . 23-24 Contraction of ea . . . .114 " " ei . . . . 115 " " eo . . . . 115 " " ia . . . . 118 " " ii . . . . 116 " " io . . . . 116 " " iu . . . . 116 " " oo .... 117 " " ee . . . . 117 Corcodilus and crocodilus . 126
Cretic verse 196
Cui (dissyllabic) .... 74 Cur n. 1 on 88
D.
D final 80
Dactylic verses . . . 145-161 " " casura in . 159
" versification, origin
of 157
Dactylic hexameter . . . .157 " " Meiurus .161
" Priapean .... 160 " pentameter . . .151 " " rules for 152
" " JGolic . 151
INDEX.
211
Fige
Dactylic Phi, .cecian pentameter 15C " tetrameter a priore . 14S " " aposteriore 149
" " Meiurus . 148
" " catalectic . 148
" trimeter .... 147 " with a base . 147 " ." hypercatalec-
tic 147
Dactylic trimeter catalectic . 146
" dimeter . . . . ] Dactylico-iambic metre . .192 De, preposition in composition 40
Dedifrom do 32
Dejero 40
Deponent verbs . . n. 1 on 60 Derivatives, quantity of . . 37
" " " excep-
tions to . . . n. 3 on 37, 39 Desiderative verbs in -urio . 100 Di, preposition in composition 40
Diaeresis 121
Diana n. on 19
Diastole 128
Dlcare, dicere 38
Dicolon 200
Dionaeus, remarks on quantity
o/ae 25
Diphthongs 13
" quantity of . . 25 " erroneously rank- ed as 26
Dipodia 141
Dirimo . . . . . n. on 40
Dirutum n. on 35
Dlsertus n. on 40
Distrophon 201
Diu n. 1 on 79
Do, increment of
61-62, and n. 1 on 61
Oonec n. 1 on 81
Double letters 13
Duo n. 1 on 47
E.
E final 68-72
E " of adverbs .... 70 E " " monosyllables . . 71 E in Greek neuter plural . . 70 E in increment of 3d declen- sion 52-54
E in contracted gen. and dat. of 5th declension . n. 1 on 69
Ihp
E in plural increment of nount 59 E in verbal increment . . . 62 E before R (in verbs) ... 62 E " RAM, RIM, RO . . . 63 E terminating 1st member of
compound words .... 44 E, preposition in composition 40 E long from Greek ei . . . 21 E ire imperative of verbs of 2d
conjugation . . n. 2 on 70 EA, Greek accusative from BUS 22
Ectasis 128
Ecthlipsis 112
Ego, quantity of final syllable
n. 1 on 78
Eheu n. 1 on 20
Ei of 5th declension . n. on 17 EL in Hebrew names . . 53, 83 Elegiambic measure . . .193
Elegiac distich 155
Elegy, origin o/(!tayof) . .156 Elision affinal vowels . . . 108 " of M final and its vow- el sometimes neglected . .113 Elision, effect of in poetry . 108 " at the end of a verse 113 " of the vowel of ne 109
<( U « «
sometimes neglected . . .110 Elision of a short vmoel neg- lected in Virgil . . . .112 Elision in compound words . 24 " of final s
n. 2 on 108, 107, 108 Elision, rules for . . . .113 Endo for in . . . n. 3 on 23 Ennchemimeris . . n. 1 on 102 Ennius, value as metrical au- thority 206
Eos, Greek genitive from EVS 22
Epenthesis 123
Epichoriambic verse . . .183
" trimeter catalec- tic 184
Epichoriambic tetrameter . . 187 ER, nouns in, increment of '53-54
Ergo n. 1 on 77
-erunt of preterite, shortening of penult in . 63, n. 1 on 127
Srutum n. on 35
s final . . . 90, n. 2 on 90 Ss of Greek nouns .... 92 Ss Greek masc. singular . 53-54
212
E s from edo
INDEX.
n. 1 on 91 Es/rom sum, and compounds
n. 1 on 91
Ens, adjectives in .... 21 Eus, Greek proper names in . 26 " according to Latin de- clension 26
Excitus 34-35
F. Fac n. 3 on 81
Facio, verbs compounded with 44
Faliscan verse
n. 1 on 148
Fame, quantity of final syllable
n. 1 on 69
Far n. 1 on 88
Feet, metrical 131
" table of. 138-139 " simple .... 132-135
compound . isochronous
135-138 142-143
Fere 71
Fidi from findo 32
FIGURES OF PROSODY 101-131 Final syllables 66
" " of a verse . 97
Fio, quantity of penult n. on 16
" verbs compounded of . . 44 Fluviorum as fluv-yorum . 120
Foris n. 1 on 94
Fortuitus 120
Fur n. 1 on 28
Fuvi, an old perfect . . . 123
G.
Galliambus 175
Gerunds in do, quantity of final syllable . . n. 3 on 76
Glyconic verse 180
Gratis n. 1 on 94
H.
H a mere breathing . 14, 16, 27 H dropped between two vowels 24 Hannibal . . . n. 1 on 51, 82 Hemistich . 144
Hcphthcmimeris
n. 1 on 102
Heroic casural pause . . .159
" verse 158
Hexameters most ancient
n.. 2 on 157 Htxametcrs introduced into the
n by Ennius . . .156 I lie and hoc . . 82 and n. 1
Hipponactic tetrameter . . 174 " trimeter . . .172
Hodie 127
Horace, value as metrical au- thority 207
Hymen 53
Hypercatalectic verses . . . 145 Hypcrmeter verses . . . . 143
I.
I as a consonant, and sounded
as initial y 119
I terminating 1st member of
compound words .... 45 I in singular increment of 3d
declension 54
I in plural increment of nouns 59 I in verbal increment ... 63 Ifinal ......... 72
I long from Greek ei . . . 21 I Greek' vocative of 3d declen- sion 72
I final lengthened by arsis
n. 1 on 72 I in Zdfut. ind. and perf. subj.
65 and n. 1
I in Greek dative 3d declension 72 Iambic verses . . . 165-176
trimeter 169
" comic . . 172
" catalectic . 168
scazon .... 171
tetrameter ... 173
catalectic 174
' dimeter .... 167
" " acephalous 166
" " hypermeter 167
" " catalectic . 166
lambico-dactylic metre . 193
Iambus, origin of name . 133
Iber 50, 86
Ibi n. 2 on 73
Ibidem 46
Idem n. 2 on 45
IESUS 97
ILIS, adjectives in, quantity of
penult In, preposition in composition
H
41
Increment of nouns .... 48
" " 1st and 2d
declension . . . 50 end n. 2
Increment of nouns, 3d declen- sion . . 50-59
213
* "Sc
Increment, plural of nouns 59-00
" ofrcrbs . . . 60-66
Indu .... 79 and n. 2, 23
Injicit (inicit) 126
Innuba 40
INCS, adjectives in . . . 99-100 lo and io .... 20 and n. 2 /owe verses .... 188-190
" a majors 188
*' a minore 189
Is m rcris of 4,th conjugation 93 Is in 2d fut. ind. and perf.
subj n. 2 on 94
IB final 92
Isochronous feet 142
IT in contracted preterites . . 81
Italia 128
Iter and Itiner . n. 1 on 48-49 ITUM, supines in . 36 and n. 2 las, genitive in . . . n. on 18 Ins, proper names in . • n. on 18 Ivi in the preterite .... 64 Tx, increment of nouns in . 55
J.
. 14 . 27 27-28 . 126
J not a double consonant J, vowel long before Jacio, compounds of . Jecur, increments of
n. 1 on 48-49
Tuvencus, value as metrical authority . . . . n. on 47
Kdfj.avdpof
K.
L.
n. 2 on 28
L final 82
Labare, labi 38
"Lar, quantity of a in n. 1 on 89
Legare, legere 38
Leonine verses 168
Letters 13
Liquefacio 44
Liquids 13
Livius Andronicus, value as
metrical authority . . . 206 Logaccdic verses . . 190-192 Lucerna from luceo . n. on 38 liticilius, value as metrical au- thority 206
Page
Lucretius, vclut as metrical authority . . . . . . 207
Luorlfacio and lucrlfio . . 45 Ludi-magister 45
M.
M final short 84
M " elided 84
M " " (the reason)
n. 1 on 84
M " not elided .... 84 M " in the best writers eli- ded except in compounds of com (con) and circum . . 85 Maeotis, quantity of 1st sylla- ble n. on 25
Maledicus 40
Mamercus, value as metrical
authority . . . . n. on 47 Maragdus (MupayJof) n. 2 on 28 Martianus CapeUa, value as metrical authority n. 1 on 89
Mas, maris 51
Mastix, -igis, and mastix,
-ichis 55
Meiurus tetrameter . . . .148
Metathesis 125
Metre, definition of . . 140
" classification of 140-141 Mihi, sibi, tibi, <fc. . n. 2 on 73 Modo, quantity affinal syllable
n. 1 on 78 Molestus/rom moles
n. 3 on 37-38
Monocolon 200
Mutes 13
" and liquids . . . 29-30
N.
N find 85
Naevius, value as metrical au- thority 206
Nasidienus as Nasld-yenus .- 120
Ne, elision in 109
Necesse, nefas, e£c. n. 3 on 44
Nenu n. 2 on 79
Nequeo .... n. 3 on 44 Nequis, nequam, <fc. n. 3 on 44 Nescis . . . . n. 4 on 93, 100
O.
O final. . . . 0 in composition
74-79 . 47
214
INDEX.
O in Greek cases .... 56 O in " nominatives . . 75 O in singular increment of 3d
declension 56
. 0 terminating 1st member of
compound Greek words . . 47 O terminating 1st member of
compound Latin words . . 47 0 i/i plural increment of nouns 59 O in the gerund . . n. 3 on 76 O in increment of verbs . . 66 O of adverbs ... n. 4 on 76 Ob, preposition in composition
41,42
Objicio (obicio) 126
Octo 78-79
Octonarius 173
Odyssey translated in Satur-
nian verse 199
Ohe 19 and n., 71
OLUS, diminutives in ... 100
Omitto 127
ON, Greek singular ... 87 Ox (QX), Greek gen. plural . 85 Ophites versus . . . n. on 157 OR, Greek nouns in ... 57 Orion .... 23 and n. 1, 57
Qsfinal 95
Ovid, value as metrical au- thority 207
P. Pacuvius, value as metrical
authority 206
Paeonius and Paeonius
n. 2 on 116
Palus 96 and n. 2
Par, paris, and compounds
51, n. 1 on 89
Paragoge 124
Parietibus as par-yetibus . 119
Paramiac 162, 164
Patefacio 44
Patronymics, quantity of pe- nult of 98-99
Pejero 40
Peleldes and Pelides n. 2 on 98
Penes 92
Pentadius, de adventu veris .
n. 1 on 157
Pentastrophon 201
Penthemimeru . . n. 1 on 102 Penult ima ... 15
Pajt
Penultima of u* 'ds, quantity
of 98-100
Pepedi 31
Per, preposition in composition 41 Perfects, old, how formed . .123 Phaedrus, value as metrical
authority 207
Phalcccian dactylic pentameter
150, 191
Phal&cian hendecasyllabic . 1£1 P/terccratic verse . . . .181 Placare, placere .... 38
Platea 21
Plautus, value as metrical au- thority 207
Pluvi, old perfect . . . .123 Poets, Latin, relative value as
metrical authorities . . . 205 Polypus ..I.... 97 Porsonian pause . . . .171
Position 27
Possls n. 4 on 93
Postea n. 1 on 67
Prae, preposition in composi- tion before a vowel . 25 and n. Prepositions in composition 40-43 Preterites, reduplicating . . 31 " of two syllables
32 and n. " in ui anciently had
u long 124
Priamides 128
Priapean verse 160
Pro, the preposition in compo- sition 42-43
Pronuba ........ 40
Propago 43
Propertius, value as metrical
authority 207
Propino 43
Prosody :B
Prosodial rules, origin of . ±5
Prosthesis 122
Prudentius, value as metrical authority ... n. 1 on 21
Puta n. 2 on 67
Putrefacio 44
Q.
Q, sound of 14
Quadriga; 45
Quando .... n. 1 on 47 Quandoque ...... 47
INDEX.
215
Page
QuandoquiJem 47
Quantity, definition of . . . 14
Quasi n. 1 on 72
Quatuor, <f-c 129
Quia, final syllable of n. 3 on 67 Quivis, cfc. . . . n. 1 on 46 Quomodo .... n. 3 on 78 Quotidianus . . . n. 4 on 46 Quotidie .... n. 4 on 46
R.
R final 87
Rare — facio, tmesis in . . 125 RE in composition .... 41 RE, vocative from nominative
in ER 126
RE made long in religio, <£c. 128 Recensitum . . . n. 2 on 36
Refert 41 and n.
Regula/nwn. rego . . n. on 38 Reperit, repulit, and retulit
128-129 Rutum and compounds . . 35
S.
S final 80
S " elided 108
Sal, salis . . . 51, n. 1 on 83
Sandix, -icis 56
Sanscrit analogies in Latin . 17, 18, 33, 45, n. 1 on 46, n. 2 on 83 Sapphic verses . . . 184-185 " " connexion be-
tween 3d and 4Jh line in . 185 Sapphic verses, elision in . .186
" greater 187
Sappho, inventress of 3Zolic
pentameter 151
Satin' n. 2 on 86
Saturnian verse . . . . .199 Sc, SP, SQ, ST, <$•<:., initial . 28 Scamander and Camann
n. 2 on 28
Scanning 144
Scazon 171
Scidi from scindo .... 32 Scio and nescio . . f . 75 Se, preposition in composition 40 Sedare, sedere, sidere, sedes 38
Selibra 44
Semisopitus 40
Semivowels 13
Senarius ....... 169
Serpentini versus . . n. on 157 Sidon, increment of ... 57 Sis from sies . . . n. 3 on 93
SM initial 28
Smaragdus and, Maragdus
n. 2 on 28
Sol n. 2 on 83
Solvo, soluo . . . n. 3 on 35
Sotadic verse 188
Spondaic tetrameter . . . 149
Statlra 100
Statim n. 1 on 100
Statum, quantity of penult of 34
Steti and stiti 32
Sub, preposition in composition 41 Subjicio (subicio) . . . .126 Supellex, increment of
n. 1 on 48-49
Supines of two syllables 33 and n.
" " " short,
as citum, 6fC . . . . . 34
Supines, polysyllabic . . 35-37
" contracted n. 1 on 37
Syllable, definition of . . . 13
" length of .... 14
Synteresis 114
" in compounds of semi ....... 119
Synalapha 108
" absorbs 2 syllables 108 " confounded by
Quintilian with syn&resis and ecthlipsis . . n. 1 on 107
Synapheia 130
" with elision . .131
Syncope 122-123
Syphax, -acis ... 52 and n.
Systole 126
Syzygy 141
T.
T final 80
Tantidem ... n. 2 on 46 Tenuia as ten-via . . . .120
Tepefacio 44
Terence, value as metrical au- thority 207
Tetrastrophon 201
Tiblcen .... n. 1 on 45
TIM. adverbs in 100
Tibullus, val-<-K <f« metrical au- thority 207
Tmesis . . 124, n. 1 on 125
216
r\rn;x,
Trans in composition ... 42 Trir.olon ...... 201
Triemimcris . . . n. 1 on 102
Tristr option 201
Trochaic verses . . . 176-179
" tetrameter catalectic 177
" dimeter .... 177
" " catalectic . 177
Tubicen .... n. 1 on 45
Tuli 32
U.
U sounded as W, and not form- ing a diphthong with follow- ing vowel 26
U sounded as V, and used as
a consonant 120
U in 1st member of compound
words 45
U in singular increment of
nouns 58-59
U in plural increment of nouns 59 U in increment of verbs . . 66
U final 79
U, contracted dative of &th de- clension . . . n. 1 on 79 Ubi and compounds n. 2 on 73, 74 Ubicunque . . . n. 5 on 46 Ubique and ubivis . a 5 on 46 ULUS, diminutives in . . .100 Ulysse (vocative) . n. 1 on 69 URIO, quantity of verbs end- ing in 39, 100
UEUS, future participle in . 66
Usfinal 95
Us, genitive of 4th declension,
how formed . . n. 3 on 96 Utf. and compounds . . . 73-74 Ui CM, supines in
36 and n. 2. n. 3 on 35
V.
V, use of . . . ... 14
Value of Latin poets as met- rical authorities . . 205-208 Vemens, <fc- • • • n. 2 on 118 Verse, union of different kinds
of 200
Verse, Latin, how denominated 144 Viden' . . 127, n. 2 on 86, 109
Vin' for visne 109
Virgil, value as metrical au- thority 207
Volvo, voluo . . . n. 3 on 35
Vowels 13
Vowel before another vowel . 16 « « in
Greek words 20
Vowel before h 16
Vulte'ius .... n. 2 on 18
X.
X, double letter, equivalent to
what 13
X initial 28
Y.
Y final 72,80
Y terminating 1st member of
compound words .... 45
Y in increment of nouns . . 54
Yi as diphthong 26
Ysfinal 92
Yx, increment of nouns in . 55
Z.
Z, double letter, equivalent to
what . 13
Z initial 28
Z, reason for preceding rowel remaining short before
n. 3 on 28
(0
BINDING SECT. NQV8 1978
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
LaL.Gr Anthon, Charles A6285s A system of Latin prosody and metre